RAD Data comm HCD-E1 Installation and Operation Manual

HCD-E1
HDSL CSU/DSU
Installation and Operation Manual
Notice
This manual contains information that is proprietary to RAD Data Communications. No part of this
publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without prior written approval by RAD Data
Communications.
No representation or warranties for fitness for any purpose other than what is specifically mentioned in
this manual is made either by RAD Data Communications or its agents.
For further information contact RAD Data Communications at the address below or contact your local
distributor.
International Headquarters
RAD Data Communications Ltd.
U.S. Headquarters
RAD Data Communications Inc.
24 Raoul Wallenberg St.
Tel Aviv 69719 Israel
Tel: 972-3-6458181
Fax: 972-3-6498250
E-mail: [email protected]
900 Corporate Drive
Mahwah, NJ 07430 USA
Tel: (201) 529-1100
Toll free: 1-800-444-7234
Fax: (201) 529-5777
E-mail: [email protected]
© 2001 RAD Data Communications
Publication No. 174-200-01/01
Warranty
This RAD product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from date of shipment. During the warranty period, RAD will, at its option, either repair or replace
products which prove to be defective. For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to
a service facility designated by RAD. Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to RAD and RAD shall pay
shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall pay all shipping charges, duties
and taxes for products returned to RAD from another country.
Limitation of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance
by Buyer, Buyer-supplied firmware or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation
outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper site preparation or
maintenance.
Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are the Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedies. RAD shall not be liable for
any direct, indirect special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or
any legal theory.
Safety Warnings
The exclamation point within a triangle is intended to warn the operator or
service personnel of operation and maintenance factors relating to the
product and its operating environment which could pose a safety hazard.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation, operation and maintenance of this
product. Only a qualified and authorized service personnel should carry out adjustment, maintenance
or repairs to this instrument. No adjustment, maintenance or repairs should be performed by either the
operator or the user.
Telecommunication Safety
The safety status of each of the ports on HCD-E1 are declared according to EN41003 and is detailed in
the table below. Interconnection of these ports with other apparatus should be made such that the
equipment continues to comply with clause 2.3 of EN60950 for SELV circuits after such a connection is
made.
Ports
Data channels, unbalanced E1,
supervisory port, alarm relay, LAN
HDSL, balanced E1
Safety Status
SELV
Circuit operating with Safety Extra-Low Voltage
TNV-1
Circuit whose normal operating voltage is within
the limits of SELV, on which overvoltages from
Telecommunications Networks are possible.
Regulatory Information
FCC-15 User Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of the Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to the radio communications. Operation
of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Warning per EN 55022
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in
which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer’s Name:
RAD Data Communications Ltd.
Manufacturer’s Address:
24 Raoul Wallenberg St.
Tel Aviv 69719
Israel
declares that the product:
Product Name:
HCD-E1
Conforms to the following standard(s) or other normative document(s):
EMC:
Safety:
EN 55022 (1994)
Limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance
characteristics of information technology equipment.
EN 50082-1 (1992)
Electromagnetic compatibility – Generic immunity standards
for residential, commercial and light industry.
EN 60950 (1992/93)
Safety of information technology equipment, including
electrical business equipment.
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC. The product was tested in a typical configuration.
Tel Aviv, August 4th, 1998
Haim Karshen
VP Quality
European Contact: Rad Data Communications GmbH, Berner Strasse 77, 60437 Frankfurt am Main, Germany
Quick Start Guide
Installation of HCD-E1 should be carried out only by an experienced
technician. If you are familiar with RAD's HDSL modems, use this guide to
prepare HCD-E1 for operation.
1. Installing HCD-E1
Switch and
Jumper Settings
HCD-E1 contains two sets of jumpers:
•
•
Main board internal jumpers and DIP switch
E1 sublink interface board jumpers.
If you are using HCD-E1 as a central unit (LTU), you can use the default
settings for the main board R/C jumper and DIP switch.
•
If you are using HCD-E1 as a remote unit (NTU), do the following:
1. Turn the unit off.
2. Open the HCD-E1 case.
3. Set the R/C jumper (JP4) to the R (remote) position.
4. Set section 2 (DB INIT) of the S1 DIP switch to ON.
5. Turn the unit on for a short time (until self-test is completed).
6. Turn the unit off.
7. Set section 2 (DB INIT) of the S1 DIP switch to OFF.
8. Turn the unit on.
If you are operating HCD-E1 with a balanced E1 interface, you can use the
default settings of the sublink interface board jumpers.
•
If you are using HCD-E1 with an unbalanced E1 interface, do the
following:
1. Turn the unit off.
2. Open the HCD-E1 case.
3. Identify and remove the three nuts that fasten the sublink interface
board to the spacers.
4. Remove the nuts and their washers.
5. Disconnect the flat cable from the connector J10 on the main board.
6. Hold the sublink interface board from its sides, and carefully pull it
straight up. Once the board is free, turn the board over the rear panel,
and let it rest on the work table. Do not strain the wires connecting
the board to the BNC connectors.
Installing HCD-E1
1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Quick Start Guide
7. Set the JP12 jumper to UNBAL E1.
8. Set the JP16 and JP17 jumpers to UNBAL.
9. Connect the JP9 jumper.
10. Install the JP8 and JP10 jumpers.
11. Reinstall the sublink interface board by reversing the procedure by
which you removed it. Pay special attention to the following:
Mate correctly the flat cable connector with the corresponding
main board connector.
Make sure that the RJ-45 connector has been properly inserted
into its place in the rear panel, and none of the BNC connectors
wires have been damaged.
Make sure to place the original washers under each nut. Fasten
the nuts tightly.
Connecting the
Interfaces
Connecting the E1 Sublink
•
Connect the E1 sublink. For a balanced interface, use an RJ-45
connector and connect it to the HCD-E1 port marked SUB E1. For an
unbalanced interface, use two BNC connectors and connect them to
the HCD-E1 ports marked RX OUT and TX IN.
Connecting the Data Ports
•
Connect the DTEs to the HCD-E1 data channel ports. Use the adapter
cables supplied with the unit.
Connecting the Line
•
Connect the HDSL line to the HCD-E1 rear panel RJ-45 port designated
HDSL.
Connecting the Control Terminal
•
Connecting the
Power
If you are using a control terminal, connect a cable between the control
terminal and the port designated CONTROL DCE.
AC-Powered Unit
•
Use the 5 ft (1.5m) standard power cable provided with the unit. Make
sure the ON/OFF switch on the rear panel is set to OFF, then connect
the cable first to the HCD-E1 rear panel, then to the power source.
DC-Powered Unit
•
2
Installing HCD-E1
For the DC version of HCD-E1, refer to DC Power Supply Connection
Supplement.
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Quick Start Guide
2. Configuring HCD-E1
You can configure and operate HCD-E1 from either the front panel or a
supervisory terminal.
Note
Configuring
HCD-E1 from
Front Panel
Note
Some of the HCD-E1 configuration parameters depend on the type of remote
unit being used. Therefore, after the HDSL synchronization is reached, wait
for about 1 minute before you start configuring the modem. This allows the
proper recognition of the remote unit and ensures the correct HCD-E1
configuration.
To configure HCD-E1 from the front panel:
1.
Scroll to the SYSTEM PARAMETER in the top row of the front-panel
LCD and set the system parameters (available for the HCD-E1 unit
configured as central).
2.
Scroll to SL PARAMETERS in the top row of the front panel LCD and
configure the time slot allocation.
3.
Scroll to CHANNEL PRM in the top row of the front panel LCD and, for
each data channel, configure the data rate, and time slot allocation.
This command also allows you to set several other data transfer
parameters, depending on whether or not the channel has an Ethernet
interface.
4.
If your application explicitly requires the use of the unframed mode,
select it under SL PARAMETERS or CHANNEL PRM. Make sure to
assign all 32 times slots to the active port.
5.
Scroll to DNLOAD PRM in the top row of the front panel LCD and set
the parameters for inband transmission of management data.
The inband transfer of the management traffic is not available in the unframed
mode.
The remote unit automatically downloads the configuration of the central
unit, unless the CONFIG REMOTE parameter in the SYSTEM PARAMETER
screen of the central unit is set to NO.
Configuring
HCD-E1 from
Control Terminal
If you want to manage HCD-E1 from a remote supervisory terminal, you
must prepare the unit by setting its control port parameters from the front
panel:
1.
Scroll to SP PARAMETERS in the top row of the front panel LCD.
2.
Set the speed, data rate, parity, interface, and management mode
parameters for the control port.
To configure HCD-E1 from a control terminal:
1.
Configure the terminal as follows:
Select full-duplex mode.
Turn the terminal echo off.
Disable any type of flow control.
11/07/00 13:21
Configuring HCD-E1
3
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Quick Start Guide
2.
Connect the terminal to the CONTROL DCE port of HCD-E1.
3.
Press <Enter> three times.
4.
If the terminal displays the password prompt (PASSWORD>), enter the
password. The default password is HCD. If the node number of
HCD-E1 is a number other than zero, enter the node number along
with the password. Use the following syntax:
NODE<Space>’node number’<Space>’password’<Enter>
If there is no password prompt, just enter the node number, followed
by the desired command.
The prompt HCD> appears.
5.
Select the control terminal type by entering the DEF TERM command.
The default terminal type is VT-100. The other type options are VT-52,
TV-920, FREEDOM-100, and FREEDOM-220. Use the following syntax
to set the terminal type:
DEF TERM<Space>‘terminal type’<Enter>
Note
If you enter DEF TERM without the terminal type, HCD-E1 resets all the
control terminal codes to 0.
If your terminal requires control sequences different from those used by
the terminals listed above, type the command F and enter your terminal
control sequences. If the current control codes are not compatible with
your terminal and you cannot enter the desired codes, enter the INIT F
command to reset the codes to 0, then use the F command to modify
the control codes starting from the known field values.
6.
Set the following additional CONTROL DCE port parameters by
entering the DEF SP command: password protection, idle disconnect
time etc.
7.
Set the system parameters by entering the DEF SYS command.
8.
Set the sublink parameters by entering the DEF SL command.
9.
Configure the data channel parameters by entering the DEF CH X
command, where X is the channel number (1 or 2).
10. If you are using an SNMP management application:
Use the DEF AGENT command to configure the SNMP agent
parameters.
Use the DEF DL command to configure the in-band management
parameters.
11. If you are using the terminal to control a single HCD-E1 unit, do not
change the node number 0 assigned to the unit. For multidrop
operation, you can assign each HCD-E1 unit a node number between 1
and 255. Use the DEF NODE command to assign a node number.
4
Configuring HCD-E1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Quick Start Guide
12. You can assign each HCD-E1 unit a logical name of up to eight
characters. The logical name helps identify the source of alarm
messages that HCD-E1 sends to the supervision terminal. Use the DEF
NAME command to assign a logical name.
13. To reset HCD-E1, use the RESET command.
14. To reset a configuration of HCD-E1 to default values, use the INIT DB
command.
Note
Tips
11/07/00 13:21
•
The RESET and the INIT DB commands cause HCD-E1 to reinitialize,
disrupting traffic through HCD-E1 until it resumes normal operation.
•
Change of the framing mode causes double temporary synchronization
loss.
•
Use the HELP command to display the correct syntax of commands.
•
It is usually sufficient to configure the central unit only, in which case the
central unit’s configuration parameters are automatically downloaded to
the remote unit.
Configuring HCD-E1
5
Quick Start Guide
6
Configuring HCD-E1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
General ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Versions................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Applications.......................................................................................................................... 1-2
Features................................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Physical Description ....................................................................................................... 1-5
Front Panel ........................................................................................................................... 1-6
Rear Panel ............................................................................................................................ 1-6
1.3 Functional Description ................................................................................................... 1-6
Data Channel Characteristics................................................................................................. 1-6
E1 Link Interface Characteristics ............................................................................................ 1-7
HDSL Subsystem Characteristics ........................................................................................... 1-7
Management ........................................................................................................................ 1-8
System Timing .................................................................................................................... 1-13
Main Principles of Operation .............................................................................................. 1-17
1.4 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................... 1-25
HDSL Interface ................................................................................................................... 1-25
E1 Sublink Interface ............................................................................................................ 1-25
Data Channel Interface ....................................................................................................... 1-26
Statistics (Performance Monitoring)...................................................................................... 1-26
Front Panel Controls ........................................................................................................... 1-26
Indicators............................................................................................................................ 1-26
Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................... 1-27
Timing ................................................................................................................................ 1-27
Supervisory Port.................................................................................................................. 1-28
Alarm Relay ........................................................................................................................ 1-28
Physical .............................................................................................................................. 1-28
Power................................................................................................................................. 1-29
Environment ....................................................................................................................... 1-29
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
2.1 Site Requirements and Prerequisites .............................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Package Contents........................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Installation and Setup..................................................................................................... 2-2
Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches.............................................................................. 2-2
Connecting the Interfaces.................................................................................................... 2-10
Connecting the Power......................................................................................................... 2-12
CHAPTER 3 FRONT PANEL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
3.1 General.......................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Front Panel Controls, Connectors, and Indicators ........................................................... 3-1
3.3 Control of HCD-E1 Operation........................................................................................ 3-3
General ................................................................................................................................ 3-3
Organization of the LCD ....................................................................................................... 3-3
Information Displayed on the LCD ........................................................................................ 3-5
Using Front-Panel Push Buttons............................................................................................. 3-6
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
i
Table of Contents
3.4 Configuration Parameters ............................................................................................... 3-7
3.5 Operating Instructions.................................................................................................. 3-19
Turning HCD-E1 On ........................................................................................................... 3-19
Checking the Current Operating Configuration .................................................................... 3-20
Normal Indications ............................................................................................................. 3-21
Monitoring the HCD-E1 Performance.................................................................................. 3-22
Turning HCD-E1 Off........................................................................................................... 3-22
3.6 Local Configuration Setup Procedure ........................................................................... 3-22
General .............................................................................................................................. 3-22
Password Protection............................................................................................................ 3-23
General Configuration Procedure ........................................................................................ 3-23
Working with Time Slots ..................................................................................................... 3-25
CHAPTER 4 CONTROL FROM THE SUPERVISORY PORT
4.1 General.......................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Hardware Requirements ................................................................................................ 4-2
Terminal Characteristics ........................................................................................................ 4-2
Telnet (IP) Host Characteristics .............................................................................................. 4-2
Control Port Interface Characteristics..................................................................................... 4-2
Control Port Handshaking Protocol........................................................................................ 4-3
AUTOBAUD Function .......................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3 Starting a Supervision Terminal Management Session..................................................... 4-5
Control Terminal Configuration ............................................................................................. 4-5
Preliminary Settings for Initial Configuration Session .............................................................. 4-5
Initial Configuration .............................................................................................................. 4-6
Working with Time Slots ....................................................................................................... 4-6
4.4 HCD-E1 Control Language ............................................................................................. 4-7
General Guidelines and Principles......................................................................................... 4-7
Command Options ............................................................................................................... 4-9
Index of Commands.............................................................................................................. 4-9
4.5 HCD-E1 Command Set Description ............................................................................. 4-13
CLR ALM............................................................................................................................ 4-13
CLR ALM REM.................................................................................................................... 4-14
CLR ALM HRPT .................................................................................................................. 4-14
CLR LOOP ......................................................................................................................... 4-15
CLR TST ............................................................................................................................. 4-16
DATE.................................................................................................................................. 4-16
DEF AGENT........................................................................................................................ 4-17
DEF BERT ........................................................................................................................... 4-18
DEF CH .............................................................................................................................. 4-19
DEF DL .............................................................................................................................. 4-22
DEF NAME ......................................................................................................................... 4-23
DEF NODE......................................................................................................................... 4-23
DEF PB ............................................................................................................................... 4-24
DEF PWD........................................................................................................................... 4-24
DEF SL ............................................................................................................................... 4-25
DEF SP ............................................................................................................................... 4-26
DEF SYS.............................................................................................................................. 4-28
DEF TERM .......................................................................................................................... 4-28
DSP ALM............................................................................................................................ 4-29
DSP ALM HRPT.................................................................................................................. 4-30
ii
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Table of Contents
DSP ALM REM.................................................................................................................... 4-31
DSP BERT CH..................................................................................................................... 4-31
DSP HDR TST .................................................................................................................... 4-33
DSP HDSL PM.................................................................................................................... 4-34
DSP PB............................................................................................................................... 4-35
DSP R HDR TST ................................................................................................................. 4-36
DSP R HDSL PM ................................................................................................................ 4-36
DSP R SL PM ...................................................................................................................... 4-37
DSP REM AGENT ............................................................................................................... 4-38
DSP SL PM ......................................................................................................................... 4-39
DSP ST CH ......................................................................................................................... 4-40
DSP ST LINE....................................................................................................................... 4-42
DSP ST SL .......................................................................................................................... 4-43
DSP ST SYS......................................................................................................................... 4-44
DSP TS ............................................................................................................................... 4-46
EXIT.................................................................................................................................... 4-47
F......................................................................................................................................... 4-47
H or HELP .......................................................................................................................... 4-48
INIT DB.............................................................................................................................. 4-49
INIT F ................................................................................................................................. 4-50
LOOP................................................................................................................................. 4-50
RESET................................................................................................................................. 4-51
TIME .................................................................................................................................. 4-52
4.6 Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions ................................................................ 4-52
Starting a Session - Single HCD-E1 ...................................................................................... 4-52
Starting a Session - Multiple HCD-E1................................................................................... 4-53
Control Session ................................................................................................................... 4-54
Ending a Control Session ..................................................................................................... 4-55
CHAPTER 5 TROUBLESHOOTING AND DIAGNOSTICS
5.1 General.......................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Status Indications and Alarms ......................................................................................... 5-1
Front-Panel LEDs .................................................................................................................. 5-1
Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 5-1
H-RPT Alarms ....................................................................................................................... 5-2
Alarm Relay .......................................................................................................................... 5-2
Working with Alarm Buffer.................................................................................................. 5-12
5.3 Performance Diagnostics Data...................................................................................... 5-13
General .............................................................................................................................. 5-13
E1 Sublink Performance Monitoring .................................................................................... 5-13
Summary of E1 Performance Monitoring ............................................................................. 5-16
HDSL Performance Monitoring ........................................................................................... 5-17
Summary of HDSL Performance Monitoring........................................................................ 5-18
Displaying the Performance Data on the Front-Panel LCD ................................................... 5-19
Displaying the Performance Data on a Control Terminal...................................................... 5-20
5.4 Diagnostic Tests ........................................................................................................... 5-21
Diagnostic Loopbacks ......................................................................................................... 5-21
Operating Loopbacks from the Front Panel.......................................................................... 5-27
Operating BERT from the Front Panel.................................................................................. 5-29
Operating Loopbacks from a Control Terminal .................................................................... 5-31
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
iii
Table of Contents
5.5 Configuration Error Messages ....................................................................................... 5-31
5.6 Power-Up Self-Test ...................................................................................................... 5-34
5.7 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 5-34
APPENDIX A SNMP MANAGEMENT
APPENDIX B CONNECTOR WIRING
APPENDIX C IR-ETH INTERFACE MODULE
APPENDIX D IR-ETH/Q INTERFACE MODULE
APPENDIX E IR-IP INTERFACE MODULE
iv
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Table of Contents
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Typical HCD-E1 Application ........................................................................................ 1-2
Figure 1-2 HCD-E1 3D View ........................................................................................................ 1-6
Figure 1-3 Basic Management Topology Using Network Management Station ............................ 1-10
Figure 1-4 Extended Management Topology Using Network Management Station...................... 1-11
Figure 1-5 Flow of Timing Signals through HCD-E1 System in the External Timing Mode............ 1-13
Figure 1-6 Flow of Timing Signals through HCD-E1 System in the Internal Timing Mode ............ 1-14
Figure 1-7 Data Channel Timing, Flow of Timing Signals in a Typical Application ....................... 1-15
Figure 1-8 Sublink Timing, Flow of Timing Signals in a Typical Application ................................. 1-17
Figure 1-9 E1 (CEPT) Frame Format ............................................................................................ 1-18
Figure 1-10 2B1Q Encoding Rule ............................................................................................... 1-21
Figure 1-11 Mapping of Core Frame into HDSL Frames.............................................................. 1-23
Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
HCD-E1 - Identification of Boards, Jumpers and Switches............................................ 2-3
Identification of Cover Screws...................................................................................... 2-5
Removal of Sublink Interface Board ............................................................................. 2-7
E1 Sublink Interface Board, Internal Settings ................................................................ 2-8
HCD-E1 Rear Panel (AC Powered Unit) ..................................................................... 2-10
Figure 3-1 HCD-E1 Front Panel .................................................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3-2 HCD-E1 LCD Basic Menu Structure............................................................................. 3-4
Figure 5-1 LP LINE Loopback ..................................................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-2 H-RPT Local Loopback ............................................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-3 LP L SL Loopback ...................................................................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-4 LP R SL Loopback ...................................................................................................... 5-23
Figure 5-5 LOOP R R SL Loopback............................................................................................. 5-24
Figure 5-6 LP L CH 1 Loopback.................................................................................................. 5-25
Figure 5-7 LP R CH 1 Loopback ................................................................................................. 5-25
Figure 5-8 LP R R CH 1 Loopback .............................................................................................. 5-26
Figure 5-9 LP INBAND CH 1 Loopback...................................................................................... 5-26
Figure 5-10 LP R R CH 1 Loopback + LP BERT CH 1................................................................. 5-27
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
v
Table of Contents
List of Tables
Table 1-1 Automatically-Selected FIFO Size Values .................................................................... 1-16
Table 2-1 HCD-E1 Interface Adapter Cables............................................................................... 2-11
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 3-4
Table 3-5
Table 3-6
Table 3-7
Table 3-8
HCD-E1 Controls, Connectors and Indicators ............................................................... 3-2
System Parameters........................................................................................................ 3-8
Sublink Configuration Parameters ............................................................................... 3-10
Control Port Parameters.............................................................................................. 3-12
Channel Parameters.................................................................................................... 3-14
BERT Parameters ........................................................................................................ 3-17
Download Parameters ................................................................................................ 3-18
Priority Bumping Configuration Parameters................................................................. 3-18
Table 4-1 HCD-E1 Command Set Index ....................................................................................... 4-9
Table 4-2 HCD-E1 Default Configuration ................................................................................... 4-49
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Table 5-5
Table 5-6
vi
HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages .................................................................................... 5-3
H-RPT Alarm Buffer Messages..................................................................................... 5-10
Summary of E1 Performance Monitoring..................................................................... 5-16
Summary of HDSL Performance Monitoring from the Front Panel............................... 5-18
Configuration Error Messages ...................................................................................... 5-31
Troubleshooting Chart ................................................................................................ 5-34
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 Overview
General
HCD-E1 is a standalone HDSL NTU (Network Terminal Unit) / LTU (Line
Terminal Unit) that provides the user with one E1 sublink drop & insert
port and two n × 64 kbps or n × 56 kbps data channels. Fractional E1 from
the E1 sublink, as well as data from the n × 64 kbps / n × 56 kbps channels
are multiplexed over E1 frames and transferred by the HDSL modem to the
remote location. For direct connection to DACS, RAD’s HCD-E1 unit can
be used in the central office, eliminating the need to convert back to
n × 64 kbps.
HCD-E1 supports the transmission of two synchronous data channels and
one E1 sublink, over the HDSL link. The sublink enables the connection of
fractional E1 equipment (digital PBXs), thus enabling HCD-E1 to serve as an
integrating multiplexer for E1 and fractional E1 services.
The mapping of the user’s data to the main link time slots is user-selectable.
For the synchronous data ports and E1 sublink, three mapping methods are
available: bundling into consecutive or alternate time slots, or placing in
individually selected time slots. A sublink time slot is always routed to the
main link time slot with the same number.
In addition, HCD-E1 can also be operated in an unframed mode: in this
mode HCD-E1 accepts a 2048 kbps data stream through the E1 sublink or
data channel and converts it to an unframed G.703 signal for transport over
the HDSL link. Thus, HCD-E1 can also serve as an interface converter and
high-speed, short-distance modem.
HCD-E1 can work with an HDSL repeater (H-RPT) on the main link.
HCD-E1 can check the H-RPT alarm messages and connect/disconnect the
local loopback on H-RPT (LOOP L HRPT).
Versions
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 can be ordered in several versions, which differ in the number
and type of user ports:
•
One or two synchronous data channels. The data channels can be
ordered with RS-530, V.35, V.36/RS-449, or X.21 interfaces.
•
One synchronous data channel (with RS-530, V.35, V.36/RS-449, or X.21
interface) and one Ethernet interface module (IR-ETH, IR-ETH/Q, or
IR-IP).
Overview
1-1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
When you order a unit with a V.35, V.36/RS-449, or X.21 interface, you
receive a unit with the RS-530 interface provided with a corresponding
adapter cable.
HCD-E1 is available in the AC and DC versions.
The AC version is powered by 100 to 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz. As an option,
HCD-E1 can also be ordered with a -48 VDC power supply.
Note
Applications
In this manual, the generic term HCD-E1 is used when the information is
applicable to all HCD-E1 versions. Information applicable to a specific version
is explicitly identified.
Figure 1-1 shows a typical application for HCD-E1. In this application,
HCD-E1 is used to connect the synchronous data channels over an HDSL
line, while the sublink is used to connect to a digital PABX trunk.
USER'S
DTE
USER'S
DTE
DATA CHANNELS
DATA CHANNELS
HCD-E1
(nx56 kbps or nx64 kbps)
HCD-E1
(nx56 kbps or nx64 kbps)
HDSL LINES
USER'S
DTE
E1 SUB LINK
USER'S
DTE
E1 SUB LINK
PABX
PABX
PABX
Figure 1-1 Typical HCD-E1 Application
Features
Statistics Collection
HCD-E1 offers extensive performance statistics collection capabilities:
•
E1 performance statistics. When operating with the CRC-4 option
enabled, HCD-E1 stores E1 line statistics in compliance with the
requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.706. The user can display the statistics
collected for the line connected to the E1 sublink of the local unit, as well
as for the link connected to the E1 sublink of the remote unit.
•
HDSL performance statistics. HCD-E1 stores performance statistics for
each of the two HDSL lines in compliance with the requirements of
ITU-T Rec. G.826.
Test and Diagnostics Capabilities
HCD-E1 has comprehensive diagnostics capabilities, which include the
following loopbacks:
1-2
Overview
•
Local loopbacks on the data channel and E1 sublink of the local HCD-E1
•
Local loopback on the HDSL lines
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
•
Remote loopbacks on the data channel and E1 sublink of the local
HCD-E1
•
Remote loopbacks on the data channel and E1 sublink of the remote
unit.
•
Inband-activated remote loopback on the data channel of remote
HCD-E1
•
H-RPT local loop (towards the HCD-E1 configured as central) when
working with the HDSL repeater.
In order to enable testing of marginal links, HCD-E1 also offers Bit Error Rate
(BER) testing on the synchronous data channels, using locally generated,
pseudo-random sequence. To provide compatibility with other BER testing
equipment, the user can select the pseudo-random pattern that best
matches his need.
Maintenance is further enhanced by advanced power-up self-test
capabilities, and by an automatically performed cyclic self-test that provides
circuit-level diagnostics data. The user can also read the diagnostic data of
the remote unit through the HDSL link.
HCD-E1 can identify the type of the unit at the remote end of the HDSL
link and provides the user with a possibility to read the diagnostic data of
the remote unit through the HDSL link.
LEDs and Alarms
HCD-E1 responds to any alarm detected during its operation by an alarm
message and stores it in a buffer that can hold up to 100 messages. A front
panel LED indicator lights when the alarm buffer contains alarm messages. The
local operator can then review the contents of the alarm buffer on the front
panel display, or from an ASCII terminal connected to the supervisory port.
HCD-E1 can provide an alarm indication by means of an alarm relay (dry
contacts), which enables remote signaling of alarm conditions when HCD-E1
is located far from the personnel in charge for its proper operation.
In addition to the alarm buffer, front-panel LED indicators display in real
time the status of the E1 sublink and the HDSL lines, and alert when test
loops are present in the system. The status of the LAN in the case of the
Ethernet version is indicated by the Ethernet module LEDs located on the
HCD-E1 rear panel.
Time Slot Handling
When operating in any of the framed modes, HCD-E1 allows the user to
configure the routing of the individual time slots for each of the data
channels, and for the sublink. The routing can be modified during system
operation, without disrupting the service to users of time slots that are not
rerouted. HCD-E1 automatically connects the time slots in both the receive
and transmit directions.
01/01/01 08:07
Overview
1-3
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
To expedite the routing, HCD-E1 supports two “bundle” routing modes,
called “sequential bundle” and “alternate bundle” modes. In the sequential
mode, one “bundle” (group of consecutive time slots, identified by the
number of the starting time slot and the total number of time slots) can be
routed to the corresponding main link time slots, where they are inserted in
the main link frame sequentially, in consecutive time slots (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, etc).
In the alternate mode, the time slots are inserted in the following way: 1, 3,
5, 7, etc.
For data channels and the sublink, the user can either individually select the
main link time slots in which the user's data is to be inserted, or can use one
of the “bundle” routing modes. Time slots assigned to data channels are
always defined as data time slots. A sublink time slot is always routed to the
main link time slot with the same number.
Priority Bumping
HCD-E1 will continue working (at a half of its baud rate) even if one of its
HDSL lines is down. The priority bumping feature allows the user to select
the timeslot priority (high or low) in this case. The time slots which have
been assigned high priority will continue being sent on the remaining HDSL
line.
Unframed Mode
HCD-E1 can also be operated in an unframed mode: in this mode HCD-E1
accepts a 2048 kbps data stream through the E1 sublink or data channel and
converts it to an unframed G.703 signal for transport over the HDSL link.
Thus, HCD-E1 can also serve as an interface converter and high-speed,
short-distance modem.
When the unframed mode is selected in the E1 sublink, HCD-E1
transparently transfers the data stream received from the E1 port to the main
link. The E1 sublink or data channel must be configured for operation in
unframed mode at a data rate of 2048 kHz, and the other data ports must
be disconnected from the main link.
1.2 Physical Description
HCD-E1 is a compact unit, intended for installation on desktops or shelves.
The unit height is 1U (1.75").
An optional rack-mount adapter kit enables the installation of one or two
HCD-E1 units in a 19" rack.
Figure 1-2 shows the 3D view of HCD-E1.
1-4
Physical Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Figure 1-2 HCD-E1 3D View
Front Panel
The front panel provides control over the unit operation. The LEDs provide
real-time indications related to the operation and status of the unit.
The LCD together with three push-button switches are used to display
status (alarm) messages, diagnostics and performance monitoring data, test
status and configuration parameters of HCD-E1. You can also use the LCD
and push buttons to configure the unit. For details, see Chapter 3,
Operation and Chapter 5, Troubleshooting and Diagnostics.
Rear Panel
The rear panel of the unit allows access to interface and power
connections. For details, see Chapter 2, Installation. For versions with the
Ethernet data channel, the rear panel contains Ethernet module LEDs
providing real-time indications related to the operation and status of the
LAN.
1.3 Functional Description
Data Channel
Characteristics
HCD-E1 data ports support user-selectable transmission rates. The supported
data rates are integer multiples of 56 kbps or 64 kbps (n × 56 kbps or
n × 64 kbps, where n is in the range of 1 to 32, corresponding to rates in the
range of 56 kbps to 1792 kbps, or 64 kbps to 2048 kbps respectively).
HCD-E1 supports the following types of data port interfaces: RS-530, V.35,
X.21, V.36/R-449/422 and IR-ETH (10BaseT or 10Base2), IR-ETH/Q
(10BaseT) or IR-IP (10BaseT).
HCD-E1 has two data ports, each terminated in a 25-pin D-type female
connector. The units with an Ethernet interface arrive with the Ethernet
interface module built in the upper port.
When using the RS-530 interface, equipment with RS-530 interface can be
directly connected to the data channel connector using standard cables.
Equipment with V.36/RS-422/RS-449, X.21 and V.35 interfaces can be
connected by means of adapter cables, supplied with the unit.
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-5
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Each HCD-E1 data port supports the following control lines:
E1 Link Interface
Characteristics
•
RTS - input from the locally connected data equipment
•
CTS - the user can permanently set the CTS line in the active state, or
can make the CTS line follow the RTS line.
•
DSR - the DSR line is always active when the HCD-E1 is powered,
except when a remote main link test loopback is activated.
•
DCD - the DCD line is active when the HCD-E1 main link interface is
synchronized.
The HCD-E1 sublink (E1) interface meets the requirements of ITU G.703,
G.704, G.706, and G.732. HCD-E1 supports framed and unframed E1 data
streams. For framed data streams, HCD-E1 also supports the CRC-4 option
specified in ITU G.704. CRC-4 use is user-selectable.
The E1 port has two line interfaces: a 120-Ω balanced line interface
terminated in an RJ-45 eight-pin female connector, and a 75-Ω unbalanced
interface terminated in two BNC female coaxial connectors. Line coding is
HDB3. The nominal balanced interface transmit level is ±3V, and the
unbalanced interface transmit level is ±2.37V. The maximum allowed line
attenuation is up to 10 dB.
To increase the E1 sublink range, it can be ordered with an integral LTU. In
this case, the maximum line attenuation is 36 dB, enabling range of up to
2 km, using typical cables.
Jitter performance complies with the requirements of ITU G.823.
HDSL Subsystem
Characteristics
The HCD-E1 HDSL subsystem uses dual duplex transmission over two
2-wire lines. The line code on the HDSL lines is 2B1Q at a rate of
584 kbaud (equivalent to a data transfer rate of 1168 kbps).
Using advanced equalization, adaptive filtering, and echo cancellation
techniques, HCD-E1 compensates for line impairments, bridged taps, and
mixed cables commonly encountered in the local distribution network.
Moreover, due to its high immunity to background noise, HCD-E1 enables
the transmission of multiple HDSL signals in the same physical cable without
requiring pair selection.
HCD-E1 can operate on unloaded AWG-22, AWG-24, and AWG-26
twisted-wire pairs, and other similar pairs. Up to two bridged taps, having a
length of up to 500m, are tolerated. HCD-E1 achieves typical ranges of
4.8 km (3.0 miles) on AWG-24 (0.5 mm) pairs, and up to 3.8 km (2.4 miles)
on AWG-26 (0.4 mm) pairs. When working with the HDSL repeater
(H-RPT), typical ranges are up to 9.2 km (5.7 miles) from central to remote
unit on AWG-24 (0.5 mm) pairs, and up to 7.2 km (4.5 miles) from central
to remote unit on AWG-26 (0.4 mm) pairs. The HDSL line interfaces are
terminated in an RJ-45 eight-pin female connector.
1-6
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
The transmission of data on each twisted-wire pair (HDSL line) is full duplex,
and except for the distribution of payload data bits between the two lines,
each HDSL line operates independently.
HCD-E1 provides an embedded operations channel (eoc) within the HDSL
data streams, which enables end-to-end system management and
supervision.
The HDSL subsystem operates in a master-slave mode.
The master unit, called line termination unit (LTU), determines the
distribution of payload data between the HDSL lines, controls the system
start-up procedure, provides the timing reference for HDSL line
transmission, and manages the communication on the eoc channel.
The slave unit, located at the remote end of the link, is called network
termination unit (NTU).
HCD-E1 supports both the central (LTU) and the remote (NTU) operating
modes; the actual operating mode (LTU or NTU) is user-selectable.
Note
Management
If you have a phantom-fed H-RPT on the HDSL link, your HCD-E1 must be
used as NTU only.
Local Control
HCD-E1 is designed for unattended operation. HCD-E1 configuration, that
is, the complete collection of its operating parameters, is determined by a
database stored in non-volatile memory. The database parameters and the
operation of HCD-E1 can be controlled by means of a simple menu,
operated by push buttons located on the front panel. During setup, the
LCD display guides the operator in the execution of the desired operations.
The display provides information concerning the current system
configuration and operating mode, and the available values of each
programmable parameter. In case of operator errors, HCD-E1 displays the
configuration error number, which helps the operator take the correct
action.
Remote Management
In addition to front panel control, HCD-E1 supports management from a
remote location. The remote management capabilities can be used to
configure the HCD-E1 parameters and display status (alarm) messages,
diagnostics information, performance monitoring data, and the test status.
These functions are performed through a serial RS-232 port that enables
serial communication with a supervision terminal.
Using the supervision terminal functions, the user can also enable remote
management using IP communications, i.e., Telnet and SNMP. The IP
communication uses the Serial Link Internet Protocol (SLIP).
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-7
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
The remote management capabilities available through the serial RS-232
port are as follows:
•
Management by means of a Supervision Terminal
•
Management by means of Telnet
•
SNMP Management.
If you have an H-RPT on your link, you can use either SP or Telnet
management to display the status messages of H-RPT and, if your
application allows this, connect/disconnect the H-RPT loop (from the unit
configured as central). For the description of the H-RPT loop and how to
operate it, refer to Section 5.4, Diagnostic Tests in Chapter 5.
Management by means of a Supervision Terminal. Any “dumb” ASCII
terminal connected to the CONTROL DCE port of HCD-E1 (or a PC running
a terminal emulation program), controlled by the program stored in HCDE1, can be used as a supervision terminal.
The supervision terminal can communicate with HCD-E1 using either
point-to-point or polled (multidrop) communication. For polling purposes,
each HCD-E1 can be assigned an eight-bit address, for a maximum of
255 nodes (the zero address is reserved).
As an option, you can connect a dial-up modem to the control port, to
provide call-in capabilities.
In addition to the remote management functions listed above, the
supervision terminal is also used for the preliminary configuration of
HCD-E1, to enable the use of IP communication for Telnet and SNMP
management.
Management by means of Telnet. HCD-E1 also supports the Telnet
protocol, which enables remote management using the same command line
interface available with a supervision terminal. Telnet uses TCP/IP
communication through the RS-232 port of HCD-E1.
SNMP Management. The SNMP management capability enables fully
graphical, user-friendly management using the RADview network
management stations offered by RAD, as well as management by other
SNMP-based management systems.
Inband and Out-of-Band Management
HCD-E1 includes a proprietary IP router for in-band management traffic.
This function enables HCD-E1 to transfer in-band IP and SNMP
management messages generated by or addressed to other HCD-E1 units,
and also transfer in-band management traffic addressed to other RAD
equipment that operates over E1 links, such as MEGAPLEX-2100,
DXC-30/DXC-10A/DXC-8R, etc.
1-8
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
A basic management topology, which is suitable for both SNMP and Telnet
management, is shown in Figure 1-3. In this example, a network
management station is attached to an Ethernet LAN. A remote access LAN
extender, MBE/RAS/A, is located near the managed equipment (such as
HCD-E1, MEGAPLEX-2100(*), etc.), and its serial ports are connected via
cables to the CONTROL connectors of the equipment.
LAN
To CONTROL
Connection of
Managed
Equipment
....
Network
Management
Station
Serial Ports
MBE/RAS/A
Figure 1-3 Basic Management Topology Using Network Management Station
HCD-E1 also includes an SNMP agent that enables SNMP management of
the HCD-E1, using the UDP-over-IP protocol. The SNMP agent can
communicate out-of-band and/or in-band, where each communication
mode can be separately enabled:
Out-of-band communication is performed via the serial ports of HCD-E1,
using the Serial Link Internet Protocol (SLIP). When using out-of-band
communication, it is necessary to disable the Autobaud function, and select
a specific data rate for the port data rate (9600 bps is recommended).
In-band communication is performed over HDSL lines (i.e., over the main
link), and when applicable, over the sublink as well. This communication
mode uses a proprietary protocol. The user can configure the system to
transfer the in-band management traffic either by means of the E1 time slot
0 (sublink), or in a dedicated user-selected time slot (main link or sublink).
Using in-band management, a user of an SNMP management station
connected to one HCD-E1 can also control the HCD-E1 unit located to the
remote end of the main link, or the sublink.
The in-band management data rate depends on the selected routing
method:
•
When using the TS 0 of the sublink, the data rate is 4 kbps.
•
When using a dedicated main link slot, the data rate is 64 kbps.
•
When using a dedicated sublink slot, the data rate is 8 kbps.
The HCD-E1 SNMP agent must be enabled by the user, so that it will accept
the management messages transmitted by the network management station.
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-9
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Each SNMP agent recognizes the messages addressed to its own IP address.
In addition, the SNMP agent includes a proprietary built-in IP router, which
is able to route management messages in accordance with the network
topology determined by the routing algorithm, without requiring the user to
provide a priori topology information on the network. The user can read the
information collected by the IP router on the additional remote SNMP
agents which are served by the router.
The proprietary IP router operates only on the in-band traffic.
The advanced capabilities of the HCD-E1 SNMP agents allow easy
integration of the HCD-E1 in wide-area managed communication systems.
Its capabilities support any practical communication network topology, as
illustrated in the example shown in Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-4 Extended Management Topology Using Network Management Station
The network shown in Figure 1-4 can be managed by a single network
management station, because of the flexible routing capabilities of the
SNMP agent can carry the management traffic over many different paths.
1-10
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
For example, the following paths can be made available for the management
traffic, when the management station is attached to HCD-E1:
•
The network is connected to the network management station using a
single serial communication link, attached to the CONTROL DCE port of
HCD-E1 (system 1).
•
In-band communication through the HCD-E1 No. 1 main and sub links is
used to manage the remote units connected to the remote ends of the
corresponding links:
− HCD-E1 No. 2 is managed via the main link of HCD-E1 No. 1.
− The sublink of HCD-E1 No. 1 is connected via the E1 transmission plant
to a remote communication node, which is used to perform rerouting.
The rerouting is based on a digital cross-connect system and E1/T1
converter, DXC-30, also offered by RAD. The DXC-30 can be
configured to support the RAD proprietary in-band management
protocol using time slot 0.
− The DXC-30 transfers the management traffic to several of its ports.
These ports are connected to other systems, e.g., HCD-E1 No. 3,
MEGAPLEX-2100(*) No. 4, etc. Each remote system can relay the
management traffic to other equipment.
Thus an entire wide-area network can be managed by means of a network
management station connected to any HCD-E1 unit (or to any of the other
RAD equipment which supports SNMP management).
Control of Remote Unit from Central Unit
As described above, the operation of the HCD-E1 system is basically
asymmetrical, i.e., the HDSL subsystem inherently operates in a
central (master)/remote (slave) mode. HCD-E1 takes advantage of this
characteristic to expedite the configuration, management and supervision
tasks related to the remote unit.
All the parameters that determine the end-to-end system performance can
be configured on the central unit only. They are automatically transferred
(downloaded) from HCD-E1 configured as central to the unit configured as
remote, using the eoc channel. The user of the local unit configured as
central can also initiate tests on the unit configured as remote.
Using the remote management, the user of the local unit can read and clear
through the eoc channel the alarm messages and performance parameters of
the unit at the remote site.
Thus, HCD-E1 configured as central unit serves as a full-function proxy agent
for the remote unit with respect to all the management methods (LCD,
supervision terminal, Telnet, and SNMP). When using in-band management,
each unit is managed separately and operates as an agent in its own right.
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-11
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
System Timing
HCD-E1 offers selectable timing options, which enable the distribution of
timing over the HDSL system, from the central office to the remote end. The
use of stuffing on the HDSL subsystem ensures that the E1 signal and the
data rate provided to the customer equipment by the remote unit are
locked to the timing of the E1 signal and data rate received by the central
unit.
HCD-E1 Configured as Central Unit (LTU)
The HCD-E1 unit configured as LTU has two timing modes: external timing
and internal timing.
With external timing, the HCD-E1 system timing is locked to the clock
signals recovered from the incoming clock or to external clock signals
(derived from one of the synchronous data channels or from the E1 sublink).
Figure 1-5 shows the flow of timing signals through the HCD-E1 system in
the external timing mode.
CENTRAL HCD-E1
HDSL LINE
INTERFACE
HDSL LINE A
INTERFACE
LOOPBACK
TIMING
TIMING
SOURCE
NETWORK
SIDE
REMOTE HCD-E1
HDSL
LINE A
HDSL
LINE B
E1
INTERFACE
OR
DATA
EQUIPMENT
DATA
CHANNEL 1
INTERFACE
DATA
EQUIPMENT
DATA
CHANNEL 2
INTERFACE
HDSL LINE B
INTERFACE
E1
INTERFACE
CUSTOMER
SIDE (DTE)
DATA
CHANNEL 1
INTERFACE
DATA
EQUIPMENT
DATA
CHANNEL 2
INTERFACE
DATA
EQUIPMENT
HDSL LINE B
INTERFACE
OR
Figure 1-5 Flow of Timing Signals through HCD-E1 System in the External Timing Mode
With internal timing, the HCD-E1 system timing is determined by the clock
signal generated by an internal crystal oscillator. Figure 1-6 shows the flow of
timing signals through the HCD-E1 system in the internal timing mode.
1-12
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
REMOTE HCD-E1
HDSL
LINE A
INTERNAL
TIMING
HDSL LINE
INTERFACE
HDSL LINE A
INTERFACE
LOOPBACK
TIMING
LOOPBACK
TIMING
NETWORK
SIDE
E1
INTERFACE
DATA
EQUIPMENT
DATA
CHANNEL 1
INTERFACE
DATA
EQUIPMENT
DATA
CHANNEL 2
INTERFACE
HDSL
LINE B
HDSL LINE B
INTERFACE
E1
INTERFACE
CUSTOMER
SIDE (DTE)
DATA
CHANNEL 1
INTERFACE
DATA
EQUIPMENT
DATA
CHANNEL 2
INTERFACE
DATA
EQUIPMENT
HDSL LINE B
INTERFACE
CENTRAL HCD-E1
Figure 1-6 Flow of Timing Signals through HCD-E1 System in the Internal Timing Mode
HCD-E1 Configured as Remote Unit (NTU)
The HCD-E1 unit configured as NTU always locks its internal system timing
to the incoming HDSL signals, that is, to the timing of the unit configured as
central. The timing is derived from the clock signal recovered from line A; if
line A fails, HCD-E1 automatically switches to the clock signal recovered
from line B.
Data Channel Timing
The HCD-E1 data ports have three timing modes: DCE, DTE1 and DTE2.
•
In the DCE timing mode, the HCD-E1 data channel provides transmit
and receive clocks for the equipment connected to the data port.
•
In the DTE1 timing mode, the HCD-E1 data channel sends the receive
data accompanied by the receive clock, derived from the main system
clock, to the data equipment connected to the data port, and accepts
data according to the data equipment transmit clock.
•
In the DTE2 timing mode, the HCD-E1 data channel transmits and
receives data according to the clock signals provided by the equipment
connected to the data port. When using this clocking mode, the main
link timing must be locked to the clock signal supplied by the data port
interface. The DTE2 mode is not available on channels with X.21
interface.
Figure 1-7 shows a typical application which uses one of the data channels,
operating in the DTE2 timing mode, as the timing reference source, and
illustrates the flow of timing signals within the system.
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-13
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Figure 1-7 Data Channel Timing, Flow of Timing Signals in a Typical Application
In the application shown in Figure 1-7, the data equipment located on the
customer’s premises uses the HCD-E1 link to connect to a data network.
Since data networks include accurate timing sources and do not accept data
whose timing deviates significantly from the network timing, it is necessary
to ensure that the equipment located on the customer's premises uses the
data network timing.
For this purpose, the HCD-E1 unit connected to the data network uses
channel 2 as its timing source, and therefore its main link timing is locked to
the data network timing.
The HCD-E1 unit located on the customer’s premises uses main link timing.
As a result, its system timing is also locked to the data network timing, and
the network timing is transferred to the data equipment located on the
customer's premises.
Note that the other data channel of the two HCD-E1 units must use DCE
timing (or DTE1 timing, provided the data equipment operates with
loopback timing). This enables locking the timing of the other equipment to
the accurate timing source serving the data network.
Manual Selection of Data Channel FIFO size (DTE2 Mode)
To optimize jitter performance, the FIFO size of the data channels operating
in the DTE2 mode can be selected manually (±16 bits, ±30 bits, ±52 bits, or
±72 bits). The manually-selected value cannot be less than the
automatically-selected value. Table 1-1 lists these values for different data
channel rates.
1-14
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Table 1-1 Automatically-Selected FIFO Size Values
Data Channel Rate
FIFO Size
64 kbps
±16 bits
128 and 192 kbps
±30 bits
256 to 448 kbps
±52 bits
512 to 1536 kbps
±72 bits
1600 to 1792 kbps
±52 bits
1856 and 1920 kbps
±30 bits
1984 and 2048 kbps
±16 bits
Sublink Timing Application
Figure 1-8 shows a typical application which uses the sublink as the timing
reference source, and illustrates the flow of timing signals within the system.
In the application shown in Figure 1-8, a PABX is connected by a HDSL link
to a digital exchange, and must therefore use the exchange timing. For this
purpose, the HCD-E1 unit connected to the exchange uses the clock signal
recovered from the sublink as the system timing reference, and HCD-E1
located on the customer’s premises uses main link timing (LBT).
Therefore, the system timing of HCD-E1 located on the customer's premises
is locked to the digital exchange timing. The exchange timing is thus
transferred to the PABX located on the customer's premises.
Note that the data channels of the two HCD-E1 units must use DCE timing
(or DTE1 timing, provided the data equipment operates with loopback
timing). This enables locking the timing of all the other equipment
connected to the HCD-E1 units to the accurate timing source serving the
digital exchange.
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Figure 1-8 Sublink Timing, Flow of Timing Signals in a Typical Application
Main Principles of This section describes the E1 and the HDSL environments, to provide the
background information required for the understanding of the configuration
Operation
parameters of the HCD-E1 system.
The E1 (CEPT) Environment
The E1 line interfaces of the HCD-E1 comply with the applicable
requirements of ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, and G.823.
E1 Signal Structure
The E1 line operates at a nominal rate of 2.048 Mbps, using a line signal
encoded according to the High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3) code. The data
transferred over the E1 line is organized in frames. Each E1 frame includes
256 bits. The E1 frame format is shown in Figure 1-9.
1-16
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Time Slot 0
Time Slot 16
a. Even Frames (0,2,4-14)
8 Bits/
Time Slot 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
a. Frame 0
0 0 0 0 X Y X X
FAS
MAS
b. ODD Frames (1,3,5-15)
I 1 A N N N N N
32 Time Slots/Frame
16 Frames/Multiframe
TS
0
TS
1
FR
0
Time Slots 1-15, 17-31
TS
2
TS
3
FR
1
TS
4
Channel Data
b. Frames 1-15
A B C D A B C D
TS
5
FR
2
TS
6
TS
7
TS
8
FR
3
FR
4
TS
9
TS
10
TS
11
FR
5
TS
12
FR
6
TS
13
TS
14
TS
15
FR
7
TS
16
TS
17
FR
8
TS
18
FR
9
TS
19
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TS
20
TS
21
FR
10
TS
22
TS TS
23 24
FR
11
FR
12
TS
25
TS
26
TS
27
FR
13
TS
28
FR
14
TS
29
TS
30
TS
31
FR
15
Notes
I
N
A
FAS
International Bit
National Bit
Alarm Indication Signal (Loss of Frame Alignment - Red Alarm)
Frame Alignment Signal, Occupies alternate
(but not necessarily even) frames
ABCD
X
Y
MAS
ABCD Signaling Bits
Extra Bit
Loss of Multiframe Alignment
Multiframe Alignment Signal
Figure 1-9 E1 (CEPT) Frame Format
The 256 bits consist of 32 time slots of eight bits each, that carry the data
payload. The frame repetition rate is 8,000 per second, and therefore the
data rate supported by each time slot is 64 kbps. The number of time slots
available for user data is maximum 31, because time slot 0 is always used for
frame synchronization.
Time Slot 0
Time slot 0 is used for two main purposes:
•
Delineation of frame boundaries. For this purpose, in every second frame
time slot 0 carries a fixed pattern, called Frame Alignment Signal (FAS).
Frames carrying the FAS are defined as even frames, as they are assigned
number 0, 2, 4, etc. when larger structures (multiframes) are used.
The receiving equipment searches for this fixed pattern in the data stream
using a special algorithm, a process called frame synchronization. Once this
process is successfully completed, the equipment can identify each bit in the
received frames.
•
Transmission of housekeeping information. In every frame without FAS
(odd frames), time slot 0 carries housekeeping information. This
information includes:
− Bit 1 - this bit is called the international (I) bit. Its main use is for error
detection using the optional CRC-4 function.
− Bit 2 - this bit is always set to 1, a fact used by the frame alignment
algorithm.
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-17
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
− Bit 3 - this bit is used as a Remote Alarm Indication (RAI), to notify the
equipment at the other end that the local equipment lost frame
alignment, or does not receive an input signal.
− The other bits, identified as Sa4 through Sa8, are designated national
bits, and are actually available to the users, provided agreement is
reached as to their use. RAD equipment with SNMP agents can use
the Sa4 bit for in-band management traffic. The total data rate of the
in-band management traffic when using the Sa4 bit, is 4 kbps.
Multiframes
To increase the information carrying capacity without wasting bandwidth,
the frames are organized in larger patterns, called multiframes. Two types of
multiframes are generally used:
•
G732N, which consists of 2 frames (one odd frame and one even frame).
The G732N multiframe is generally used when time slot 16 is available to
the user. In this mode, the maximum number of time slots available for
payload is 31 (maximum payload data rate of 1984 Kbps). For systems
which use the Common-Channel Signaling (CCS) method, the CCS
information is often transmitted in time slot 16.
•
G732S, which consists of 16 frames. The G732S multiframe is generally
used when time slot 16 serves for the transmission of end-to-end
signaling using Channel-Associated Signaling (CAS). CAS is typically used
on links that transfer voice channels. In this mode, the maximum number
of time slots available for payload is 30 (maximum data rate of
1920 kbps).
E1 Line Statistics Using CRC-4 Error Detection
HCD-E1 supports the CRC-4 function in accordance with ITU G.704, which
allows the evaluation of the quality of transmission over E1 links.
When the CRC-4 option is enabled, frames are arbitrarily grouped in groups
of 16 (these groups are called CRC-4 multiframes, and do not bear any
relationship to the 16-frame multiframe structures used with the G732S
super-frame explained above). A CRC-4 multiframe always starts with a
frame that carries the frame alignment signal. The CRC-4 multiframe
structure is identified by a six-bit CRC-4 multiframe alignment signal,
which is multiplexed into bit 1 of time slot 0 of each odd-numbered (1, 3, 5,
etc.) frame of the multiframe (up to frame 11 of the CRC-4 multiframe).
Each CRC-4 multiframe is divided into two submultiframes of 8 frames
(2048 bits) each. The detection of errors is achieved by calculating a four-bit
checksum on each 2048-bit block (submultiframe). The four checksum bits
calculated on a given submultiframe are multiplexed, bit by bit, in bit 1 of
time slot 0 of each even-numbered frame of the next submultiframe.
1-18
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
At the receiving end, the checksum is calculated again on each
submultiframe and then compared against the original checksum (sent by
the transmitting end in the next submultiframe). The results are reported by
two bits multiplexed in bit 1 of time slot 0 in frames 13, 15 of the CRC-4
multiframe, respectively. Errors are counted and used to prepare statistic
data on transmission performance.
E1 (CEPT) Line Signal
The basic E1 line signal is coded using the High-Density Bipolar 3 (HDB3)
coding rules. The HDB3 coding format is an improvement of the Alternate
Mark Inversion (AMI) code.
In the AMI format, “ones” are alternately transmitted as positive and
negative pulses, whereas “zeros” are transmitted as a zero voltage level. The
AMI format cannot transmit long strings of “zeros”, because such strings do
not carry timing information.
The HDB3 coding rules restrict the maximum length of a “zero” string to
three pulse intervals. Longer strings are encoded at the transmit end to
introduce non-zero pulses. To allow the receiving end to detect these
artificially-introduced pulses and to enable their removal to restore the
original data string, the encoding introduces intentional bipolar violations in
the data sequence. The receiving end detects these violations and when
they appear to be part of an encoded “zero” suppression string - it removes
them.
Bipolar violations which are not part of the HDB3 zero-suppression string
are assumed to be caused by line errors, and are counted separately, to
obtain information on the quality of the transmission link when the CRC-4
function is not used.
E1 Line Alarm Conditions
The loss of frame alignment (also called loss of synchronization) condition
is declared when too many errors are detected in the frame alignment signal
(FAS), e.g., when 3 or 4 FAS errors are detected in the last 5 frames. Loss of
frame alignment is cleared after no FAS errors are detected in two
consecutive frames. The loss of frame alignment is reported by means of the
A bit (see Figure 1-5).
The alarm indication signal (AIS) is an unframed “all-ones” signal, and is
used to maintain line signal synchronization in case of loss of input signal,
e.g., because an alarm condition occurred in the equipment that supplies
the line signal. Note that the equipment receiving an AIS signal loses frame
synchronization.
The excessive bit error rate is measured on the frame alignment signal. The
alarm threshold is an error rate higher than 10-3 that persists for 4 to 5
seconds. The alarm condition is canceled when the error rate decreases
below 10-4 for 4 to 5 consecutive seconds.
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-19
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
HDSL Environment
Transmission Media
HDSL systems are intended to operate on the local subscriber plant, which
typically uses a mixture of unshielded twisted-wire pairs. Moreover, it is also
necessary to tolerate bridged taps. HDSL systems properly operate on this
media. The only requirement is that the lines must not be loaded. In
addition, it is assumed that the nominal impedance of the pairs is 135Ω,
and that the pairs are balanced with respect to ground.
Because of the variance in the transmission characteristics of the lines, HDSL
systems must compensate for the differential transmission delay between the
lines being used by a given system.
HDSL Line Signal
The line code on the HDSL line is 2B1Q (2 Binary, 1 Quaternary). This is a
four-level pulse-amplitude modulation code without redundancy, under
which each pair of information bits is converted to a quaternary symbol,
called quat (bits can assume two levels, whereas quats have four levels).
The encoding rule of the 2B1Q code is as follows:
Binary Digits
Quaternary Symbol
00
-3
01
-1
10
+3
11
+1
The levels of the quaternary signal are symmetrically located around the 0V,
and the nominal peak symbol level specified by the HDSL standards is
2.64V. Figure 1-6 illustrates the 2B1Q encoding rule.
+3 (+2.64V)
+1 (+0.88V)
time
(0.00V)
-1 (-0.88V)
-3 (-2.64V)
Quats
-1
+3
+1
-3
-3
+1
+3
-3
-1
-1
+1
-1
-3
+3
+3
-1
+1
Bits
01
10
11
00
00
11
10
00
01
01
11
01
00
10
10
01
11
Figure 1-10 2B1Q Encoding Rule
Due to the encoding of two bits into one symbol, the symbol rate on the
HDSL line is half the bit rate. Taking into consideration a payload rate of
2048 kbps and framing overhead, for two-loop operation the required
per-loop data rate is 1168 kbps (equivalent to a symbol rate of 584 kbaud).
1-20
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
By reducing the line symbol rate, the maximum range that can be reached is
increased. Together with the advanced digital signal processing techniques
implemented in HDSL systems, this results in a robust data transmission
system that can reliably operate over regular unconditioned local loops,
while exceeding several times the ranges that can be achieved by direct
transmission of an E1 signal.
HDSL Line Signal Structure
The HDSL line signal is organized in frames. Each frame has a nominal
duration of 6 msec: this translates to 3504 quats (7008 bits) for two-loop
systems. However, due to the use of stuffing, frames without stuffing quats
are actually one quat shorter, while frames with stuffing are one quat longer
than the nominal.
The HDSL frames carry the following types of data:
•
Core frames
•
Synchronization words
•
HDSL overhead quats
A core frame consists of 144 bytes (1152 bits). The structure of the core
frames depends on the type of data being carried. The core frames are split,
on a per byte basis, for transmission in parallel over the HDSL lines.
Figure 1-11 shows the mapping of the 32 application time slots of the core
frame into the two groups of 18 time slots carried by the two HDSL lines:
− Time slots 0 and 16 are carried in parallel on both HDSL lines.
− HDSL line 1 carries the odd-numbered application time slots up to
time slot 16, and then even-numbered application time slots.
− HDSL line 2 carries the even-numbered application time slots up to
time slot 16, and then odd-numbered application time slots.
− The last HDSL time slot is filled with ones (AIS signal).
The synchronization word consists of 7 quats, and its function is to enable
HDSL frame alignment.
16 HDSL overhead quats are used to carry the following data:
01/01/01 08:07
•
Indications such as far-end block error (FEBE), loss of signal and bipolar
violations on the E1 interface.
•
Embedded operations channel (eoc). The eoc allows supervision and
management of system operation (status, diagnostic loopbacks and tests,
repeater support, etc.) or vendor-defined functions (e.g., configuration
downloading).
•
Identification of the HDSL line number (seven quats). This allows the
receiver to detect unintentional interchange of pairs.
Functional Description
1-21
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
2048 kbps Data at
the Application
Frame Interface
Time Slots Inserted
in Core Frame with
2048 kbps Data
TS0
0
TS0
TS0
1
TS1
TS1
2
TS2
TS2
3
TS3
TS3
4
TS4
TS4
5
TS5
TS5
6
TS6
TS6
7
TS7
TS7
8
TS8
TS8
9
TS9
TS9
10
TS10
TS10
11
TS11
TS11
12
TS12
TS12
13
TS13
TS13
14
TS14
TS14
15
TS15
⇔
TS15
16
⇔
TS16
Mapping into
TS16
17
Mapping to the
TS17
Core Frames
TS16
18
two HDSL Lines
TS18
TS17
19
TS19
TS18
20
TS20
TS19
21
TS21
TS20
22
TS22
TS21
23
TS23
TS22
24
TS24
TS23
25
TS25
TS24
26
TS26
TS25
27
TS27
TS26
28
TS28
TS27
29
TS29
TS28
30
TS30
TS29
31
TS31
TS30
32
TS31
33
AIS
34
AIS
35
HDSL
Line
1
HDSL
Line
2
TS0
TS0
TS1
TS2
TS3
TS4
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
TS9
TS10
TS11
TS12
TS13
TS14
TS15
TS16
TS16
TS17
TS18
TS19
TS20
TS21
TS22
TS23
TS24
TS25
TS26
TS27
TS28
TS29
TS30
TS31
AIS
AIS
Figure 1-11 Mapping of Core Frame into HDSL Frames
1-22
Functional Description
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
HDSL-Related System Functions
The HDSL subsystem performs the following main functions:
•
Mapping of input data bits into HDSL frames, for transmission on the
HDSL lines
•
Start-up process
•
Frame alignment
•
Loop identification and correction
•
System management by means of the eoc channel
•
Collection of performance data.
To achieve proper operation, the management of the HDSL subsystem is
performed under the control of the central unit (LTU) unit, which provides
the timing reference for HDSL line transmission, and manages the
communication on the eoc channel with the remote unit (the NTU) located
on the customer's side.
The transmission of data on each HDSL line is full duplex. To enable duplex
transmission over one pair, the HDSL transceivers use an echo canceler,
based on advanced digital signal processing (DSP) techniques. When starting
system operation, the echo canceler is “trained”, to enable the separation of
the received signal from the transmit signal (near-end crosstalk - NEXT). The
training is performed by transmitting a special sequence for a predetermined
period. This process is called “start-up process”; data transmission can start
only after its successful completion.
Interaction between E1 Port and HDSL Lines
In case the E1 sublink interface loses synchronization, a loss of input data
indication signal is sent via the HDSL lines.
In case an HDSL line interface loses synchronization, idle code is inserted in
the E1 data stream time slots, which have been assigned to this line.
01/01/01 08:07
Functional Description
1-23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1.4 Technical Specifications
HDSL Interface
Compliance
ETSI TR-152
Signal Format
Dual duplex, 2B1Q line coding
Line Baud Rate
584 kbaud (equivalent to 1168 kbps), for each
pair
Line Type
Two unconditioned, unloaded twisted pairs
Impedance
135Ω
Transmit Pulse Shape
As per ETSI TR-152
Transmit Signal Power
+13.5 dBm ± 0.5 dBm
Loop Loss
31 dB max at 150 kHz (584 kbaud)
Range
- Without H-RPT
Up to 3.8 km (2.4 miles) for 26 AWG (0.4 mm)
Up to 4.8 km (3.0 miles) for 24 AWG (0.5 mm)
- With H-RPT
Up to 7.2 km (4.5 miles) for 26 AWG (0.4 mm)
from central to remote unit
Up to 9.2 km (5.7 miles) for 24 AWG (0.4 mm)
from central to remote unit
E1 Sublink
Interface
Return Loss
16 dB minimum, 25 kHz to 317 kHz @ 135Ω
Differential Line Delay
Maximum 50 µs at 150 kHz
Equalizer
Automatic adaptive equalizer
Connector
RJ-45
Applicable Standards
ITU-T Rec. G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732,
G.823
Framing
- G732N, no multiframe, intended for use with
CCS, without CRC-4
- G732N, no multiframe, intended for use with
CCS, with CRC-4
- Transparent transfer of frame, for unframed
operation or use with proprietary framing
1-24
Nominal Line Data Rate
2.048 Mbps
Line Code
HDB3
Line Impedance
(user-selectable)
- 120Ω, balanced
- 75Ω, unbalanced
Technical Specifications
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Signal Levels
Transmit Levels
- Balanced interface: ±3V ±10%
- Unbalanced interface: ±2.37V ±10%
Receive LEVELS
0 to -10 dB
Jitter Performance
Per ITU G.823
Connectors
- Balanced interface: 8-pin RJ-45 female
connector
- Unbalanced interface: two BNC coaxial
connectors
Data Channel
Interface
Data Rate
Multiples of 56 or 64 kbps, up to 2.048 Mbps
Interface Connectors
Statistics
(Performance
Monitoring)
RS-530
25-pin D-type female
V.35
34-pin male (via adapter cable)
RS-449/V.36
37-pin D-type male (via adapter cable)
X.21
15-pin D-type male (via adapter cable)
IR-ETH
RJ-45 (10BaseT) or BNC (10Base2)
IR-ETH/Q
RJ-45
IR-IP
RJ-45
E1 Sublink with CRC-4
Per ITU G.706
E1 Sublink without CRC-4
Bipolar violations (BPV)
HDSL Performance
Per ITU G.826
Front Panel
Controls
LCD
Push Buttons
2 rows × 16 characters
Indicators
E1 Sublink
E1 LOS - LOC
E1 LOS - REM
HDSL Lines
HDSL LOS - LINE A
HDSL LOS - LINE B
Status
TST
ALM
01/01/01 08:07
CURSOR, SCROLL, ENTER
Technical Specifications
1-25
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Diagnostics
Loopbacks
- HDSL main link local loopback, towards the
E1 sublink and data channels of the local
unit
- Channel loopback on the local unit towards
the DTE connected to the data channel of
the remote unit (per channel)
- Channel loopback on the remote unit
towards the DTE connected to the data
channel of the local unit (per channel)
- Channel loopback on the local unit towards
the DTE connected to its data channel (per
channel)
- In-band code-activated loopback on the
remote unit towards the DTE connected to
the data channel of the local unit
- E1 sublink loopback on the local unit
towards the equipment connected to the E1
sublink of the local unit
- E1 sublink loopback on the local unit
towards the equipment connected to the E1
sublink of the remote unit
- E1 sublink loopback on the remote unit
towards the equipment connected to the E1
sublink of the local unit.
- H-RPT local line loopback towards the
LTU-configured unit (available from the
LTU-configured unit in applications with an
H-RPT)
BERT Functionality
Timing
1-26
BER measurement through remote HCD-E1
(per data channel)
HDSL Link
Receive Timing
Always recovered from the received HDSL
signal
Transmit Timing
(user-selectable)
- Internal timing, derived from a local
Technical Specifications
±50 ppm oscillator
- External timing, locked to the transmit clock
of a selected synchronous channel or to the
E1 sublink clock signal
- Loopback timing (remote unit only): locked
to the recovered HDSL receive signal of the
central unit
01/01/01 08:07
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
E1 Sublink
Receive Timing
Always recovered from the E1 sublink receive
data signal
Transmit Timing
(user-selectable)
Follows the transmit timing of the HDSL link.
Synchronous Data
Channels
- DCE timing mode: HCD-E1 data channel
provides transmit and receive clocks for the
DTE connected to the data port.
- DTE1 timing mode: HCD-E1 data channel
sends the receive data accompanied by the
receive clock, derived from the main system
clock, to the DTE connected to the data
port, and accepts data from DTE according
to the DTE transmit clock.
- DTE2 timing mode: HCD-E1 data channel
transmits and receives data according to the
clock signals provided by the equipment
connected to the data port. (not available on
channels with X.21 interface).
Supervisory Port
Interface
V.24/ RS-232, asynchronous DCE interface for
direct connection of control terminal or
dial-up modem
Data Rate
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 bps, with
Autobaud option
Word Format
- One start bit
- 7 or 8 data bits
- Parity: none, odd, or even
- One stop bit
Alarm Relay
Physical
Connector
9-pin D-type, female
Function
Floating pair of NO and NC contacts
Contact Ratings
Open-circuit: maximum 60 VDC
Short-circuit: maximum 0.25A
Depth
243 mm / 9.5 in
Width
215 mm / 8.5 in
Height
43.7 mm / 1.75 in (1 U)
Weight
01/01/01 08:07
1.5 kg / 3.5 lb
Technical Specifications
1-27
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 1 - Introduction
Power
Environment
1-28
AC Source
100 ÷240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz
DC Source
-48 VDC (-36 VDC to -72 VDC)
Operating Temperature
0 ÷50°C (32 ÷122°F)
Relative Humidity
Up to 90%, non-condensing
Technical Specifications
01/01/01 08:07
Chapter 2
Installation and Setup
This chapter describes installation procedures for the standalone HCD-E1
device. For instructions on installation of one or two units in a 19-inch rack,
refer to the Rack Mounting Kit for 19-inch Racks guide that comes with the
RM kit.
After installing the unit:
•
Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed system configuration information and
procedures using the front panel controls.
•
Refer to Chapter 4 for detailed system configuration procedures using an
ASCII terminal, TELNET host, or SNMP agent connected to the HCD-E1
control port.
In case a problem is encountered, refer to Chapter 5 for test and diagnostics
instructions.
Warning
Internal settings, adjustment, maintenance, and repairs may be
performed by only by a skilled technician who is aware of the hazards
involved.
Always observe standard safety precautions during installation,
operation and maintenance of this product.
2.1 Site Requirements and Prerequisites
An AC-powered HCD-E1 units should be installed within 1.5m (5 ft) of an
easily-accessible grounded AC outlet capable of furnishing the required
supply voltage, in the range of 100 to 240 VAC.
A DC-powered HCD-E1 units require a -48 VDC power source, which must
be adequately isolated from the mains supply. In order to prevent a fire
hazard, a suitable fuse must be installed in the -48 VDC line.
Allow at least 90 cm (36 in) of frontal clearance for operator access and at
least 10 cm (4 in) clearance at the rear of the unit for interface cable
connections.
Caution
Do not stack units one on top of another.
The ambient operating temperature of the HCD-E1 should be 0 to 50°C
(32 to 122°F), at a relative humidity of up to 90%, non-condensing.
11/12/00 10:36
Site Requirements and Prerequisites
2-1
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
2.2 Package Contents
The HCD-E1 package includes the following items:
•
HCD-E1 unit
•
HCD-E1 Installation and Operation Manual
•
AC power cord or DC power supply connector kit.
•
Interface adapter cable/s (interface ordering options, see Connecting the
Interfaces later in this chapter).
2.3 Installation and Setup
HCD-E1 is a standalone device designed for tabletop or bench installation. It
is delivered completely assembled. No provision is made for bolting the unit
to the tabletop.
To complete the installation of HCD-E1, you must perform the following (in
the given order):
•
Determine the required configuration of HCD-E1, according to your
application, and set the internal jumpers and switches accordingly.
•
Connect the E1 sublink, the HDSL lines, the data channels and the
control port, if necessary.
•
Connect power to the unit.
These procedures are described on the following pages.
Setting the
Internal Jumpers
and Switches
This section provides information on the functions of the internal jumpers
and switches, to help you in the selection of the correct setting for particular
application, and gives step-by-step instructions for performing the internal
settings. The default settings are also listed.
All the other configuration actions can be performed from the front panel or
from a control terminal, after the installation is completed. Information and
detailed instructions for these operations appear in Chapter 3 and
Chapter 4, respectively.
HCD-E1 Printed Circuit Boards
HCD-E1 comprises three printed circuit boards (PCBs): the main board and
two interface PCBs.
Figure 2-1 shows the location and identification of the boards installed in the
HCD-E1 unit.
2-2
Installation and Setup
11/12/00 10:36
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
RJ-45
Connector
S1
ON
SPARE
DB INIT
DEF SP
PASSWD
Data Channel 2
Interface Board
Sublink
Interface Board
Jumper C/R
R
R
Remote
Unit
R/C
C
Central
Unit
JP4
C
J10
FGND/GND
Connected
JP8
FGND/GND ON
ON
OFF
Not
OFF Connected
Figure 2-1 HCD-E1 - Identification of Boards, Jumpers and Switches
The Main Board contains the common signal processing circuits, the
interfaces to the main link (HDSL) and the Data Channel 1 interface. A DIP
switch unit (S1) and two jumpers (JP4 and JP8) are provided for user settings.
The board contains additional jumpers which are factory-set and should not
be changed by the user.
The Data Channel 2 Interface Board provides the connections of data
channel 2. The board does not have any user-set jumpers or switches
(except for the Ethernet board, see Appendix C and Appendix D).
The E1 Sublink Interface Board provides the E1 connections and contains
several user-set jumpers.
To set the internal jumpers and switches, you must do the following in this
order:
11/12/00 10:36
•
•
•
Open the HCD-E1 case
•
Identify jumper and switch locations and settings on the Sublink Interface
Board (referring to Figure 2-4) and change settings as required.
•
•
Reinstall the E1 Sublink Interface Board, if it has been removed.
Set the Main Board Jumpers and Switch, referring to Figure 2-1.
Remove the E1 Sublink Internal Board, if it is necessary to modify its
settings.
Reinstall the HCD-E1 cover.
Installation and Setup
2-3
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Access to the inside of the equipment is permitted only to authorized
and qualified service personnel.
Warning
To avoid accidental electric shock, always disconnect the interface
cables and the power cord before removing the unit from its casing.
Line voltages are present inside HCD-E1 when it is connected to power
and/or to the lines. Moreover, under external fault conditions
dangerous voltages may appear on the lines connected to the unit.
Any adjustment, maintenance, and repair of the opened instrument
under voltage should be avoided as much as possible and, when
inevitable, should be carried out only by a skilled technician who is
aware of the hazard involved. Capacitors inside the instrument may
still be charged even after the instrument has been disconnected from
its source of supply.
Caution
HCD-E1 contains components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). To
prevent ESD damage, avoid touching the internal components. Before
moving jumpers, touch the HCD-E1 frame.
Opening the HCD-E1 Case
To reach the internal jumpers and switches of HCD-E1, it is necessary to
open its case. To do this, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect all the cables connected to the HCD-E1.
2. Turn the unit over (bottom facing up).
3. Unscrew the four cover screws (see Figure 2-2) and keep them in a safe
place.
4. Turn the unit over (bottom facing down).
5. After the four screws are released, remove the HCD-E1 top cover by
pulling it straight up.
2-4
Installation and Setup
11/12/00 10:36
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
Cover Screws
(4 Places)
Figure 2-2 Identification of Cover Screws
Setting the Main Board Internal Jumpers and Switches
The internal jumpers and switches located on the HCD-E1 main board are
identified in Figure 2-1. The functions of jumpers and switches are described
below.
Switch S1
DIP switch S1 allows you to enforce the default password and node number
(section 4) or reload the desired group of default parameters (sections 2 and
3). Any changes in switch section positions must be performed on a unit not
connected to power.
Note
If you want to change the hardware configuration of your HCD-E1 (for
example, remove an E1 sublink or one of the data channels from the unit),
you will have to reload its database with default parameters (see below and
the DB INIT command in Chapter 4).
•
•
Switch section 1 – not used in this unit and is reserved as spare.
Switch section 2 – DB INIT. This section selects the source of the
database configuration parameters:
ON
HCD-E1 uses the default parameters stored in its
EPROM for reloading of the database.
OFF
HCD-E1 uses the parameters stored in the database.
HCD-E1 is delivered with the database loaded with the default
parameters. If needed, you can move the switch to the ON position
again, to reload the database and restart HCD-E1 with the default
parameters.
HCD-E1 is shipped with section 2 set at OFF.
11/12/00 10:36
Installation and Setup
2-5
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
•
Switch section 3 – DEF SP. This section selects the source of the
control port parameters:
ON
HCD-E1 uses the default parameters stored in its
program EPROM. For the default values, see Table 3-4
in Chapter 3.
OFF
HCD-E1 uses the parameters stored in the database.
HCD-E1 is shipped with section 3 set at OFF.
•
Switch section 4 – PASSWD. To prevent unauthorized personnel from
using the HCD-E1 supervision program, you can use password
protection with a password, consisting of up to eight alphanumeric
characters. HCD-E1 is delivered with a default password, HCD, but
normally the password is selected by the user.
ON
HCD-E1 uses the default password.
OFF
HCD-E1 uses the user-selected password.
HCD-E1 is shipped with section 4 set at OFF.
Note
You can make HCD-E1 temporarily use default values of the password
(control port parameters) without erasing the user-selected values from the
database. To do this, set the PASSWD (DEF SP) section to ON, leaving DB
INIT at OFF and turn the unit on. Then, when you turn HCD-E1 off, reset the
appropriate section to OFF and turn the unit on again, HCD-E1 will use the
user-selected parameters.
R/C Function Selection Jumper, JP4
The jumper JP4 (R/C) is used to select the function of the HCD-E1 unit:
C
HCD-E1 operates as a central unit (LTU).
R
HCD-E1 operates as a remote unit (NTU).
HCD-E1 is shipped with the jumper set at C.
FGND/GND Jumper, JP8
The FGND/GND jumper is used to control the connection between the
internal signal ground and the frame ground.
ON
Ground is shorted to the frame ground.
OFF
Ground is not shorted to the frame ground.
HCD-E1 is shipped with the jumper set at ON.
2-6
Installation and Setup
11/12/00 10:36
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Warning
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
Setting the FGND/GND jumper to OFF may make the equipment unsafe
for direct connection to unprotected telecommunication networks at
locations where constant excessive voltages may be present on the
lines.
Removing the E1 Sublink Interface Board
The E1 sublink interface board is located over the main board, and is
installed with the component side facing the main board. It is electrically
connected to the main board by means of a flat cable via the J10 connector
on the main board (see Figure 2-1).
The E1 sublink interface board is attached to the main board by means of
two metal spacers. The two spacers near the rear panel are also used to
provide a low-resistance path to ground.
The board is connected by wires to the E1 sublink BNC connectors, which
are fastened to the rear panel. These wires do not have to be disconnected
when the sublink interface board is removed.
Figure 2-3 explains how to remove the sublink interface board. Use the
following procedure:
1.
Identify the two nuts that fasten the sublink interface board to the
spacers.
2.
Remove the nuts and their washers.
3.
Disconnect the flat cable from the connector J10 on the main board
(see Figure 2-1).
4.
Hold the sublink interface board from its sides, and carefully pull it
straight up. Once the board is free, turn the board over the rear panel,
and let it rest on the work table. Do not strain the wires connecting the
board to the BNC connectors.
Turn Board
Over
Remove Nuts
and Washers
(2 Places)
Sublink
Interface
Board
CABLE
CONNECTORS
Figure 2-3 Removal of Sublink Interface Board
11/12/00 10:36
Installation and Setup
2-7
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
Setting the Sublink Interface Board Jumpers
Figure 2-4 shows the component side of the E1 sublink interface board, as
seen after it is removed from the unit.
Note
The interface board has protection fuses for the surge protection circuits
located on the line side of the line isolation transformers. These fuses are also
identified in Figure 2-4.
JP17
Figure 2-4 E1 Sublink Interface Board, Internal Settings
Set the jumpers as follows:
Interface Selection Jumpers, JP9, JP12, JP16, and JP17
The jumpers JP9 and JP12 and the double jumper JP16-JP17 are used to
select the E1 sublink interface. All the jumpers must be always set to the
same position (either BAL or UNBAL).
•
2-8
Installation and Setup
For operation with the balanced interface:
−
Set the jumper JP12 to BAL E1.
−
Set the jumpers JP16 and JP17 to BAL.
−
Disconnect the jumper JP9.
11/12/00 10:36
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
•
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
For operation with the unbalanced interface:
−
Set the jumper JP12 to UNBAL E1.
−
Set the jumpers JP16 and JP17 to UNBAL.
−
Connect the jumper JP9.
HCD-E1 is shipped with all the jumpers set for balanced interface.
E1 Sublink Transmit Side Ground Reference Jumper, JP8
The jumper JP8 controls the ground reference of the E1 sublink transmit
output when working with the unbalanced interface.
In accordance with ITU-T recommendations, this jumper is an option when
the unbalanced interface is used (the line is normally grounded at the
transmit side).
HCD-E1 is shipped with the jumper not installed (operation with
balanced interface).
E1 Sublink Receive Side Ground Reference Jumper, JP10
The jumper JP10 controls the ground reference of the E1 sublink receive
output when working with the unbalanced interface.
In accordance with ITU-T recommendations, this jumper is an option when
the unbalanced interface is used (the line is normally grounded at the
transmit side).
HCD-E1 is shipped with the jumper not installed (operation with
balanced interface).
Reinstalling the E1 Sublink Interface Board
If during the procedure the E1 sublink interface board has been removed,
reinstall it by reversing the procedure described above. Pay special attention
to the following:
11/12/00 10:36
•
Mate correctly the flat cable connector with the corresponding main
board connector.
•
Make sure that the RJ-45 connector has been properly inserted into its
place in the rear panel, and none of the BNC connectors wires have
been damaged.
•
Make sure to place the original washers under each nut. Fasten the nuts
tightly. Pay particular attention to proper fastening to the two spacers
located near the rear panel.
Installation and Setup
2-9
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
Reinstalling the HCD-E1 Cover
After completing the internal settings, reinstall the top cover as follows:
1. Position the lower half of the HCD-E1 case on a flat, clean surface.
Check that the decorative black plastic strips on the sides of the unit are
still in place (if not, place the strips in the grooves on the sides of the
lower half).
2. Identify the front and the rear of the top cover, and position the cover
on the lower half of the HCD-E1, so that the cover guides are located
just above the holes in the lower half. Close the cover and ensure that
the protruding tips of the cover guides enter the corresponding recesses
in the lower half.
3. Hold the cover in place and turn the assembly over, to gain access to the
bottom of the unit.
4. Insert the original cover screws in their positions and tighten carefully.
Do not use excessive torque.
Connecting the
Interfaces
Figure 2-5 shows a typical rear panel of a standard HCD-E1 unit and
identifies its connector locations.
TX IN
~100-240 VAC
0.5A T 250V
P
O
W
E
R
SUB E1
RX OUT
CH.2
CHANNEL
ALM RLY
CH.1
NETWORK
LINE A
1 2
HDSL
LINE B
4 5
Figure 2-5 HCD-E1 Rear Panel (AC Powered Unit)
Connecting the E1 Sublink
The balanced interface of the E1 sublink is terminated in an RJ-45
connector. Appendix B provides the pin allocation for this connector.
The unbalanced interface is terminated in two BNC connectors.
Connect the E1 sublink cable(s) to the connector(s) corresponding to the
interface in use. Do not connect to both the balanced and unbalanced
connectors!
2-10
•
When using the DTE with balanced interface, connect the DTE cable to
the RJ-45 connector designated SUB E1.
•
When using the DTE with unbalanced interface, connect the DTE cable
to the two BNC connectors designated RX/OUT and TX/IN. Pay attention
to correct connection of the receive and transmit cables to the RX/OUT
and TX/IN connectors.
Installation and Setup
11/12/00 10:36
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
Connecting the Data Channels
HCD-E1 typically has two data ports, each terminated in a 25-pin D-type
female connector. The units with an Ethernet interface arrive with the
Ethernet interface module built in the upper port. For the description of the
Ethernet interface, see Appendix C and Appendix D.
When using the RS-530 interface, equipment with RS-530 interface can be
directly connected to the data channel connector using standard cables.
Equipment with V.36/RS-422/RS-449, X.21 and V.35 interfaces can be
connected by means of adapter cables, supplied with the unit. Table 2-1 lists
these cables and describes their applications.
You can also prepare these cables yourself in accordance with the port
connector wiring information given in Appendix B.
Table 2-1 HCD-E1 Interface Adapter Cables
Interface
Cable
Length
Port
Data Equipment
V.35 DCE
V.35 DTE
CBL-HS2V1
1.5m (5 ft)
V.35 DTE1
V.35 DCE
CBL-HS2V2
1.5m (5 ft)
V.35 DTE2
V.35 DCE
CBL-HS2V3
1.5m (5 ft)
RS-422 DCE
RS-422 DTE
CBL-HS2R1
1.5m (5 ft)
RS-422 DTE1
RS-422 DCE
CBL-HS2R2
1.5m (5 ft)
RS-422 DTE2
RS-422 DCE
CBL-HS2R3
1.5m (5 ft)
RS-422 DCE
X.21 DTE
CBL-HS2X1
0.36m (1.2 ft)
When using adapter cables, first connect the adapter cable to the channel
connector, and then connect the data cable to the adapter connector.
Connecting the HDSL Lines
To connect the remote equipment (HDSL lines) to HCD-E1, connect the
cable to the RJ-45 connector designated NETWORK HDSL. Appendix B
provides the pin allocation for this connector.
Connecting the HCD-E1 Alarm Relay Port
The alarm relay contacts are available in a special RJ-11, 4-pin connector. To
connect HCD-E1 to alarm equipment, you will have to prepare a special
cable according to the following pinout.
11/12/00 10:36
Pin
Function
1
Common
2
NC
3
NO
4
not in use
Installation and Setup
2-11
Chapter 2 - Installation and Setup
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Connecting the Control Port
If you are using the control terminal, connect a cable prepared in
accordance with Appendix B between the control port connector,
designated CONTROL DCE (see Figure 3-1 in Chapter 3), and the control
terminal. If the control terminal is connected via modems, use a cross-over
cable.
Note
Connecting the
Power
Warning
The various interface cables should be shielded, in order to comply with FCC
rules. HCD-E1 and its data interfaces will work well even if the cables are not
shielded, but some radio interference may occur.
To connect the power to HCD-E1, refer to the appropriate section below,
depending on your version of the unit (AC or DC).
Before switching on this instrument and connecting any other cable, the
protective earth terminals of this instrument must be connected to the
protective ground conductor of the mains power cord. If you are using
an extension cord (power cable) make sure it is grounded as well.
Any interruption of the protective (grounding) conductor (inside or
outside the instrument) or disconnecting the protective earth terminal
can make this instrument dangerous. Intentional interruption is
prohibited.
For AC version, make sure that only fuses of the required rating, as
marked on the rear panel, are used for replacement. Do not use
repaired fuses or short-circuit the fuse holder. Always disconnect the
mains cable before removing or replacing the fuse. Whenever it is likely
that the fuse protection has been damaged, make the unit inoperative
and secure it against unintended operation.
AC Power Connection
AC power should be supplied to the HCD-E1 through the 5 ft (1.5m)
standard power cable terminated by a standard 3-prong plug
(see Figure 2-5). The cable is provided with the unit.
1. Check that the ON/OFF switch on the HCD-E1 rear panel is set to OFF.
2. First, connect the power cable to the connector on the HCD-E1 rear
panel, and then to the mains outlet.
DC Power Connection
To connect DC power to HCD-E1, refer to DC Power Supply Connection
Supplement.
2-12
Installation and Setup
11/12/00 10:36
Chapter 3
Front Panel Operating
Instructions
3.1 General
This chapter contains detailed instructions for operating HCD-E1 from the
front panel. The information presented in this chapter includes:
•
HCD-E1 front panel - Section 3.2
•
General description of HCD-E1 control, display and push-button
functions, and menu organization - Section 3.3
•
HCD-E1 configuration parameters - Section 3.4
•
Operating procedures (turn-on, front-panel indications, performance
monitoring and turn-off) - Section 3.5
•
HCD-E1 local configuration setup - Section 3.6.
For instructions on the use of a control terminal to control and monitor
HCD-E1 operation remotely, refer to Chapter 4.
3.2 Front Panel Controls, Connectors, and Indicators
Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of HCD-E1. Table 3-1 lists the functions of
the HCD-E1 controls, connectors and indicators, located on the HCD-E1
front panel.
11/01/00 19:52
Front Panel Controls, Connectors, and Indicators
3-1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
1 2 3
7
4
8
TST
6
5
10
HCD-E1
E1 LOS HDSL LOS
LOC REM LINE A LINE B
ALM
9
CURSOR SCROLL ENTER
11
CONTROL
DCE
Figure 3-1 HCD-E1 Front Panel
Table 3-1 HCD-E1 Controls, Connectors and Indicators
No
Name
Type
Function
1
E1 LOS LOC
LED indicator
Lights when the local E1 port loses frame synchronization to
the incoming signal (in the UNFRAMED mode, the indicator
lights when the incoming signal is corrupted or missing)
2
E1 LOS REM
LED indicator
Lights when the equipment connected to the E1 port
reports loss of synchronization. This indication is not
available when the UNFRAMED mode is selected.
3
HDSL LOS
LINE A
LED indicator
Lights when the HDSL line A (line 1) circuits lose
synchronization to the incoming signal
4
HDSL LOS
LINE B
LED indicator
Lights when the HDSL line B (line 2) circuits lose
synchronization to the incoming signal
5
TST
LED indicator
Lights when a test is active
6
ALM
LED indicator
Lights when ON-state alarms (for explanation of the term
see Section 5.2, Status Indications and Alarms, in Chapter 5)
are stored in the HCD-E1 alarm buffer
Alphanumeric
display
Liquid crystal display (LCD) used to display messages and
status information. The display contains 2 rows of 16
characters each.
7
8
CURSOR
Push button
Used to move among the information fields on the LCD
9
SCROLL
Push button
Used to scroll among the available options displayed on the
LCD
10
ENTER
Push button
Used to confirm the changes made in HCD-E1 operation
11
CONTROL
DCE
Connector
Connection to control terminal
3-2
Front Panel Controls, Connectors, and Indicators
11/01/00 19:52
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
3.3 Control of HCD-E1 Operation
General
The HCD-E1 operating mode is determined by a set of parameters stored in
an internal non-volatile memory. To select these parameters, you can use
the HCD-E1 front panel push buttons or a control terminal.
After the operating parameters have been loaded (this process is called
configuration setup), HCD-E1 no longer requires operator attendance.
The configuration selected by the user and stored in the HCD-E1 memory is
not affected when power is turned off. Upon turn-on, HCD-E1 checks the
validity of the stored configuration data, and after the self-test takes the last
selected configuration (unless you have changed the default setting of DIP
switch S1, Section 2, from OFF to ON, as described in Chapter 2,
Installation). If the configuration does not require modification, HCD-E1 is
ready for operation immediately after power is applied. However, if the
configuration data is corrupted, HCD-E1 loads a default configuration
instead. The default configuration, prepared by the manufacturer, is stored
in the EPROM.
All operations are performed using an interactive, menu-driven interface,
controlled by the LCD and three push buttons. HCD-E1 guides you in the
execution of the required task by means of messages and checks your
inputs. Moreover, HCD-E1 will suggest you only those parameter values
which are available on your HCD-E1 model in the selected operating mode.
If you make a configuration error (for example, you select a parameter value
that conflicts with the current operating mode), HCD-E1 rejects the
erroneous selection and displays an error message that identifies the error.
For detailed operating instructions, see Section 3.5 and Section 3.6.
Organization of
the LCD
The HCD-E1 display has two rows:
•
The upper row shows the header, which can be one of the following:
- ALARM BUFFER
- PORT DIAG
- HDSL DIAG
- TEST OPTION
- Name of one of seven configuration parameter groups
(see Section 3.4)
•
The lower row displays the following information:
−
−
−
−
−
Parameter name and value
Status messages
Test or loopback name and status
Error messages
Diagnostics messages
Figure 3-2 shows the basic LCD menu structure.
11/01/00 19:52
Control of HCD-E1 Operation
3-3
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
FIRST ROW
SECOND ROW
ALARM BUFFER
SCROLL CLEAR
EMPTY
CLK MASTER
CLK_FBACK
HCD TYPE
CONFIG REM
HRPT
LOCAL PORT
REM PORT
REM REM PORT
LOCAL LINE
LOCAL CH
REM CH
REM REM CH
BERT
INBAND LOOP
LOCAL HRPT
FRAME
SYNC
CRC-4
MAP MODE
NUM OF TS
START TS
TS_0 to TS_31
IDLE CODE
ERROR CRC...
LST DEG MIN
CURR ES ...
L. TERM INT
SPEED
DATA
PARITY
INTERFACE
AUX DEV
FRAME
MULT
MAP
SPEED
START TS
CTS
ETHER
SYSTEM PARAMETER
TEST OPTION: SL
TEST OPTION: ML
TEST OPTION: CHX*
TEST OPTION: HRPT
SL PARAMETERS
PORT DIAG: SL
HDSL DIAG: LINEX*
SP PARAMETERS
CHANNEL PRM: CHX*
BRIDGING
BERT PRM
DNLOAD PRM
PB PARAMETERS
FIFO SIZE
CLK MODE
TS_0 to TS_31
PATTERN
ERR RATE
SL MODE
ML MODE
SL TS NUM
ML TS NUM
TS_1 to TS_31
(only for the unit configured as central)
(only for the unit configured as central)
(only for the unit configured as central)
(only for the unit configured as central)
(only when MAP is selected as SEQ or ALT)
(or BPV COUNT)
(see Table 5-3)
(see Table 5-4)
(only for HCD-E1 configured as central)
(only when data channel has Ethernet interface)
(only when data channel has Ethernet interface)
only if SL MODE is selected as DEDIC
only if ML MODE is selected as DEDIC
* X denotes the number of an HDSL line or data channel. It can be 1 or 2.
Figure 3-2 HCD-E1 LCD Basic Menu Structure
3-4
Control of HCD-E1 Operation
11/01/00 19:52
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Information
Displayed on the
LCD
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
The LCD displays four types of information messages:
•
•
•
•
Status messages (alarms)
Diagnostics and performance monitoring data
Test status
Configuration parameters.
Status Messages (Alarms)
When HCD-E1 is not being configured and neither PORT DIAG nor HDSL
DIAG is displayed, it displays one of the two screens that appear under the
header ALARM BUFFER. If the alarm buffer contains status messages
(ON-state alarms), the LCD second row shows “SCROLL CLEAR” and the
ALM indicator is lit. Otherwise, the ALM LED is off, and the second row of
the LCD shows “EMPTY”.
For the definition of ON-state alarms, list of alarm messages and instructions
how to work with them, refer to Section 5.2, Status Indications and Alarms,
in Chapter 5.
Diagnostics and Performance Monitoring Data
HCD-E1 can display the E1 port traffic performance parameters gathered
when operating with the CRC-4 function enabled. When the CRC-4
function is disabled, the HCD-E1 can still display BPV statistics.
In addition, HCD-E1 can display the HDSL line performance parameters.
The diagnostics data appear under the headers PORT DIAG: SL and
HDSL DIAG. For explanation of the diagnostics data parameters and their
monitoring, refer to Section 5.3, Performance Diagnostics Data, in
Chapter 5.
Test Functions
The test functions of HCD-E1 include:
•
Local and remote loopbacks on the E1 port, data channels, and local
loopback on the HDSL lines.
•
Remote loopbacks on the E1 port and data channels of the remote unit.
•
Bit error rate testing on each data channel.
•
In-band activated remote loopback on each data channel
•
Local loopback on the H-RPT (when working with the latter and your
HCD-E1 is configured as central)
The test options appear under the header TEST OPTION. For description of
the test functions and instructions how to operate them, refer to Section 5.4,
Diagnostic Tests, in Chapter 5.
11/01/00 19:52
Control of HCD-E1 Operation
3-5
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Configuration Parameters
HCD-E1 configuration parameters are divided into the following seven
groups: system parameters (SYSTEM PARAMETER), sublink parameters
(SL PARAMETERS), channel parameters (CHANNEL PRM), control port
parameters (SP PARAMETERS), priority bumping parameters
(PB PARAMETERS), BERT parameters (BERT PRM), and download
parameters (DNLOAD PRM).
Section 3.4 describes each group of parameters and provides practical
configuration guidelines, where necessary.
In addition to the parameters configured from the front panel, there are
parameters that can be controlled only from the control terminal. These are
described in Chapter 4.
Using Front-Panel
Push Buttons
3-6
HCD-E1 operation is controlled by means of the LCD and the three push
buttons designated CURSOR, SCROLL and ENTER. The same control actions
are consistently used for all the activities:
Cursor
Use this push-button to indicate what you want to
change. Pressing the CURSOR push button moves the
cursor (a bar that indicates the selected field) among
the fields in the current display.
Scroll
Some fields list several different items. You can change
(“scroll”) the item indicated by the cursor by pressing
SCROLL.
Press this push button repeatedly to display the
alternatives for the current field indicated by the cursor.
Holding this button pressed causes automatic scrolling
of the available alternatives.
Enter
Press this button once to select the value displayed in
the field indicated by the cursor.
Control of HCD-E1 Operation
•
If the selected value is valid, it replaces the old
value and the change takes effect immediately.
•
If your selection is incorrect, it is not accepted. In
this case, HCD-E1 displays a CONFIG ERROR
message with a two-digit code in the second display
row. The code indicates what is wrong. After a short
time, the error message disappears and HCD-E1
returns to the original display. Now you can correct
the error. Refer to Section 5.5 for the list of the error
codes and description of what to do to correct the
error.
11/01/00 19:52
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Additional Functions of ENTER
The ENTER key has two additional functions:
1. When the LCD displays the ALARM BUFFER screen, the ENTER key can
be used to delete all the alarm messages in the buffer.
2. When the LCD displays the PORT DIAG or HDSL DIAG screens, the
ENTER key can be used to reset the performance monitoring counter
being displayed (see Displaying Performance Data on the Front-Panel
LCD in Chapter 5).
3.4 Configuration Parameters
This section lists the HCD-E1 configuration parameters and their functions.
The information is organized in tables for each group of parameters:
Group
Display
See...
System parameters
SYSTEM PARAMETER
Table 3-2
Sublink parameters
SL PARAMETERS
Table 3-3
Control port
parameters
SP PARAMETERS
Table 3-4
Channel parameters
CHANNEL PRM
Table 3-5
BERT parameters
BERT PRM
Table 3-6
Download
parameters
DNLOAD PRM
Table 3-7
Priority bumping
parameters
PB PARAMETERS
Table 3-8
The tables also list the parameter values included in the HCD-E1 default
configuration and important practical guidelines for configuring some of
them.
Note
In addition to the parameters listed in the tables, HCD-E1 supports other
parameters, which can be modified only via the control port. These
parameters are explained in Chapter 4.
System parameters can be set only on a unit configured as central.
11/01/00 19:52
Configuration Parameters
3-7
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-2 System Parameters
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
CLK MASTER*
Selects the master
timing reference.
INT
Internal oscillator is selected
SL
Locked to the recovered receive clock of the E1 sublink.
CH1 or CH2 Locked to the external clock supplied to the
corresponding data channel, provided the channel
timing mode is DTE2.
Default: INT
Select SL for connection to carrier lines.
For a point-to-point application with
standalone equipment at both link
ends, you can also select INT.
Prior to setting CLK MASTER to CH1 or
CH2, you must set the timing mode of
the corresponding channel to DTE2
and assign at least one time slot (see
Table 3-5, Channel Parameters, or the
DEF CH command in Chapter 4).
Note: When HCD-E1 is configured as a remote unit, the CLK MASTER parameter doesn’t appear at all. The clock is always locked to the
recovered receive clock of the HDSL line. This locks the outgoing timings of the E1 port and data channels to the timing of the HDSL
signal. If both lines operate normally, HCD-E1 uses the recovered clock of line A (line 1); if line 1 fails, HCD-E1 automatically switches to
the recovered clock of line 2.
CLK_FBACK*
Selects the
alternate (fallback)
system timing
reference, for use
in case the master
reference fails.
NONE
No fallback source is used. In this case, the
internal oscillator is automatically selected
when the master reference fails.
SL
Locked to the recovered E1 sublink receive clock.
CH1 or CH2 Locked to the external clock supplied to the
corresponding user data channel, provided the
channel timing mode is DTE2
Default:
HCD TYPE
3-8
Displays HCD-E1
configuration
mode
Configuration Parameters
NONE
CENTRAL
HCD-E1 configured as central unit
REMOTE
HCD-E1 configured as remote unit
Select a source different from that
selected as master. To disable switching
to the fallback source, select NONE. In
this case, the default fallback clock
source is the HCD-E1 internal clock
oscillator.
Prior to setting CLK_FBACK to CH1 or
CH2, you must set the timing mode of
the corresponding channel to DTE2
and assign at least one time slot.
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-2 System Parameters (Cont.)
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
CONFIG REM*
Selects the ability
to configure a
remote unit
YES
Enables the downloading function. The configuration values
selected for HCD-E1 configured as central unit are
downloaded to the unit configured as remote, and determine
the remote unit operating mode.
NO
Disables the downloading function.
Default: YES
HRPT
Shows whether
your HDSL link
contains an H-RPT
repeater
YES
The HDSL link contains H-RPT.
NO
There is no HDSL repeater on the HDSL link.
* Parameters marked with an asterisk are displayed only when your HCD-E1 is configured as central unit.
Note
1. If in your application the downloading function is disabled (CONFIG REM at the central unit set to NO), and the unit
configured as central is reset or restarted (for example, after power-up), its parameters may be automatically
downloaded to the unit configured as remote, and replace the locally-modified parameters. In order for this not to
happen, make sure that Section 2 (DB INIT) of the DIP Switch S1 of the unit configured as central is set to OFF (see
“Setting the Internal Jumpers and Switches” in Chapter 2).
2. A data channel or a sublink can serve as a timing reference only if at least one time slot is assigned to it. For details
refer to Working with Time Slots section below.
11/01/00 19:52
Configuration Parameters 3-9
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-3 Sublink Configuration Parameters
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
FRAME
Selects the framing mode for the
sublink
UNFRAMED The E1 sublink
transparently transfers the
incoming data stream on
a bit-by-bit basis. This
allows transfer of
unframed 2048 kbps data
streams, or of data
streams using any framing
method (standard or
proprietary).
Select the framing mode specified for use in your
network.
G732N
When transferring unstructured data streams, or data
streams with proprietary framing, select UNFRAMED.
To select UNFRAMED, you have to assign all the 32 time
slots.
Two frames per
multiframe. Time slot 16
is passed transparently.
Default: G732N
SYNC
(does not
appear in
UNFRAMED
mode)
Permits to reduce the time
required for the E1 sublink to
return to normal operation after
local loss of synchronization
CCITT Complies with ITU-T Rec. G. 732
FAST
After 1 second
Select CCITT, unless your application has special
requirements
62411 Similar to the requirements of
AT&T TR-62411 (after
10 seconds)
Default: CCITT
CRC-4
(does not
appear in
UNFRAMED
mode)
3-10
Enables the generation of check
bits (in accordance with the
CRC-4 polynomial specified by
ITU G.704) for the frames
transmitted on the E1 sublink,
and the checking of check bits
carried by the frames
Configuration Parameters
NO
CRC-4 option disabled
YES
CRC-4 option enabled
Default: NO
Select YES, unless HCD-E1 is connected to equipment
that does not support this capability.
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-3 Sublink Configuration Parameters (Cont.)
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
MAP MODE
Determines the selection
method for the E1 sublink
time slots transferred to the
HDSL link.
USER
Free user selection of time slots
SEQ
Sequential allocation of time slots, starting
from a user-specified time slot (defined under
START TS).
Note:
The selected sublink time slots
are allocated the same time
slots in the HDSL link frame.
ALT
Alternate allocation of time slots. This
selection means that starting from a specified
slot, defined under START TS, the time slot
allocation looks like this:
DATA NC DATA NC DATA, etc.
Default: USER
NUM OF TS
START TS
Selects the total number of
time slots being assigned.
Selects the starting time slot
for SEQ or ALT time slot
allocation
NC, 0, 1, ..., 32
for UNFRAMED
1 to 32
for G732N
11/01/00 19:52
Selects the code transmitted to
fill idle (unused) time slots in
the E1 frames
To let HCD-E1 assign the time slots
automatically in accordance with the
NUM OF TS parameter, select SEQ
(sequential allocation) or ALT (alternate
allocation).
If you have selected SEQ or ALT, you must
also set the starting time slot under
START TS.
When working in UNFRAMED mode, this
parameter must be set to 32.
Default: NC
In ALT mode, the number of time slots
assigned depends on the value of START TS
and is 16 at maximum.
Any number in the range of 01 to 31, consistent with
the desired number of user time slots.
When working in UNFRAMED mode, this
parameter must be set to 0.
Default: 0
IDLE_CODE
To assign individual time slots, select USER.
If you selected SEQ mode for G732N, make
sure that the sum of the START time slot
number and of the NUM OF TS parameter
does not exceed 31.
The available selections are 00 to FF (hexadecimal)
Default: FF
Configuration Parameters 3-11
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-3 Sublink Configuration Parameters (Cont.)
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
TS_0 to TS_31 (for
UNFRAMED)
TS_1 to TS_31 (for
G732N)
If you have selected USER
under MAP, selects, for each
HDSL time slot, whether to
use it for carrying the user's
payload or not. If you have
selected SEQ or ALT, displays
the time slot allocation.
NC
Time slot not used (not connected)
DATA
Time slot used to carry payload data
Default: NC
For each time slot to be used, select DATA
to assign the time slot to carry user's payload,
or NC to skip it. Make sure you assign the
exact number of time slots needed to
support the data rate selected by means of
the NUM OF TS parameter. Avoid selecting
time slots, which have already been assigned
to data channels or in-band management
Table 3-4 Control Port Parameters
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
SPEED
Selects control
port data rate
300, 1200 ,2400, 4800, 9600 (bps), AUTO
To enable the supervisory port to use the
SLIP protocol (for example, for SNMP or
Telnet management), select the specific
data rate being used. In all the other cases,
select AUTO.
AUTO Autobaud operation. HCD-E1 automatically identifies the
control port data rate.
Default: AUTO
In this case HCD-E1 performs the
automatic baud rate recognition
procedure. To ensure positive
identification of terminal data rate, start
the communication with three consecutive
carriage returns (<CR>).
DATA
3-12
Selects the
number of data
bits in the word
format
Configuration Parameters
7 or 8 data bits.
Default: 8
Make sure that the number of data bits is
the same as on the terminal.
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-4 Control Port Parameters (Cont.)
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
PARITY
Selects the
method of parity
checking
ODD
Odd parity
EVEN
Even parity
Make sure that the parity is the same as on the
terminal.
NONE Parity check disabled (available only with 8 data bits)
Default: NONE
INTERFACE
Selects control
port interface
DCE
HCD-E1 operates as a DCE for the control terminal.
DTE
HCD-E1 operates as a DTE, for connection via modem
to the control terminal.
Select DCE when directly connected to the
control terminal.
Select DTE when connected to a modem.
Default: DCE
Note: The INTERFACE parameter changes only the direction of the interface control (handshaking) signals, but not the functions of the
interface pins. Therefore, when connecting to a modem, it is necessary to use a cross cable.
AUX DEV (does
not appear
with HCD-E1
configured as
remote)
Selects the
management
mode supported
by the HCD-E1
control port
TERMINAL
Management by means of a supervision terminal.
NMS-SLIP
Management by means of Telnet host or an
SNMP network management station.
NONE
Not in use
Default: TERMINAL
11/01/00 19:52
Configuration Parameters 3-13
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-5 Channel Parameters
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
FRAME
Selects a framed or
unframed mode of HDSL
framer
FRAMED
HDSL framer is in the
framed mode
UNFRAMED Allows transfer of
unframed 2048 kbps
data streams
Default:
Select UNFRAMED if your remote unit is HTU-E1 and desired
payload data rate is 2048 kbps.
Note: Any change in the operating mode from FRAMED to
UNFRAMED and vice versa will cause double temporary HDSL
synchronization loss.
FRAMED
Important: If you select UNFRAMED, the payload data rate must be 1792 kbps or 2048 kbps. Priority bumping is not applicable in this mode.
MULT
MAP
Selects the basic data rate
per HDSL timeslot
Selects the time slot
allocation method used for
mapping user's data into the
time slots of the HDSL link
64K Basic data rate is 64 kbps
56K Basic data rate is 56 kbps
Select the basic rate of the user's payload, 56 kbps or 64 kbps, in
accordance with the desired user's channel data rate.
Default: 64
The recommended selection is 64 kbps. When you select 56 kbps,
HCD-E1 packs the user's data in bytes by adding an "1" bit for
each seven user bits, therefore actually the line data rate is always
a multiple of 64 kbps.
USER
Free user selection of time slots.
To assign individual time slots, select USER.
SEQ
Sequential allocation of time slots,
starting from a user-specified slot,
defined under START TS.
To let HCD-E1 assign the time slots automatically in accordance
with the SPEED parameter, select SEQ (sequential allocation) or
ALT (alternate allocation).
ALT
Alternate allocation of time slots,
starting from a user-specified time
slot, defined under START TS.
ALT means that starting from a specified slot, defined under
START TS, the slot allocation looks like this:
DATA NC DATA NC DATA etc.
Default: USER
SPEED
Selects the channel payload
data rate. For a channel with
Ethernet interface, selects
the transfer rate through the
HDSL link
Available data rates are multiples of the basic The maximum possible speed selected for the ALT mode depends
rate (56 kbps or 64 kbps). The multiples are
on the START parameter and cannot exceed the multiple of MULT
in the range of 1 to 32, resulting in rates of
and 16.
56, 112, 168, ..., 1792 kbps or 64, 128, 192,
..., 2048 kbps, respectively.
Default: NC
3-14
Configuration Parameters
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-5 Channel Parameters (Cont.)
Designation
Function
Values
Configuration Guidelines
START TS
Selects the starting time slot Any number in the range of 0 to 31, consistent
for SEQ or ALT time slot
with the desired number of user time slots.
allocation (not displayed for
Default: 0
USER allocation)
If you have selected SEQ, make sure that the sum of START
time slot number and of SPEED divided by MULT does not
exceed 31.
CTS
Selects the state of the CTS
line in the data channel
interface (not relevant for
the Ethernet interface)
For polled applications, select =RTS.
ON
CTS continuously on
=RTS
CTS line follows the RTS line
Default: ON
ETHER (appears
Selects the Ethernet LAN
only when data
traffic transfer mode
channel has
Ethernet interface)
HALF_DUP
Half duplex operation
FULL_DUP
Full duplex operation
BRIDGING
Reserved for future use.
(appears only
when data channel
has Ethernet
interface)
Always displays FILTER, independently of the
selected Ethernet traffic control function.
FIFO SIZE
AUTO
11/01/00 19:52
Selects the size of the FIFO
buffer for the data channel.
This parameter is used in
the DTE2 mode. In the
other modes, HCD-E1 sets
the buffer size
automatically.
Default: HALF_DUP
To select the Ethernet traffic control function, use Ethernet
bridge DIP switch SW-1, Section 3 (see Appendix C). Set the
DIP switch, Section 3 to ON (FILTER) if you want to filter the
traffic sent to the remote end (recommended).
Automatic size selection.
Select AUTO (automatic FIFO buffer size selection), which
means that the FIFO buffer size is automatically selected, in
32, 60, 104,144 Buffer size in bits corresponds
accordance with the jitter that must be tolerated at each data
to FIFO lengths of ±16, ±30,
rate.
±52, and ±72 bits).
When using the DCE and DTE1 clock modes, it is not
Default:
AUTO
necessary to increase the FIFO buffer size. If the DTE2 mode
is used, and the jitter expected in a specific application is
higher than what can be tolerated when using the
automatically selected size, you can manually select a FIFO
buffer size greater than the AUTO size. The AUTO values are
listed in Table 1-1.
Configuration Parameters 3-15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-5 Channel Parameters (Cont.)
Designation
Function
Values
CLK MODE
Selects the clocking mode of DCE
the given data channel.
DTE1
DTE2
Configuration Guidelines
The data channel provides both
transmit and receive clocks to the
user DTE.
Select in accordance with the type of equipment connected to
the user data channel (see Chapter 1 for more information):
The data channel provides the
receive clock to the user while
receiving the transmit clock from the
DTE.
• DCE - For direct connection to a synchronous DTE
The data channel receives both the
transmit and receive clocks from the
user DCE.
Default: DCE
TS_0 to TS_31
3-16
If you have selected USER
under MAP, selects, for
each HDSL time slot,
whether to use it for
carrying the user's payload
or not. If you have selected
SEQ or ALT, displays the
time slot allocation.
Configuration Parameters
NC
Time slot not used (not connected)
DATA
Time slot used to carry payload
data
Default: NC
• DTE1 - For connection via a modem with external clock, or
another equipment that accepts a receive clock and outputs
a transmit clock.
• DTE2 - For connection via a modem or other type of
equipment (such as a multiplexer), that provides both
receive and transmit clocks. You must select this mode
when the HCD-E1 timing is to be locked to an external
clock (see CLK MASTER), or the external clock is intended for
use as a fallback reference (see CLK_FBACK).
For each time slot to be used, select DATA to assign the time
slot to carry user's payload, or NC to skip it. Make sure you
assign the exact number of time slots needed to support the
data rate selected by means of the SPEED parameter.
Avoid selecting time slots, which have already been assigned to
another channel, sublink, or in-band management.
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-6 BERT Parameters
Designation
Function
Values
PATTERN
Selects the test pattern.
2E3-1, 2E4-1, 2E5-1, 2E6-1, 2E7-1, 511, 2E10-1, 2047,
2E15-1, 2E17-1, 2E18-1, 2E20-1, QRSS, 2E21-1, 2E22-1,
2E23-1, 2E25-1, 2E28-1, 2E29-1, 2E31-1, 2E32-1.
Configuration Guidelines
Default: 2E3-1
ERR RATE
Enables the injection of a
calibrated rate of errors in the
transmitted test pattern.
SINGLE
10E-1, 10E-2, 10E-3, 10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, or 10E-7
NO ERR
Default: NO ERR
Select NO ERR to disable the injection of
errors
Select SINGLE to enable the injection of
single errors
Select 10E-1 to enable the injection of errors
at a rate of 10E-1 (one error in every 10 test
pattern bits), and same with 10E-2, 10E-3,
10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, up to 10E-7 (one error
in every 10 million test pattern bits).
See Operating BERT from the Front Panel in
Section 5.4 for the error injection procedure.
11/01/00 19:52
Configuration Parameters 3-17
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Table 3-7 Download Parameters
Designation
Function
Values
SL MODE
Selects the in-band transmission NONE In-band SNMP and Telnet traffic is ignored
mode for the sublink
TS0/F In-band SNMP and Telnet traffic is received and
transmitted in time slot 0.
Configuration Guidelines
DEDIC In-band SNMP and Telnet traffic is received and
transmitted in a dedicated user-selected time slot.
Default: NONE
ML MODE
Selects the in-band transmission NONE In-band SNMP and Telnet traffic is ignored
mode for the selected main link. DEDIC In-band SNMP and Telnet traffic is received and
transmitted in a dedicated user-selected time slot.
Default: NONE
Select NONE also when using UNFRAMED
mode.
To use the Sa4 bit in time slot 0, select TS0/F
If you selected DEDIC, you must also select a
free time slot using the SL TS NUM
parameter.
Select NONE also when using UNFRAMED
mode.
If you selected DEDIC, you must also select a
free time slot using the ML TS NUM
parameter.
SL TS NUM
Selects the free time slot when 1 to 31
SL MODE is selected as DEDIC.
Default: 31
If you have selected DEDIC both for SL and
ML modes, make sure that the assigned time
slot is the same for both links.
ML TS NUM
Selects the free time slot when
ML MODE is selected as
DEDIC.
If you have selected DEDIC both for SL and
ML modes, make sure that the assigned time
slot is the same for both links.
0 to 31
Default: 31
Table 3-8 Priority Bumping Configuration Parameters
Designation
Function
Values
TS_1 to TS_31 Selects the time slot priority in the case one of LOW
Low priority
the HDSL lines is down. The time slots which
HIGH
High priority
have been assigned high priority will continue
Default: LOW
being sent on the remaining HDSL line.
Note
1. The priority bumping will work in the framed mode only.
2. TS-0 has always HIGH priority. The maximum number of other time slots that can be configured to high priority is 16.
3-18
Configuration Parameters
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
3.5 Operating Instructions
This section covers the following activities:
•
Turning HCD-E1 on
•
Checking the HCD-E1 configuration
•
Normal HCD-E1 operating indications
•
Monitoring the HCD-E1 performance
•
Turning HCD-E1 off
Refer to Section 3.6 for local configuration setup instructions.
Turning HCD-E1
On
To turn HCD-E1 on, set the rear POWER switch to ON (AC version) or
connect it to the power supply (DC version). Upon turn-on, HCD-E1
performs a self-test: observe the front-panel indications.
During the self-test, HCD-E1 displays its current software revision:
HCD REV 2.1
SELF TEST
After successfully completing the self-test procedure, HCD-E1 switches to
the default ALARM BUFFER screen.
If HCD-E1 fails the self-test, its LCD will display a description of the fault. In
this case, HCD-E1 must be repaired before it can be used again.
Access to the inside of the unit is permitted only to qualified and
authorized personnel
Warning
If the self-test reveals that configuration data selected by the user and stored
in the HCD-E1 database is corrupted, HCD-E1 generates the DB CHKSUM
ERR alarm message. In this case, it is necessary to initialize the database. To
do this, use the INIT DB command, if you have access to a control terminal.
Otherwise, do the following:
1.
Set Section DB INIT of the internal switch S1 to ON.
2.
Turn HCD-E1 on for a short time (until the power-up self-test is
performed) .
3.
Return the DB INIT switch section to OFF. Now HCD-E1 is operating
with the default parameters. The parameter values included in the
default configuration are listed in Section 3-4.
4.
Configure the unit, if necessary.
Refer to Chapter 2 for more detailed procedures.
11/01/00 19:52
Operating Instructions
3-19
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
You can verify the HCD-E1 configuration as explained in the following
section. If the configuration does not require modification, HCD-E1 is ready
for operation immediately after the self-test is completed. For information
how to change the configuration, refer to Section 3.6.
Before performing the procedure below, review Section 3-4, which explains
Checking the
Current Operating the HCD-E1 configuration parameters.
Configuration
To check the current operation configuration, proceed as follows:
Note
During the following procedure, do not press the ENTER push button, to
prevent accidental change of parameters.
Step
Action
Key
1
Bring the cursor to the top row (if it is
not already there).
CURSOR
2
Scroll to display SYSTEM PARAMETER
in the top row.
SCROLL
3
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in
the second row.
CURSOR
4
Scroll to see the other system
parameters.
SCROLL
5
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in
the top row.
CURSOR
6
Bring to display the next group of
configuration parameters (the sublink
parameters).
SCROLL
7
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in
the second row.
CURSOR
8
Scroll to see the other parameters of
this group.
SCROLL
9
Repeat steps 5 to 8 to display the
control port parameters, SP
PARAMETERS and CHANNEL PRM
CH1
CURSOR
SCROLL
10
Bring the cursor to the right-hand field
in the top row.
CURSOR
SCROLL
3-20
Operating Instructions
Result
The second row shows the first system
parameter (CLK MASTER if your HCD-E1 is
configured as central) and its current
selection.
After each pressing of the SCROLL button,
the second row displays the name and
current value of the next system parameter.
Continue until the first parameter appears
again.
The first row displays SL PARAMETERS. The
second row shows the first parameter of the
port parameters, FRAME, and its current
value.
After each pressing of the SCROLL button,
the second display row shows the current
value of the next parameter. Continue until
FRAME appears again.
The first row displays CHANNEL PRM CH1.
11/01/00 19:52
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Step
Action
Key
11
Bring the cursor to the right-hand field
in the top row
CURSOR
12
Scroll to display CH2
SCROLL
13
Repeat steps 7, 8 to see other
Channel 2 parameters.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
14
Repeat steps 5 to 8 to display the rest
of the parameters: BERT PRM,
DNLOAD PRM, PB PARAMETERS
Result
The first row displays CHANNEL PRM CH2.
Normal Indications LCD
If no ON-state alarm* is stored in the alarm buffer (ALM indicator off),
HCD-E1 continues to display the last user-selected display. If there are
ON-state alarm messages stored in the alarm buffer (ALM indicator lights)
and neither PORT DIAG nor HDSL DIAG screen is displayed, the top row
displays the message ALARM BUFFER.
In addition, HCD-E1 will automatically abort the current activity (except
PORT DIAG and HDSL DIAG) and will redisplay the ALARM BUFFER
message if no front-panel button is pressed for one minute.
When the top row shows ALARM BUFFER, the second row displays the
following information:
•
If there are no ON-state alarm messages stored in the alarm buffer, the
second row shows EMPTY.
•
If the alarm buffer contains ON-state alarms, HCD-E1 displays SCROLL in
the left-hand field of the second row, and CLEAR in the right-hand field.
* For explanation of the term, instructions on displaying and clearing the alarms, refer
to Section 5.2, Status Indications and Alarms, in Chapter 5.
LEDs
During normal operation, all the HCD-E1 front-panel indicators are off.
11/01/00 19:52
•
The TST indicator lights when a test is active. The test type can be
displayed by entering the TEST OPTIONS (Chapter 5).
•
The E1 LOS LOC indicator lights when the E1 port loses frame
synchronization to the incoming signal (in the UNFRAMED mode, the
indicator lights when the incoming signal is corrupted or missing).
•
The E1 LOS REM indicator of a link lights when the equipment
connected to the E1 port reports loss of synchronization. This indication
is not available when the UNFRAMED mode is selected.
•
The HDSL LOS indicator lights when the circuits of the corresponding
HDSL line lose synchronization to the incoming signal.
•
The ALM indicator lights when ON-state alarms are stored in the
HCD-E1 alarm buffer.
Operating Instructions
3-21
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
Monitoring the
HCD-E1
Performance
Turning HCD-E1
Off
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
HCD-E1 continuously measures diagnostics performance data. The
diagnostics data is available under PORT DIAG or HDSL DIAG.
For the explanation of the measured parameters, refer to Section 5.3,
Performance Diagnostics Data, in Chapter 5.
To turn HCD-E1 off, do the following:
•
•
If you have an AC version, set the HCD-E1 rear power switch to OFF
If you have a DC version, disconnect the power cord from the unit.
3.6 Local Configuration Setup Procedure
General
Before starting any configuration action:
•
Review the relevant configuration parameters given in Section 3-4.
•
Consult a list of the required parameters from the network subscription
data, and/or from your system administrator.
To set up the HCD-E1 configuration, act in the following order:
1. Select the system parameters (only if your unit is configured as central).
2. Select the E1 sublink parameters.
3. Select the channel parameters.
4. Select the parameters of the control port, if needed.
5. Select the priority bumping parameters, if needed and possible.
6. Select the download parameters (if you want to enable in-band
management).
7. Select the BERT parameters, if necessary.
If your HCD-E1 is configured as remote, you will have to configure it only
when the CONFIG REM parameter (see Table 3-2, System Parameters) of
your unit configured as central is set to NO.
The general configuration procedure is explained on the following page.
Tables in Section 3.4 list special considerations and guidelines for each
group of parameters.
3-22
Local Configuration Setup Procedure
11/01/00 19:52
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Password
Protection
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
HCD-E1 has password protection designed to avoid undesirable
modification of its parameters. You will be able to configure HCD-E1 from
the front panel only if its password protection is disabled. Otherwise, you
can use the HCD-E1 front panel to display the current parameter values, but
cannot modify them. If you try to modify a parameter or perform a test
function from the front panel while the password protection is enabled,
HCD-E1 will display CONFIG ERROR 04 (for the list of configuration error
messages see Table 5-5 in Chapter 5).
If you have access to an ASCII control terminal, you can use the DEF SP
command to enable or disable the password protection (see Chapter 4 for
detailed instructions).
If the terminal is not available, you must set for a short time the DB INIT
section of the internal switch S1 to ON for disabling password protection, as
explained in Section 2-4.
Note
This action will delete all the current parameters on your HCD-E1 and make
it use the default parameter values. If your unit is configured as central, these
parameters will be also automatically downloaded to the remote unit. That is
to say, now you will need to reconfigure both the central and the remote
unit. The only case you would not have to do it is when your unit is
configured as remote and you want its parameters to be automatically
downloaded from the unit configured as central (its CONFIG REM parameter
from SYSTEM PARAMETER menu set at YES).
General
Configuration
Procedure
Before starting the configuration procedure, make sure that all the
user-initiated loopbacks are disconnected. To disconnect the loopbacks,
select OFF under the TEST OPTION field (see Section 5.4, Diagnostic Tests,
in Chapter 5).
If your configuration attempt is invalid, HCD-E1 shortly displays a CONFIG
ERROR XY message (the code XY identifying the error) and then returns to
its normal display. For explanation of the configuration error messages refer
to Section 5.5, Configuration Error Messages, in Chapter 5.
11/01/00 19:52
Local Configuration Setup Procedure
3-23
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
To configure the unit, follow the steps below:
Step
Action
Key
1
Bring the cursor to the top row (if not already there).
CURSOR
2
Scroll to display the desired group of parameters in the top
row.
SCROLL
Result
The second row shows
the first parameter in the
selected group and its
current value.
Note: When the desired group of parameters must be separately selected for each data channel, the
top row includes an additional field (at the rightmost side of the top row): this field is used to select
the desired channel number.
3
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field (parameter name) in
the second row, and then scroll to display the desired
parameter in the selected group.
CURSOR
4
Bring the cursor to the right-hand field (the parameter
value) in the second row.
CURSOR
5
Scroll to set the required value for the displayed parameter.
SCROLL
The second row shows
the available values.
6
When the desired parameter value is displayed, confirm the
new parameter value.
ENTER
The second row displays
shortly CONFIG ENTER,
then returns to the
normal display.
SCROLL
The second row displays
the current selection.
SCROLL
Note: For the CHANNEL PRM, SL PARAMETERS and
DNLOAD PRM groups, you must press ENTER only after
you have changed all the parameters (that required
changes), otherwise HCD-E1 displays the CONFIG ERROR
message. For more information, see Table 3-3 and
Table 3-5.
7
Repeat steps 3 to 6 until values are assigned to all the
parameters in the group.
Note: You do not have to press ENTER each time you change a parameter within a group. However,
once you have finished to modify parameters of a certain group (such as system, sublink, etc.), you
must press ENTER to confirm the selection. If you change parameter values, but return the cursor to
the top row and scroll to another group without pressing ENTER, the changes are discarded and
HCD-E1 shortly displays the message CONFIG LOSS.
8
Repeat steps 1 to 7 until values are assigned to all the
parameters in the desired groups.
CURSOR
SCROLL
ENTER
9
After completing the configuration actions, you can use
steps 1, 2 to return to the ALARM BUFFER screen.
CURSOR
SCROLL
The top row displays:
ALARM BUFFER.
If ON-state alarm messages are stored in the alarm buffer
and the current screen is not PORT DIAG or HDSL DIAG,
the ALARM BUFFER screen will be automatically displayed
if no push button is pressed for one minute.
Note
3-24
Pressing ENTER accepts your choice only if the cursor is in the right-hand field
of the second row.
Local Configuration Setup Procedure
11/01/00 19:52
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Working with
Time Slots
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
This section provides instructions for performing time slot configuration
from the front panel.
Reassigning All Time Slots between Data Channels/Sublink
If you want to reassign all timeslots from one data channel/sublink to
another data channel/sublink, you must close the data channel/sublink (free
all timeslots assigned to it), and then assign the timeslots to another data
channel/sublink.
Note
1.
If the data channel/sublink, which you want to close serves as master or
fallback clock source, you must select a different timing reference first.
Perform the selection by scrolling to SYSTEM PARAMETERS in the top
row and setting temporarily CLK MASTER to INT and CLK FBACK to
NONE.
2.
Deactivate all loopback tests. For instructions on deactivating loopback
tests from the front panel, refer to Diagnostic Tests in Chapter 5.
3.
To close a data channel, scroll to CHANNEL PRM CHX in the top row.
Set the SPEED parameter to NC and press the ENTER button.
4.
To close the sublink, scroll to SL PARAMTERS in the top row. Set the
NUM OF TS parameter to NC and press the ENTER button.
5.
To reassign the closed time slots to the sublink, scroll to SL PARAMTERS
in the top row and assign the time slots to the sublink. Refer to
Table 3-3 for instructions on assigning time slots to the sublink.
6.
To reassign the closed time slots to a data channel, scroll to CHANNEL
PRM CHX in the top row and assign the time slots to the channel. Refer
to Table 3-4 for instructions on assigning time slots to data channels.
7.
Select the new sources for the CLK MASTER and CLK FBACK
parameters.
You must assign at least one timeslot to the data channel or sublink, which
you select as master or fallback clock source.
Reconfiguring Individual Time Slots
To reconfigure individual time slots, follow the steps below:
11/01/00 19:52
1.
Deactivate all loopback tests. For instructions on deactivating loopback
tests from the front panel, refer to Diagnostic Tests in Chapter 5.
2.
To reassign time slots currently assigned to a data channel, scroll to
CHANNEL PRM CHX in the top row. Set the SPEED parameter to the
corresponding (lower) value. To reassign time slots currently assigned to
the sublink, scroll to SL PARAMETERS in the top row. Set the NUM OF
TS parameter to the corresponding (lower) value. Select USER under
MAP MODE. For each time slot you want to reassign, scroll to the time
slot in the bottom row and set it to NC. When the closing of the desired
time slots is completed, press ENTER.
Local Configuration Setup Procedure
3-25
Chapter 3 - Front Panel Operating Instructions
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
3.
To reassign closed time slots to a data channel, scroll to CHANNEL
PRM CHX in the top row. Set the SPEED parameter to the
corresponding (higher) value. For each time slot you want to reassign,
scroll to the time slot in the bottom row and set it to DATA. When the
reassignment of the desired time slots is completed, press ENTER.
4.
To reassign closed time slots to the sublink, scroll to SL PARAMTERS in
the top row. Set the NUM OF TS parameter to the corresponding
(higher) value. For each time slot you want to reassign, scroll to the time
slot in the bottom row and set it as desired. When the reassignment of
the desired time slots is completed, press ENTER.
Replacing a Time Slot Used for the In-band Management
Before selecting a new time slot for the main link in-band management, you
must close the current dedicated time slot.
1.
Scroll to DNLOAD PRM in the top row, scroll to ML TS NUM in the
bottom row.
2.
Scroll to the current dedicated timeslot and close it by setting it to NC.
Wait 20 seconds (40 seconds if H-RPT is installed in the HDSL link).
Note
Make sure that the time slot, which you intend to use for the in-band
management is not assigned to a data channel or sublink.
3.
3-26
Assign the desired timeslot to the in-band management from the
DNLOAD PRM menu.
Local Configuration Setup Procedure
11/01/00 19:52
Chapter 4
Control from the
Supervisory Port
4.1 General
This chapter provides detailed instructions for the management of HCD-E1
by means of ASCII terminals and IP hosts using the Telnet protocol.
The initial configuring of HCD-E1 is to be performed using a standard ASCII
terminal connected to the HCD-E1 control port, CONTROL DCE. However,
after performing the initial configuration, you can manage HCD-E1 using
any of the following three options:
•
Use the terminal as a supervision terminal, for performing all the
management activities supported by the HCD-E1.
•
Manage HCD-E1 from any IP host using the Telnet protocol. After
establishing a Telnet session with HCD-E1, the Telnet protocol offers the
same functionality as the supervision terminal, and in addition enables
remote access over IP networks.
•
Manage HCD-E1 by means of SNMP-based network management
stations, e.g., the RADview network management station offered by RAD,
using the SLIP protocol for communication.
This chapter includes the following information:
•
Description of supervision terminal hardware requirements,
communication and handshaking - Section 4-2.
•
Starting a management session by means of the supervision terminal Section 4-3.
•
Description of the set of commands and command syntax available for
the supervision terminal - Section 4-4 and Section 4-5. The same
command set is available to Telnet users.
•
General operating instructions, including start-up, routine operations, and
stopping of remote control - Section 4-6.
The instructions appearing in this chapter assume that the supervision
terminal operator is familiar with the HCD-E1 system and with its
configuration parameters.
For instructions regarding the use of the RADview network management
station, refer to the RADview User's Reference Manual.
11/01/00 19:23
General
4-1
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
4.2 Hardware Requirements
Terminal
Characteristics
Any standard ASCII terminal (“dumb” terminal or personal computer
emulating an ASCII terminal) equipped with a V.24/RS-232 communication
interface can be used to control HCD-E1 operation. Make sure to initialize
HCD-E1 for correct terminal operation as explained in Section 4-3,
otherwise some of the commands may not work properly.
The software necessary to run the HCD-E1 control program is contained in
the HCD-E1 system.
Telnet (IP) Host
Characteristics
Typically, the Telnet host is a PC with the appropriate suite of TCP/IP
protocols, or a UNIX station.
The Telnet host can be directly connected to the managed HCD-E1 unit, or
located at any site from which IP communication be established to the
managed HCD-E1.
Control Port
Interface
Characteristics
HCD-E1 has a V.24/RS-232 asynchronous DCE port, designated CONTROL
DCE and terminated in a 9-pin D-type female connector. The control port
continuously monitors the incoming data stream and will immediately
respond to any input string received through this port; moreover, when
configured to support SLIP, messages in each of the supported protocols are
automatically identified and processed.
The supervision terminal can be connected either directly to the HCD-E1
control port (the CONTROL DCE connector), or through a modem or any
other type of full-duplex data link. The HCD-E1 control port interface type
must be set in accordance with the connection method (see Section 3-6):
DCE
Intended for direct connection to terminals. Since terminals
usually have DTE interfaces, in this case the connection to the
port is made by means of a straight-through cable.
DTE
Intended for connection through a modem or data link. In this
case, you need a cross cable (also called null modem cable) to
connect to the CONTROL DCE connector.
The HCD-E1 control port can be configured to communicate at rates of 300,
1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps. The word format consists of one stop bit
and 7 or 8 data bits. Parity can be odd, even or disabled.
HCD-E1 supports two types of modems:
4-2
•
Dial-up Hayes compatible modems. HCD-E1 has call-in capability, that
is, it can accept external calls.
•
Multidrop modems, such as the RAD SRM-8 miniature multidrop
modem.
Hardware Requirements
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
For multidrop operation, each HCD-E1 can be assigned a node number in
the range of 1 through 255. Assigning node number 0 to the HCD-E1 means
that it will accept and answer any message: this is not permitted in
multidrop operation. Node number 0 is however recommended for use
with both point-to-point and dial-up modes.
Each HCD-E1 can be assigned a logical name of up to eight characters. The
logical name is sent in each transmission of alarm messages. The name helps
the operator to identify the source of messages that are received by the
supervision terminal.
The relevant HCD-E1 configuration parameters are described in Section 3-5
and Section 4-5. Instructions for configuring the HCD-E1 control port appear
in Section 3-8.
Control Port
Handshaking
Protocol
The control lines being used in each DCE and DTE modes and the direction
of the control signals are detailed in the following chart.
Control Line
Interface Type
DCE
DTE
CTS
Out
Not Used
DCD
Out
Out
DSR
Out
Out
DTR
In
In
RI
Not Used
In
RTS
In
In
Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
The terminal sets the DTR line ON (active) to gain control over HCD-E1 and
start a configuration/monitoring session.
When the DTR is ON, the front panel controls are disabled, and the LCD
displays a message that notifies the operator that HCD-E1 is under remote
management:
•
When the management mode defined by means of the DEF SP
command (or SP PARAMETERS on the front panel) is the supervision
terminal (AUXILIARY DEVICE = TERMINAL), the LCD shows TERMINAL
ON LINE.
•
When the management mode is the Telnet or SNMP
(AUXILIARY DEVICE = NMS-SLIP), the LCD shows NETWORK ON LINE
and displays the IP address.
When you end the terminal control connection, returning the control to the
HCD-E1 front panel, the DTR line goes OFF (becomes inactive).
11/01/00 19:23
Hardware Requirements
4-3
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Request to Send (RTS)
The RTS line is normally ON (active) when the supervision terminal is in
session.
When the RTS line is OFF (inactive), HCD-E1 interprets any data received
from the terminal on the TD line as MARK.
Clear to Send (CTS)
The state of the CTS line is determined by the CTS parameter:
ON
The CTS line is always ON (active).
=RTS
The CTS line follows the RTS line.
Data Carrier Detect (DCD)
The state of the DCD line depends on the communication address (node
number):
•
When the node number is 0, the DCD line is always ON (active).
•
When a non-zero node number is used, the DCD becomes ON (active)
when data is detected on the RD line, provided HCD-E1 recognizes its
own address in the data stream.
To simulate DTE operation, the delay between these events can be set by
the user (by means of the DCD_DEL parameter).
Ring Indication (RI)
The RI line is used only with dial-up modems (INT=DTE).
The RI line is normally OFF (inactive), and switches to the ON (active) state
when the modem attached to the HCD-E1 front-panel CONTROL DCE
connector detects an incoming call (see also the DSR Line section).
Data Set Ready (DSR)
•
Usually, the DSR line is configured to track the DTR line. In this case, if
the control port interface is DTE, the DSR line will be set to ON for five
seconds when the RI line is ON while the DTR line is OFF.
•
If the control port interface is DCE, the DSR line can also be configured
to be continuously ON. However, if the DTR line switches to OFF, the
DSR line will also switch to OFF for 5 seconds.
In addition, HCD-E1 always sets DSR OFF (inactive) for 5 seconds when the
EXIT command is executed, or the disconnect time-out expires.
4-4
Hardware Requirements
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
AUTOBAUD
Function
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
When the AUTOBAUD function is enabled, HCD-E1 can identify the
operating data rate of the terminal by analyzing the timing of three
consecutive Carriage Return + Line Feed characters (generated by pressing
three times the carriage return key). The detected data rate is then used for
the current communication session.
The automatic baud rate identification procedure is performed (or repeated)
whenever three consecutive carriage returns are received after one of the
following events occurs:
•
The DTR line has been switched OFF.
•
The EXIT command has been executed.
•
The idle disconnect time-out expired because no data has been
exchanged with the supervision terminal.
In case one of these events occurred, HCD-E1 assumes that the current
communication session has been terminated.
Note that when SLIP communication is required, the AUTOBAUD function
must be disabled.
4.3 Starting a Supervision Terminal Management
Session
Control Terminal
Configuration
Configure the terminal for the communication parameters used by the
HCD-E1 CONTROL DCE port, select the full-duplex mode, turn the terminal
echo off, and disable any type of flow control. For the initial configuration
session, it is recommended to use the default communication parameters:
9600 bps, one start bit, eight data bits, no parity, one stop bit. Connect the
terminal cable to the CONTROL DCE connector of the HCD-E1. Turn the
control terminal on. You are now ready to start a management session.
Preliminary
Settings for
Initial
Configuration
Session
If HCD-E1 does not respond (there is no echo or response to any command
entered at the terminal), this may be caused by one of the following:
•
CONTROL DCE communication parameters are not identical to those of
the terminal
•
HCD-E1 is configured to use a non-zero node number
You can cover both possibilities by setting the DB INIT switch to ON. This
will enforce the default communication parameters and the default (0) node
number, and disable the password protection in one action, and you will
then be able to start the communication session. However, HCD-E1 allows a
finer procedure, which lets you preserve your preset configuration. To do so,
follow the procedure below. Remember that all the changes will take place
only after you turn the HCD-E1 off for a short time, and then turn it back on.
11/01/00 19:23
Starting a Supervision Terminal Management Session
4-5
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Initial
Configuration
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
1.
If you don’t know the node number, go to step 2. If you know the node
number, enter it followed by the command (see General Guidelines and
Principles below). If there is still no response, go to step 3. If you see
asterisks instead of the command you typed, this means that HCD-E1
requires you to enter a password. Press <CR> and type in the node
number followed by the password. If you don’t know the password, set
the PASSWD section of switch S1 to ON, to enforce the default
password ‘HCD’. This action enforces the default (0) node number, and
you can enter the ‘HCD’ password without any node number prefix.
Now, you will receive the HCD-E1 working prompt and be able to start
the session.
2.
Set the PASSWD section of S1 to ON, to enforce the default (0) node
number. Enter <CR>. If there is still no response, go to step 3. If the
prompt you see is ‘PASSWORD’, enter ‘HCD’ to see the working
prompt.
3.
Set the DEF SP section of S1 to ON. If there is still no response, return
to step 1 or 2, depending on whether you know the node number.
Note that this time password protection is disabled.
After successfully starting the management session, use the command
DEF TERM 'terminal_type' to select the terminal type, if needed.
'terminal_type' stands for one of the following types: VT-52, VT-100,
TV-920, FREEDOM-100, or FREEDOM-220. If your terminal requires control
sequences differing from those used by the terminals listed above, type the
command F and enter your terminal control sequences.
If the current control codes are not compatible with your terminal and you
cannot enter the desired codes, enter the INIT F command to reset the
codes to 0, and then use the F command to modify the control codes
starting from the known field values.
Working with
Time Slots
This section provides instructions for performing time slot configuration
from the supervisory terminal.
Reassigning All Time Slots between Data Channels/Sublink
If you want to reassign all timeslots from one data channel/sublink to
another data channel/sublink, you must close the data channel/sublink (free
all timeslots assigned to it), and then assign the time slots to another data
channel/sublink.
4-6
1.
Check the current time slot allocation by entering the DSP TS
command.
2.
If the data channel/sublink, which you want to close serves as master or
fallback clock source, you must select a different timing reference first.
Use the DEF SYS command to set temporarily the CLK MASTER to INT
and CLK FBACK to NONE.
3.
Deactivate all loopback tests. To do this, use the CLR TST command.
Starting a Supervision Terminal Management Session
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Note
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
4.
To close a data channel, use the DEF CH X command and set the
SPEED parameter to NC.
5.
To close the sublink, use the DEF SL command and set the
NUM_OF_TS parameter to NC.
6.
To reassign the closed time slots to the sublink, use the DEF SL
command and assign the time slots to the sublink.
7.
To reassign the closed time slots to a channel, use the DEF CH X
command and assign the time slots to the channel.
You must assign at least one timeslot to the data channel or sublink, which
you select as master or fallback clock source.
Reconfiguring Individual Time Slots
To reconfigure individual time slots, follow the steps below:
1.
Deactivate all loopback tests. To do this, use the CLR TST command.
2.
To reassign time slots currently assigned to a data channel, use the
DEF CH X command. To reassign time slots currently assigned to the
sublink, use the DEF SL command. Set each time slot you want to
reassign to NC.
3.
To assign closed time slots to a data channel, use the DEF CH X
command. Set each time slot you want to assign to DATA.
4.
To assign closed time slots to the sublink, use the DEF SL command. Set
each time slot you want to assign as desired.
Replacing a Time Slot Used for In-band Management
Before selecting a new time slot for the main link in-band management, you
must close the current dedicated time slot.
1.
Close the time slot used for the in-band management with the DEF DL
command.
Wait 20 seconds (40 seconds if H-RPT is installed in the HDSL link).
Note
Make sure that the time slot, which you intend to use for the in-band
management is not assigned to a data channel or sublink.
2.
Assign the desired time slot to the in-band management, using the DEF
DL command.
4.4 HCD-E1 Control Language
This section presents the HCD-E1 control language syntax, its usage, and set
of commands.
General
Guidelines and
Principles
11/01/00 19:23
Following are general guidelines you have to be familiar with when working
with HCD-E1 commands:
HCD-E1 Control Language
4-7
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
4-8
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
•
Commands can be entered only when the HCD-E1 control port working
prompt is displayed. The prompt is HCD>, and it always appears at the
beginning of a new line. The cursor appears to the right of the prompt.
•
Commands are case-insensitive, that is, you can type commands in either
lowercase or uppercase letters.
•
To correct typing errors, press the BACKSPACE key until the error is
cleared, and then type the correct command.
•
Use space as a separator between command fields and/or parameters.
•
Commands must end with a carriage return <CR>.
•
To cancel the current command, press CTRL-C. You will obtain the
HCD-E1 prompt again.
•
If AUTOBAUD is on, start any session by pressing the <CR> key three
times in sequence. This will ensure identification of terminal data rate.
•
At the start of a session, when password protection is on, the prompt
HCD-E1 displays is PASSWORD. This means that HCD-E1 is waiting for
the password before continuing. When you start entering the password,
HCD-E1 responds to your input with asterisks. After the correct password
is received, HCD-E1 sends the working prompt.
•
After the working prompt is displayed, the user can enter the desired
command. Full duplex communication with the terminal is necessary.
•
When HCD-E1 uses a non-zero node number, prefix any command
with: NODE<SP>'node number'<SP>, where 'node number' is the
three-digit node number. No response will occur until the node number
is received and acknowledged by the addressed HCD-E1.
Acknowledgment is indicated by the echoing of the node number part,
i.e. Node<SP>nnn<SP>, where <SP> stands for space.
−
At the start of a session, when password protection is on, you must
enter the password after the node number. After the correct password
is received, HCD-E1 sends the working prompt.
−
If password protection is off, this step is omitted and the working
prompt appears after the node number conditions are fulfilled.
•
The node number is in the range of 1 through 255 (0 indicates that the
selective addressing function is disabled). To set or change the node
number, use the DEF NODE command.
•
Command evaluation starts only when you press the <CR> key after the
last page of the data form.
HCD-E1 Control Language
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
•
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
In case a command is invalid, HCD-E1 does not execute it and displays
the following:
- ‘Bad command or parameter. Type 'h' for help’
if the command syntax is wrong
-
An appropriate error message (see Section 5.5 in Chapter 5) if the
command is not valid in the current system configuration or values
you are trying to set are wrong.
The correct command must then be sent again.
Command
Options
You can avoid the command execution by pressing CTRL-C. This will
result in the display of the HCD-E1 prompt, and a new command can be
entered. You can also use CTRL-C to stop the automatic repetition of
commands (/R option).
•
•
•
Use CTRL-A to browse among the last ten commands.
Use CTRL-D to repeat the last command.
If an idle disconnect time-out is specified, HCD-E1 automatically
disconnects the ongoing session if no command is received from the
terminal for the specified time-out interval.
The following general types of options are available with some commands
(see details in the command set index, Table 4-1).
*
Index of
Commands
•
Option
Meaning
Example of Usage
/A
All
CLR ALM /A
Clears all the alarms stored in the alarm buffer
/C
Clear
DSP ALM /C
Displays all the alarms stored in the alarm
buffer, and then clears all the ON-type
alarms* stored in the alarm buffer
/CA
Clear all
DSP ALM /CA
Displays all the alarms stored in the alarm
buffer, and then clears all the alarms stored in
the alarm buffer
/R
Repeat automatically
command execution
(available only when
node number is 0)
DSP ST LINE /R
Enables you to monitor the status of line 1
For explanation of the term see Section 5.2, Status Indications and Alarms, in
Chapter 5.
Table 4-1 lists the HCD-E1 commands in alphabetical order.
Table 4-1 HCD-E1 Command Set Index
Command
Purpose
Options
CLR ALM
Clear the alarms stored in the HCD-E1 alarm buffer
/A
CLR ALM REM
Clear the alarms stored in the remote unit alarm buffer
/A
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Control Language
4-9
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Table 4-1 HCD-E1 Command Set Index (Cont.)
Command
Purpose
Options
CLR ALM HRPT
Clear the ON-type alarms stored in the H-RPT alarm buffer
/A
CLR LOOP BERT CH X, or
CLR LP BERT CH X*
Deactivate the BERT test on data channel X of the remote unit
CLR LOOP INBAND CH X, Deactivate the in-band loopback on data channel X of HCD-E1
or CLR LP INBAND CH X*
CLR LOOP L HRPT, or
CLR LP L HRPT
Deactivate a local loop on H-RPT (only for HCD-E1 configured as
central)
CLR LOOP L LINE, or
CLR LP L LINE
Deactivate a local (L) loopback on the HDSL lines
CLR LOOP L CH X, or
CLR LP L CH X*
Deactivate the local (L) loopback on data channel X of local HCD-E1
CLR LOOP R CH X, or
CLR LP R CH X*
Deactivate the remote (R) loopback on data channel X of local
HCD-E1
CLR LOOP R R CH X, or
CLR LP R R CH X*
Deactivate the remote (R) loopback on data channel X of the remote
unit
CLR LOOP L SL, or
CLR LP L SL
Deactivate a local (L) loopback on the E1 sublink of the local HCD-E1
CLR LOOP R SL, or
CLR LP R SL
Deactivate the remote (R) loopback on the E1 sublink of the local
HCD-E1
CLR LOOP R R SL, or
CLR LP R R SL
Deactivate a remote (R) loopback on the E1 sublink of the remote
unit
CLR TST
Clear all the user-initiated tests and loopbacks
DATE
Set the internal date for HCD-E1
DEF AGENT
Define the parameters of the internal SNMP agent of HCD-E1
DEF BERT CH 1
DEF BERT CH 2
Define the type of test sequence, set the error injection rate to be
used for BER testing on the corresponding channel, and control the
receipt of the activation pattern for the in-band loopback initiation.
DEF CH 1
DEF CH 2
Configure the parameters of the corresponding channel
DEF DL
Define the E1 sublink and main link in-band management
parameters
DEF NAME
Define the logical name of HCD-E1
DEF NODE
Define the node number of HCD-E1
DEF PB
Define the time slot mapping of priority bumping
DEF PWD
Define a password
DEF SL
Define E1 sublink parameters
DEF SP
Define control port parameters
DEF SYS
Define system parameters
DEF TERM
Reset the terminal control codes to 0
4-10
HCD-E1 Control Language
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Table 4-1 HCD-E1 Command Set Index (Cont.)
Command
Purpose
DEF PWD
Define a password
DEF SL
Define E1 sublink parameters
DEF SP
Define control port parameters
DEF SYS
Define system parameters
DEF TERM
Reset the terminal control codes to 0
DEF TERM VT100
DEF TERM TV920
DEF TERM VT52
DEF TERM FREEDOM100
DEF TERM FREEDOM220
Select the control codes for one of the standard terminal types
DSP ALM
Display the contents of the local unit alarm buffer, and optionally
clear the buffer
/C
/CA
DSP ALM HRPT
Display the contents of the H-RPT alarm buffer, and optionally clear
the buffer
/C
/CA
DSP ALM REM
Display the contents of the remote unit alarm buffer, and optionally
clear the buffer
/C
/CA
DSP BERT CH1
DSP BERT CH2
Display the results of the last BER measurement made on the
corresponding channel
/R /C /I /S
DSP HDR TST
Display hardware faults detected during the power-on self-test and
during normal operation
DSP HDSL PM LPX
Display the contents of the performance monitoring registers of a
selected HDSL line (X stands for the line number, 1 or 2) of the local
HCD-E1, and optionally clear these registers
DSP PB
Display time slot mapping of priority bumping
DSP REM AGENT
Display information on the remote SNMP agents handled by the
HCD-E1 IP router
DSP R HDR TST
Display hardware faults detected at the remote unit (during the
power-on self-test and during normal operation)
DSP R HDSL PM LPX
Display the contents of the performance monitoring registers of the
remote unit for a selected HDSL line (X stands for the HDSL line
number, 1 or 2), and optionally clear these registers
/CA
DSP R SL PM
Display the contents of the sublink performance monitoring registers
of the remote unit and optionally clear the registers
/C
/CA
DSP SL PM
Display the contents of the sublink performance monitoring registers
of the local unit, and optionally clear these registers
/C
/CA
DSP ST CH1
DSP ST CH2
Display status information on the corresponding channel
DSP ST LINE X
Display status information on the HDSL lines (X stands for the HDSL
line number, 1 or 2), optionally repeat automatically
11/01/00 19:23
Options
HCD-E1 Control Language
/CA
/R
4-11
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Table 4-1 HCD-E1 Command Set Index (Cont.)
Command
Purpose
Options
DSP ST SL
Display status information on the E1 sublink, and the contents of the
sublink BPV counters (when CRC-4 function is off), and optionally
clear these counters or repeat automatically
/R
/C
DSP ST SYS
Display system status information (node name and number, software
and hardware versions, clock source, central/remote mode, type of
remote unit, types of data channel interfaces). Also displays the
presence of H-RPT on the HDSL link and its software and hardware
versions.
DSP TS
Display the allocation of the time slots of the HDSL signal
EXIT
End the current control session
F
Select the codes for the “clear the screen”, “cursor right”, and “cursor
home” commands sent to the supervision terminal
H
Display a concise index of commands and option switches
INIT DB
Reload the database with the default parameters instead of the
user-configured parameters. Table 4-2 lists default parameter values
INIT F
Reset the codes for “clear the screen”, “cursor right”, and “cursor
home” to 0
LOOP BERT CH X, or
LP BERT CH X*
Activate the BER test on data channel X of the remote unit
LOOP INBAND CH X, or
LP INBAND CH X*
Activate the in-band loopback on data channel X of the remote unit
LOOP L HRPT, or
LP L HRPT
Activate a local loop on H-RPT (only for HCD-E1 configured as central)
LOOP L LINE, or
LP L LINE
Activate a local (L) loopback on the HDSL line
LOOP L CH X, or
LP L CH X*
Activate the local (L) loopback on data channel X of local HCD-E1
LOOP R CH X, or
LP R CH X*
Activate the remote (R) loopback on data channel X of local HCD-E1
LOOP R R CH X, or
LP R R CH X*
Activate the remote (R) loopback on data channel X of remote
HCD-E1
LOOP L SL, or
LP L SL
Activate a local (L) loopback on the E1 sublink of the local HCD-E1
LOOP R SL, or
LP R SL
Activate the remote (R) loopback on the E1 sublink of the local
HCD-E1
LOOP R R SL, or
LP R R SL
Activate a remote (R) loopback on the E1 sublink of the remote
HCD-E1
RESET
Reset the HCD-E1 system
TIME
Set the internal time of HCD-E1
*CH X stands for CH 1 (data channel 1) or CH 2 (data channel 2); X stands
for 1 or 2.
4-12
HCD-E1 Control Language
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
4.5 HCD-E1 Command Set Description
This section describes the HCD-E1 commands. The commands are listed in
alphabetical order. The description includes command format, use, and
options.
The following notational conventions are used below:
[]
Square brackets indicate optional entry/parameter
''
Single quotes delimit user entry
<CR>
Indicates the pressing of the carriage return (Enter) key
LPX
Identifies the HDSL line (LP1 for line 1, LP2 for line 2)
X
Identifies the HDSL line (1 for line 1, 2 for line 2)
or the channel (1 for channel 1, 2 for channel 2)
Purpose
CLR ALM
Clear the alarm buffer.
Syntax
CLR ALM [/A]
Use
•
To clear only alarms of the ON type stored in the alarm buffer
(see Table 5-1), type:
CLR ALM<CR>
Note
CLR ALM command does not remove ON-type alarms from the alarm buffer,
it just turns them off. The ALM LED on the front panel still remains lit, and
you are able to see these alarms on the LCD and on the terminal.
•
To clear all the alarm messages stored in the alarm buffer (including the
history of ON/OFF-type alarms) and remove them from the alarm buffer,
type:
CLR ALM/A<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time, followed
by the HCD-E1 prompt. If the /A option was used and no alarm condition is
present at the moment, the ALM LED goes off.
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-13
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
CLR ALM REM
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Purpose
Clear the remote unit alarm buffer.
Syntax
CLR ALM REM [/A]
Use
•
To clear only alarms of the ON type stored in the alarm buffer of the
remote unit (see Table 5-1), type:
CLR ALM REM<CR>
Note
CLR ALM command does not remove ON-type alarms from the alarm buffer,
it just turns them off. The ALM LED on the front panel still remains lit, and
you are able to see these alarms on the LCD and on the terminal.
•
To clear all the alarms stored in the alarm buffer of the remote unit
(including the history of ON/OFF-type alarms) and remove them from the
alarm buffer, type:
CLR ALM REM/A<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time , followed
by the HCD-E1 prompt. If the /A option was used and no alarm condition is
present at the moment, the ALM LED goes off.
CLR ALM HRPT
Purpose
Clear the H-RPT alarm buffer.
Syntax
CLR ALM HRPT [/A]
Use
•
To clear only alarms of the ON type (see Table 5-2) stored in the alarm
buffer of the H-RPT repeater, type:
CLR ALM HRPT<CR>
Note
CLR ALM command does not remove ON-type alarms from the alarm buffer,
it just turns them off. The ALM LED on the front panel still remains lit, and
you are able to see these alarms on the LCD and on the terminal.
•
To clear all the alarms stored in the alarm buffer of the H-RPT repeater
(including the history of ON/OFF-type alarms) and remove them from the
alarm buffer, type:
CLR ALM HRPT/A<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time , followed
by the HCD-E1 prompt.
4-14
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
CLR LOOP
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Purpose
Deactivate the specified user-initiated loopback or test.
Syntax
CLR LOOP [loop type], or CLR LP [loop type]
Use
•
To deactivate a local (L) loopback on the HDSL lines, type:
CLR LOOP L LINE<CR> or CLR LP L LINE<CR>*
•
To deactivate a local (L) loopback on the E1 sublink of the local HCD-E1,
type:
CLR LOOP L SL<CR> or CLR LP L SL<CR>
•
To deactivate the remote (R) loopback on the E1 sublink of the local
HCD-E1, type:
CLR LOOP R SL<CR> or CLR LP R SL<CR>
•
To deactivate a remote (R) loopback on the E1 sublink of the remote
unit, type:
CLR LOOP R R SL<CR> or CLR LP R R SL<CR>
•
To deactivate the local (L) loopback on data channel X of local HCD-E1,
type:
CLR LOOP L CH X<CR> or CLR LP L CH X<CR>
•
To deactivate the remote (R) loopback on data channel X of local
HCD-E1, type:
CLR LOOP R CH X<CR> or CLR LP R CH X<CR>
•
To deactivate the remote (R) loopback on data channel X of remote
HCD-E1, type:
CLR LOOP R R CH X<CR> or CLR LP R R CH X<CR>
•
To deactivate the BERT test on data channel X of HCD-E1, type:
CLR LOOP BERT CH X<CR> or CLR LP BERT CH X<CR>
•
To deactivate the in-band loopback on data channel X of the remote
unit, type:
CLR LOOP INBAND CH X<CR> or CLR LP INBAND CH X<CR>
•
To deactivate a local loopback on the H-RPT, type:
CLR LOOP L HRPT<CR> or CLR LP L HRPT<CR>*
* These commands are available only from the unit configured as central.
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time, followed
by the HCD-E1 prompt. The TST LED goes off, if there are no more tests
activated.
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-15
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Purpose
CLR TST
Deactivate all the user-initiated tests and loopbacks being activated from this
unit.
Syntax
CLR TST
Use
To deactivate all the user-initiated tests and loopbacks, type:
CLR TST<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time , followed
by the HCD-E1 prompt. The TST LED goes off.
Note
DATE
If no test or loopback is currently activated, HCD-E1 displays ERROR 02 on
the terminal.
Purpose
Set the date for the HCD-E1 internal real-time clock.
Syntax
DATE
Use
1.
Type:
DATE<CR>
HCD-E1 sends the entry line for the first parameter:
DAY
4-16
= 01
2.
If you do not want to change the current value of the parameter, press
<CR> to confirm it and continue to the next line, otherwise press F to
increase or B to decrease the displayed values, and then press <CR>
to confirm the selected value. HCD-E1 displays the entry line for the
next parameter.
3.
Repeat the procedure in step 2 to set the month. HCD-E1 displays the
entry line for the year.
4.
Type the four digits of the current year. HCD-E1 displays the entry line
for the week day.
5.
Repeat the procedure in step 2 to set the week day, and then press
<CR> to end.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
A typical display, as seen after all the parameters are selected, is shown
below:
DAY
= 01
MONTH
= 03
YEAR [4 CHARS]
= 1996
WEEK DAY
=FRI
Below HCD-E1 displays the date and time (note that the date has changed),
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
DEF AGENT
Purpose
Display and modify the current SNMP agent parameters. Refer to
Appendix A for additional explanations.
To enable SNMP and Telnet management, it is necessary to define all the
parameters.
Syntax
DEF AGENT
Use
1.
To define the SNMP agent parameters, type:
DEF AGENT<CR>
You will see the entry line for the first parameter,
TELNET_APATHY_TIME
10 MIN
2.
If you do not want to change the current value of the parameter, press
<CR> to confirm it and continue to the next line, otherwise type in the
new value and then press <CR>. HCD-E1 displays the entry line for
the next parameter.
3.
Repeat the procedure until all the parameters are defined, and then
press <CR> to end.
A typical display, as seen after all the parameters are selected, is shown
below:
IP ADDRESS IS:
=
192.114.029.233
READ COMMUNITY IS:
=
public
WRITE COMMUNITY IS:
=
private
TRAP COMMUNITY IS:
=
public
After performing the command, HCD-E1 displays the date and time,
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-17
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Display Fields
The agent parameters displayed on the data form, their range of values and
description of how to change them are as follows:
TELNET_APATHY_TIME
Press the F or B keys to select the time, in minutes,
after which a Telnet connection will be automatically
terminated if no incoming activity is detected.
The available values are 10MIN, 15MIN, and 20MIN.
Default is 10MIN.
Note
DEF BERT
IP ADDRESS
Type in the IP address assigned to the HCD-E1 SNMP
agent in the dotted-quad format (four three-digit
numbers in the range of 000 through 255, separated by
periods).
READ COMMUNITY
Type in the name of the SNMP community that has
read-only authorization (the HCD-E1 SNMP agent will
accept getRequest and getNextRequest commands only
from management stations using that community). You
may enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
WRITE COMMUNITY
Type in the name of the SNMP community that has
read-write authorization (the HCD-E1 SNMP agent will
also accept setRequest commands from management
stations using that community). You may enter up to 32
alphanumeric characters.
TRAP COMMUNITY
Type in the name of the SNMP community to which
the HCD-E1 SNMP agent will send traps. You may
enter up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
For explanation of the terms see Appendix A.
Purpose
Define the BERT test conditions.
Syntax
DEF BERT CH X
Use
1.
•
Type the following:
To define the BER test parameters for channel 1:
DEF BERT CH 1<CR>
•
To define the BER test parameters for channel 2:
DEF BERT CH 2<CR>
4-18
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HCD-E1 displays the BERT parameters data form:
PATTERN
ERROR_INJECTION_RATE
RX_INBAND
2E3-1
NO ERR
DISABLE
The functions of the fields are as follows:
PATTERN
Selects the test pattern. The available selections are the QRSS test pattern, and the following
pseudo-random sequences: 2E3-1, 2E4-1, 2E5-1, 2E6-1, 2E7-1, 511, 2E10-1, 2047, 2E15-1,
2E17-1, 2E18-1, 2E20-1, 2E21-1, 2E22-1, 2E23-1, 2E25-1, 2E28-1, 2E29-1, 2E31-1, 2E32-1.
ERROR_
INJECTION_
RATE
Enables the injection of a calibrated rate of errors in the transmitted test pattern.
The available selections are: 10E-1, 10E-2, 10E-3, 10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, 10E-7, NO ERR, or
SINGLE.
•
Select NO ERR to disable the injection of errors
•
Select SINGLE to enable the injection of single errors
•
Select 10E-1 to enable the injection of errors at a rate of 10E-1 (one error in every 10
test pattern bits), and same with 10E-2, 10E-3, 10E-4, 10E-5, 10E-6, up to 10E-7 (one
error in every 10 million test pattern bits).
See DSP BERT CH command below for the error injection procedure.
RX_INBAND
Controls the receipt of the in-band loopback activation pattern. The available selections are
ENABLE and DISABLE.
•
Select ENABLE to enable initiation of the in-band loopback upon receipt of the
activation pattern.
•
Select DISABLE to disable the in-band loopback activation pattern receipt.
2.
DEF CH
Move the cursor to the desired field using the spacebar, and change, if
necessary, using the F or B keys. After making the desired selections,
press <CR> to end. HCD-E1 displays the date and time, followed by
the HCD-E1 prompt.
Purpose
Define the data channel parameters of HCD-E1.
Syntax
DEF CH X
Use
1.
•
Define the channel parameters as follows:
To define channel 1 parameters, type:
DEF CH 1<CR>
•
To define channel 2 parameters, type:
DEF CH 2<CR>
HCD-E1 displays the first line of the channel parameters data form. A
typical form is shown below:
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-19
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
FRAME_MODE
MULTIPLIER
MAP_TYPE
SPEED
START_TS
CTS
FIFO_SIZE
FRAMED
64
USER
NC
N/A
ON
AUTO
2.
Change the desired parameters (using spacebar to move between them
and pressing F or B to increase or decrease their value) and press<CR>
to move to the next line. HCD-E1 displays the second line of the
channel parameters data form. A typical form is shown below:
CLOCK_MODE
ETHERNET_MODE
DCE
Note
N/A
BRIDGING
N/A
If the FRAME_MODE field shows N/A, it means that the sublink or the other
channel is in UNFRAMED mode and all the 32 HDSL timeslots are assigned to
it.
The following table lists the available user port configuration parameters and
their functions. The table also lists the parameter values included in the
default configuration of the channel. For configuration guidelines, refer to
Table 3-5 in Chapter 3.
Designation
Function
Values
FRAME_MODE
Selects a framed or unframed
mode of HDSL framer
FRAMED
HDSL framer is in the framed mode
UNFRAMED
Allows transfer of unframed 2048 kbps
data streams, if you have an E1 port at the
far end of the HDSL link
Default:
FRAMED
Note: It is recommended to select FRAMED unless your application does not explicitly need the unframed mode.
MULTIPLIER
Selects the basic data rate per
HDSL timeslot
64K
56K
Basic data rate is 64 kbps
Basic data rate is 56 kbps
Default: 64
MAP_TYPE
Selects the time slot allocation
method used for mapping user's
data into the time slots of the
HDSL signal
USER
SEQ
ALT
Free user selection of time slots
Sequential allocation of time slots, starting
from a user-specified slot (defined under
START_TS).
Alternate allocation of time slots. This selection
means that starting from a specified slot, the slot
allocation, defined under START_TS, looks like
this: DATA NC DATA NC DATA, etc.
Default: USER
SPEED
4-20
Selects the channel payload
data rate.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
Available data rates are multiples of the basic rate (56 or
64 kbps). The multiples are in the range of 1 to 32,
resulting in rates of 56, 112, ..., 1736 kbps or 64, 128, 192,
..., 1984 kbps, respectively. When working in UNFRAMED
mode, the data rate must be 1792 or 2048 kbps for basic
rates 56 kbps or 64 kbps, respectively.
Default:
NC
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Designation
Function
Values
START_TS
Selects the starting time slot for SEQ
or ALT time slot allocation
Any number in the range of 0 to 31, consistent with the
desired number of user time slots. The sum of the
START_TS and of the SPEED divided by MULTIPLIER must
not exceed 32.
CTS
Selects the state of the CTS line in
the data channel.
For a channel with Ethernet
interface, this field always shows
N/A, and cannot be changed
Default: N/A
ON
CTS continuously on
=RTS CTS line follows the RTS line
N/A
Not applicable
Default: ON
FIFO_SIZE
Selects the FIFO buffer size of the
AUTO
Automatic size selection.
data channel. This parameter is
32, 60, 104,144 Buffer size in bits (corresponds to
used in the DTE2 mode. In the
FIFO lengths of ±16, ±30, ±52, and
other modes, HCD-E1 sets the
±72 bits).
buffer size automatically. The
AUTO values are listed in Table 1-1. Default:
AUTO
CLOCK_
MODE
Selects the clocking mode of the
given data channel.
DCE
The data channel provides both transmit and
receive clocks to the DTE connected to it.
DTE1
The data channel provides the receive clock to
the DTE connected to it while receiving the
transmit clock from it.
DTE2 The data channel receives both the transmit and
receive clocks from the DCE connected to it.
Default: DCE
ETHERNET_
MODE
Selects the Ethernet LAN traffic
HALF_DUP Half duplex operation
transfer mode. For a channel with
FULL_DUP Full duplex operation
serial data interface, this field always N/A
Not applicable
shows N/A, and cannot be changed
Default: HALF_DUP
BRIDGING
Reserved for future use.
To select the Ethernet traffic control
function, use Ethernet bridge DIP
switch SW-1, section 3 (see
Appendix C).
3.
For a channel with serial data interface, this field always
shows N/A.
For a channel with Ethernet interface, this field must be
always set to FILTER, independently of the selected
Ethernet traffic control function.
Change the desired parameters (if needed) and press<CR>. HCD-E1
displays the first line of the time slot map of the channel currently being
configured. A typical display is shown below:
TS_0
TS_1
TS_2
...
TS_9
NC
DATA
NC
...
NC
If you have selected USER under MAP_TYPE, you will have to select the
time slot manually. To do this, proceed as follows:
4.
11/01/00 19:23
Use the spacebar to move between time slots. For each time slot, select
between DATA (time slot allocated to the channel) and NC (not
connected) by pressing F or B.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-21
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
5.
Note
After completing the first line, press <CR> to move to the next line.
Repeat the procedure until all the time slots are defined. When done,
press <CR> to finish. HCD-E1 displays the date and time, followed by
the HCD-E1 prompt.
Make sure that the basic rate (56 kbps or 64 kbps) multiplied by the number
of time slots you selected is equal to your SPEED selection.
Purpose
DEF DL
Define the in-band management communication parameters of HCD-E1.
Syntax
DEF DL
Use
1.
Type:
DEF DL<CR>
HCD-E1 displays the first line of the channel parameters data form. A
typical line is shown below:
ML_DL_MODE
ML_TS_NUM
ML_DL_SPEED
NONE
N/A
N/A
The available selections are as follows:
HCD-E1 does not use the main link to carry in-band
management traffic
DEDIC
HCD-E1 uses a user-selected time slot for in-band
management traffic over the main link.
2. Select the desired mode (and time slots under the ML_TS_NUM field in
the case you selected the DEDIC mode) and press<CR>. HCD-E1
displays the second line of the data form:
NONE
SL_DL_MODE
SL_TS_NUM
SL_DL_SPEED
NONE
N/A
N/A
The available selections are as follows:
NONE
TS0/F
DEDIC
3.
Note
HCD-E1 does not use the sublink to carry in-band
management traffic
HCD-E1 uses the Sa4 bit in time slot 0 for in-band
management traffic over the sublink
HCD-E1 uses a user-selected time slot for in-band
management traffic over the sublink.
Select the desired mode and the time slot. HCD-E1 performs the
command and displays the date and the time followed by the HCD-E1
prompt.
1. If you selected DEDIC in both ML_DL_MODE and SL_DL_MODE, make
sure that the slots you’ve selected in the ML_TS_NUM and SL_TS_NUM
fields are the same.
2. Parameters ML_DL_SPEED and SL_DL_SPEED are always N/A.
4-22
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
DEF NAME
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Purpose
Define the logical name (up to eight alphanumeric characters).
Syntax
DEF NAME
Use
1.
To define the HCD-E1 logical name, type:
DEF NAME<CR>
HCD-E1 displays the logical name entry form:
ENTER NODE NAME (MAX 8 CHARACTERS) =
2.
Type the desired name, and then press <CR>. HCD-E1 displays the
following line:
CURRENT NAME = 'name'
(where 'name' is the logical name HCD-E1 is currently assigned), and
then the date and time, followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Note
DEF NODE
If you want to store a logical name in the database, make sure that the DB
INIT section of the HCD-E1 internal switch S1 is set to OFF. Otherwise, the
default name (blank) is enforced.
Purpose
Define the node number, or address, of HCD-E1. The allowed range is
0 to 255.
Syntax
DEF NODE
Use
1.
Type:
DEF NODE<CR>
HCD-E1 displays the node entry form:
NODE (0 to 255) = 0
2. Type the desired number in the range of 0 to 255, and then press
<CR>. HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time,
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Note
11/01/00 19:23
If you want to store the user-selected node number, make sure that the
DB INIT section of the HCD-E1 internal switch S1 is set to OFF. To use the
user-selected node number, set the PASSWD section of S1 to OFF.
Otherwise, the default number (0) is enforced.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Purpose
DEF PB
Define each time slot priority (high or low). In case one of the HDSL lines is
down, time slots with high priority will still continue to be sent on the
remaining line.
Syntax
DEF PB
Use
1.
Type:
DEF PB<CR>
2.
Note
HCD-E1 displays the first line of the time slot map of the priority
bumping. A typical display is shown below:
TS_1
TS_2
...
...
TS_31
LOW
HIGH
...
...
LOW
3.
If you want to change the priorities, use the spacebar to move between
time slots. For each desired time slot, select between HIGH and LOW
by pressing F or B.
4.
After completing the first line, press <CR> to move to the next line.
Repeat the procedure until all the desired time slots are defined. When
done, press <CR> to finish. HCD-E1 displays the date and time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
1. The priority bumping will work in the framed mode only.
2. TS-0 has always HIGH priority. The maximum number of other time slots
that can be configured to high priority is 16.
DEF PWD
Purpose
Define a new user password for the HCD-E1 system. The password must
have 4 to 8 characters.
Syntax
DEF PWD
Use
1.
Type:
DEF PWD<CR>
The following password entry screen appears:
NEW PASSWORD (4 to 8 CHARS) =
4-24
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
2.
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Type the required password. Carefully check that the specified
password has been indeed typed in, and then press <CR>. HCD-E1
displays the next line:
CURRENT PASSWORD = 'password'
where 'password' is the current password, and then the date and time,
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Note
If you want to store the user-selected password, make sure that the DB INIT
section of the HCD-E1 internal switch S1 is set to OFF. To use the
user-selected password, set the PASSWD section of S1 to OFF. Otherwise, the
default password (HCD) is enforced.
Purpose
DEF SL
Select the sublink parameters of the HCD-E1
Syntax
DEF SL
Use
1.
To define the sublink parameters, type:
DEF SL<CR>
HCD-E1 displays the first line of the sublink parameters data form. For
explanation of parameters and configuration guidelines, refer to
Table 3-3 in Chapter 3. A typical display is shown below:
FRAME
CRC-4
SYNC
MAP_TYPE
START_TS
NUM_OF_TS
IDLE_TS_CODE
G732N
NO
CCITT
USER
N/A
NC
FF
Note
11/01/00 19:23
If the FRAME field shows N/A, it means that one of the channels is in
UNFRAMED mode and all the 32 HDSL timeslots are assigned to it.
2.
Change the parameter values using the spacebar to move between the
fields and pressing F or B to scroll among the available selections.
3.
After the desired parameter values are selected, press <CR>. HCD-E1
displays the second line of the data form:
TS_0
TS_1
TS_2
...
TS_9
NC
NC
DATA
...
NC
4.
Use the spacebar to move between time slots. For each time slot, select
between DATA (time slot allocated to the current channel) and NC (not
connected) by pressing F or B.
5.
After completing the first line of time slots, press <CR> to move to the
next line. Repeat the procedure until all the time slots are defined.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-25
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
6.
Note
When done, press <CR> to finish. HCD-E1 displays the date and time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
1. You will have to perform steps 3 and 4 only in the case you have selected
USER in the MAP_TYPE field. Otherwise HCD-E1 selects the time slots
automatically.
2. If you have selected SEQ, make sure that the sum of START_TS and
NUM_OF_TS does not exceed 32.
3. If you have selected ALT, make sure that
NUM_OF_TS*2 + START_TS ≤ 31.
DEF SP
Purpose
Define the control port parameters. See Section 3-4 for parameters
description and practical guidelines on their selection.
Syntax
DEF SP
Use
1.
Type:
DEF SP<CR>
2.
The first page of the control port parameters data form is displayed. A
typical form is shown below. The form presents the current parameter
values as defaults.
SPEED
DATA
PARITY
INTERFACE
CTS
DCD_DEL
DSR
AUTO
8
NO
DCE
=RTS
0 MS
ON
3.
Change the parameter values, using the spacebar to move between the
fields and pressing F or B to scroll among the available selections.
4.
When done, press <CR> to display the next page of control port
parameters. A typical form is shown below.
5.
POP_ALM
PWD
LOG_OFF
AUXILIARY DEVICE
NO
NO
NO
TERMINAL
Repeat the procedure given in step 3 above to select new parameter
values.
After the desired parameter values are selected, press <CR> to end.
HCD-E1 displays the date and time, followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Parameters Programmable from the Terminal
In addition to the parameters listed in Section 3-4, the following parameters
can be programmed from the terminal only.
4-26
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Password protection:
PWD
YES
Password protection is enabled.
NO
Password protection is disabled.
Idle disconnect time:
LOG_OFF
NO
Automatic session disconnection disabled.
10_MIN Automatic disconnection after ten minutes if HCD-E1 receives no input.
Determines CTS state:
CTS
ON
The CTS line is always ON (active).
=RTS
The CTS line follows the RTS line.
DCD_DEL
With the HCD-E1 control port defined as DTE, indicates the delay (in msec) between DCD=ON
and the sending of data.
Values: 0, 10, 50, 100, 200, 300 msec.
POP_ALM
Controls the automatic display of alarms on the terminal:
YES
The terminal automatically displays the alarm status whenever an ON-type alarm
appears or an ON/OFF-type alarm changes its state to ON (for the term definition, see
Section 5.2 in Chapter 5). If no such event occurs, HCD-E1 displays the alarm status
every 10 minutes.
NO
The automatic display feature is disabled.
Determines the DSR state:
DSR
ON
The DSR line is continuously ON. It will switch to OFF for five seconds after the DTR line
is switched OFF.
DTR
The DSR line tracks the DTR line. When INTERFACE=DTE, the DSR line will switch to
ON for five seconds when the RI line is ON while the DTR line is OFF.
Selects the management mode supported by the HCD-E1 control port:
AUXILIARY
DEVICE
TERMINAL
Management by means of a supervision terminal.
NMS-SLIP
Management by means of Telnet host or an SNMP network management station.
NONE
Not in use
Note
11/01/00 19:23
In order for HCD-E1 to use the selected parameters, verify that Section 3 DEF SP and Section 2 - DB INIT of Switch S1 (see “Setting the Internal
Jumpers and Switches” in Chapter 2) is in the OFF state (factory setting).
Otherwise, HCD-E1 will use the default parameters.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-27
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Purpose
DEF SYS
Assign values to system parameters.
Syntax
DEF SYS
Use
1.
Type:
DEF SYS<CR>
HCD-E1 displays the system parameters data form, which presents the
current parameter values as defaults. A typical form is shown below.
CLK_MASTER
CLK_FBACK
CONFIG_REM
INT
NONE
YES
For description of the CLK_MASTER, CLK_FBACK and CONFIG_REM
parameters, see Table 3-2 in Section 3-4.
Note
DEF TERM
This command makes sense only for HCD-E1 configured as a central unit
(LTU). HCD-E1 configured as remote will display N/A instead of parameter
values.
2.
Bring the cursor to the first field and, if desired, change the parameter
value by pressing F or B to scroll among the available selections.
3.
Using spacebar, move to the second parameter and perform the above
procedure.
4.
After the desired value is selected, press <CR> to end. HCD-E1
displays the date and time, followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Purpose
Define the control sequences to be sent to the supervision terminal to
perform the following terminal control functions:
•
Clear the screen.
•
Move the cursor to the screen home position.
•
Move the cursor to the right by one position.
This command is similar to the F command (see below), except that it also
enables you to specify a terminal type so that HCD-E1 will automatically
configure itself for using the corresponding control sequences. The terminal
types supported by this command are: VT-52, VT-100, TV-920,
FREEDOM-100, FREEDOM-220, and terminals compatible with one of
them.
4-28
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
The codes used by the supported terminals are listed in the following table:
Function
Terminal Type
TV920
VT52
VT100
Freedom100
Freedom220
Clear Screen
1B2A0000
N/A
1B5B324A
1B2A0000
1B5B324A
Cursor Home
1E000000
1B480000
1B5B4800
1E000000
1B5B4800
Cursor Right
0C000000
1B430000
1B5B3143
0C000000
1B5B0143
Syntax
DEF TERM ‘terminal’
Use
To configure HCD-E1 for using the control sequences corresponding to a
supported terminal, type:
DEF TERM 'terminal'<CR>
where 'terminal' stands for one of the types listed in the table above.
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and the time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Note
DSP ALM
If you enter DEF TERM (without the terminal type), HCD-E1 will reset to 0 all
the three codes.
Purpose
Display the contents of the local unit alarm buffer. This buffer can contain
up to 100 alarms.
Syntax
DSP ALM[Option]
Use
•
To display the complete contents of the buffer, type:
DSP ALM<CR>
•
*To display the complete buffer contents and then clear the ON-type
alarms, type:
DSP ALM/C<CR>
•
*To display the complete buffer and then clear all the stored alarms,
type:
DSP ALM/CA<CR>
* See the description of CLR ALM command earlier in this chapter for
explanation of what the “clear” action means.
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-29
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Display Format
The contents of the alarm buffer are displayed as a table with four columns:
alarm number, alarm syntax (description), alarm state, and date & time of
alarm occurrence. Each block of alarms received from HCD-E1 is preceded
by a header. The header lists the assigned logical name and the node
number of the HCD-E1 unit which sent the alarm block, and thus it serves
as an easily-identified separator between alarms transmitted by different
HCD-E1 units.
In the end, HCD-E1 displays the date and time, followed by the HCD-E1
prompt.
Table 5-1 in Chapter 5 lists all the HCD-E1 alarm messages in alphabetical
order and corrective actions that you can undertake to fix the problem.
DSP ALM HRPT
Purpose
Display the contents of the alarm buffer of the H-RPT repeater located on
the HDSL link. This buffer can contain up to 100 alarms.
Syntax
DSP ALM HRPT
Use
•
To display the complete contents of the H-RPT buffer, type:
DSP ALM HRPT<CR>
•
*To display the complete H-RPT buffer contents and then clear the
ON-type alarms, type:
DSP ALM HRPT/C<CR>
•
*To display the complete H-RPT buffer contents and then clear all the
stored alarms, type:
DSP ALM HRPT/CA<CR>
*See the description of CLR ALM command earlier in this chapter for
explanation of what the “clear” action means.
The format of the H-RPT alarm buffer display is similar to the format for the
local alarm buffer, described in the DSP ALM section above.
4-30
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
DSP ALM REM
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Purpose
Display the contents of the alarm buffer of the appliance located at the
remote end of the HDSL link. This buffer can contain up to 100 alarms.
Syntax
DSP ALM REM[Option]
Use
•
To display the complete contents of the remote buffer, type:
DSP ALM REM<CR>
•
*To display the complete buffer contents and then clear the ON-type
alarms, type:
DSP ALM REM/C<CR>
•
*To display the complete buffer and then clear all the stored alarms,
type:
DSP ALM REM/CA<CR>
*See the description of CLR ALM command earlier in this chapter for
explanation of what the “clear” action means.
The format of the remote alarm buffer display is similar to the format for the
local alarm buffer, described in the DSP ALM section above.
DSP BERT CH
Purpose
Display the results of an on-going bit error ratio measurement on the desired
channel.
When monitoring the BER results, you may also start and stop error
injection, and restart the error count by clearing the accumulated error
results. Note that monitoring is not possible when using Telnet.
The error injection rate is defined by means of the DEF BERT command (see
earlier in this chapter).
Syntax
DSP BERT CH X
Use
•
To display the current results of a BER test on channel 1, type:
DSP BERT CH 1<CR>
•
To display the current results of a BER test on channel 2, type:
DSP BERT CH 2<CR>
Note
11/01/00 19:23
These commands are valid only when the BERT test (LOOP BERT) is active on
the specified channel, otherwise HCD-E1 displays ERROR 26.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-31
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
•
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
To display the current results of a BER test and then reset the error count,
type:
DSP BERT CH 1 /C<CR>
or
DSP BERT CH 2 /C<CR>
•
To monitor the results of a BERT test, type:
DSP BERT CH 1 /R<CR>
or
DSP BERT CH 2 /R<CR>
In this case, you will see the commands you can use while monitoring the
BER test results, and the line of the BER results themselves.
PRESS I FOR ERROR INJECT
PRESS S FOR STOP ERROR INJECT
PRESS C TO CLEAR ERROR BITS
To inject errors, act as follows:
1. To inject errors at the rate you have selected with the DEF BERT
command, type I.
2. To resume error injection, type S and then I. To clear error bits, type C.
To stop the monitoring and obtain again the command prompt, press
CTRL+C.
If you are using Telnet, it is impossible to monitor the results. In this case,
use the following commands (available from the supervisory port as well).
•
To display the results and start the injection of errors, type:
DSP BERT CH 1 /I<CR>
or
DSP BERT CH 2 /I<CR>
•
To display the results and then stop the injection of errors, type:
DSP BERT CH 1 /S<CR>
or
DSP BERT CH 2 /S<CR>
•
To display the results and clear error bits, type:
DSP BERT CH 1 /C<CR>
or
DSP BERT CH 2 /C<CR>
Display Format
The BER test results displayed on the screen are valid for the instant when
the display command has been issued (or for the last time the counters have
been cleared, whichever occurred last). When the /R option is used, the
results are periodically updated.
4-32
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
The results are presented in the following format:
ERROR_BITS
RUN_
TIME
(SEC)
ERRORS
(SEC)
SYNC_
LOSS
(SEC)
ERROR_INJECT
0
100
0
0
OFF
The display fields are as follows:
Note
DSP HDR TST
ERROR_BITS
Total number of bit errors detected.
RUN_TIME (SEC)
Total time the test is running.
ERRORS (SEC)
Total number of seconds in which errors have been detected.
SYNC_LOSS (SEC)
Total number of seconds in which loss of pattern occurred.
ERROR_INJECT
Indicates whether errors are injected (ON) or not (OFF).
All the counters have a range of 0 through 65535. When the maximum value
is reached, the counter freezes, therefore in general the value of 65535
indicates that the counter has overflown.
Purpose
Display the results of the last hardware test of the local HCD-E1. The results
show the status detected during the power-on self-test, and any faults
detected during regular operation.
Syntax
DSP HDR TST
Use
To display the local unit hardware test report, type
DSP HDR TST<CR>
Display Format
The display shows NO HARDWARE FAILURE if everything checks good, or
displays the appropriate message from the following list:
•
EPROM FAILURE
•
I/O EXP. FAILURE
•
HDSL FRAMER FAILURE
•
TRANSCEIVER FAILURE
After the message HCD-E1 displays the date and time, followed by the
HCD-E1 prompt.
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-33
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
DSP HDSL PM
Purpose
Display the contents of performance monitoring registers of a selected HDSL
line of the local HCD-E1. For an explanation of the HDSL performance
monitoring registers, refer to Section 5-3.
Syntax
DSP HDSL PM [LPX] [Option]
Use
1.
•
To display the performance monitoring registers of the local unit, act as
follows:
To display the performance monitoring registers of HDSL line 1, type:
DSP HDSL PM LP1<CR>
•
or
DSP HDSL PM<CR>
To display the performance monitoring registers of HDSL line 2, type:
DSP HDSL PM LP2<CR>
•
To display current values of the performance monitoring registers of the
HDSL line 1, and then clear all these registers and restart the count
intervals, type:
DSP HDSL PM LP1/CA<CR>
•
or
DSP HDSL PM<CR>/CA
To display current values of the local performance monitoring registers of
the HDSL line 2, and then clear all these registers and restart the count
intervals, type:
DSP HDSL PM LP2/CA<CR>
A typical display is shown below:
PM HDSL LINE
-
1
CURRENT ES
= 0
CURRENT UAS
= 0
CURRENT SES
= 0
CURRENT BBE
= 0
CURRENT TIMER
= 388
For the description and allowed range of the parameters, see HDSL
Performance Monitoring in Section 5.3.
2.
Note
4-34
Press any key to see the next screen:
HCD-E1 displays this screen only if HCD-E1 has been working over
15 minutes after power-up.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
INTERVAL 01 ES = 000 UAS = 000 SES = 000 BBE = 000
ESR = 00.00% SESR = 00.00% BBER = 00.00%
INTERVAL 02 ES = 000 UAS = 000 SES = 000 BBE = 000
ESR = 00.00% SESR = 00.00% BBER = 00.00%
INTERVAL 03 ES = 000 UAS = 000 SES = 000 BBE = 000
ESR = 00.00% SESR = 00.00% BBER = 00.00%
INTERVAL 04 ES = 000 UAS = 025 SES = 026 BBE = 001
ESR = 00.00% SESR = 02.88% BBER = 00.11%
24 HOUR ES
=
0
24 HOUR UAS
=
25
24 HOUR SES
=
26
24 HOUR BBE
=
1
24 INTERVAL
=
04
Purpose
DSP PB
Display the priority bumping of time slots selected by the user.
Syntax
DSP PB <CR>
Use
To display the priority bumping of time slots, type:
DSP PB<CR>
A typical display is shown below:
TIME SLOT MAPPING OF PRIORITY BUMPING
=====================================
TS:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PRIORITY:
HIGH
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
TS:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
PRIORITY:
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
TS:
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
PRIORITY:
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
LOW
TS:
30
31
TYPE:
LOW
LOW
Note
11/01/00 19:23
This command would show correct information only when one of the lines is
down
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-35
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
DSP R HDR TST
Purpose
Display the results of the last hardware test performed by the unit located at
the remote end of the HDSL link (during power-on self-test or regular
operation).
Syntax
DSP R HDR TST
Use
To display the hardware test report, type
•
DSP R HDR TST<CR>
Display Format
The display shows NO HARDWARE FAILURE if everything checks good, or
displays the appropriate message from the following list:
•
EPROM FAILURE
•
I/O EXP. FAILURE
•
HDSL FRAMER FAILURE
•
TRANSCEIVER FAILURE
After the message, HCD-E1 displays the date and time, followed by the
HCD-E1 prompt.
DSP R HDSL PM
Purpose
Display the contents of the performance monitoring registers of the
appliance located at the remote end of the HDSL link.
For an explanation of the HDSL performance monitoring registers, refer to
Section 5-3.
Syntax
DSP R HDSL PM [LPX] [Option]
Use
•
To display the performance monitoring registers of HDSL line 1 of the
remote unit, type:
DSP R HDSL PM LP1<CR>
•
or
DSP R HDSL PM<CR>
To display the performance monitoring registers of HDSL line 2 of the
remote unit, type:
DSP R HDSL PM LP2<CR>
4-36
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
•
To display current values of the performance monitoring registers of the
HDSL line 1, and then clear all these registers and restart the count
intervals, type:
DSP R HDSL PM LP1/CA<CR>
•
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
or
DSP R HDSL PM/CA <CR>
To display current values of the performance monitoring registers of the
HDSL line 2, and then clear all these registers and restart the count
intervals, type:
DSP R HDSL PM LP2/CA<CR>
The format of the display is similar to the format for the performance
monitoring registers of the local unit, described in the DSP HDSL PM
section above.
DSP R SL PM
Purpose
Display the contents of the sublink performance monitoring registers of the
unit located at the remote end of the HDSL link. This option is available
only when the CRC-4 function is enabled on both sublinks: at the local and
the remote ends of the HDSL link (see DEF SL command).
For an explanation of the sublink performance monitoring registers, refer to
Section 5-3.
Syntax
DSP R SL PM [Option]
Use
•
To display the performance monitoring registers of the sublink of the
remote unit, type:
DSP R SL PM<CR>
•
To display current values of the performance monitoring registers of the
sublink of the remote unit, and then clear only the event register, type:
DSP R SL PM /C<CR>
•
To display current values of the performance monitoring registers of the
sublink of the remote unit, and then clear all these registers and restart
the count intervals, type:
DSP R SL PM /CA<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and the time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
The format of the display is similar to the format for the local unit
performance monitoring registers, described in the DSP SL PM section
below.
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-37
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Note
DSP REM AGENT
In case the CRC-4 function is disabled, HCD-E1 displays an error message:
ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT MODE. If the CRC-4 function is enabled
on the sublink of the local unit, but disabled at the remote end, HCD-E1 will
display meaningless information.
Purpose
Display information on the SNMP agents that are known to the IP router of
the HCD-E1 when SNMP management is enabled.
Note
For SNMP management to be enabled, the following conditions must be
satisfied:
1. The units must have different IP addresses and different MUX_NAME’s.
2. A dedicated slot must be assigned in both units.
Syntax
DSP REM AGENT
Use
•
To display the remote agent information, type:
DSP REM AGENT
If not all conditions listed above are fulfilled, HCD-E1 displays the following
message:
CAN NOT FIND REMOTE AGENT
Otherwise, HCD-E1 displays a table listing the remote agents. A typical
display is shown below:
IP ADDRESS
MUX NAME
DISTANCE
-------------------------------------192.114.50.2
192.114.50.3
RAD1
RAD2
006
012
The fields displayed for each agent are as follows:
4-38
IP ADDRESS
The IP address of the remote agent (see the DEF
AGENT command above).
MUX NAME
The logical name of the remote agent (see the DEF
NAME command above).
DISTANCE
The distance is a metric that indicates the logical
distance (through the management network) to the
remote agent, and is used, among other factors, in the
selection of the optimal route to be used by the
management traffic.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
The distance is assigned as follows:
•
Each segment between two IP routers is assigned a weight of 6. For
example, when the path to an agent passes two HCD-E1 with their
SNMP management enabled, the distance is 12.
When the management network includes one or more additional distinct
(alternate) paths between two IP routers that connect to the same remote
agent, each such path is assigned a weight of 7 (6 + 1), 8 (6 + 2), etc. per
segment. For example, if the route in the above example has an additional
path in parallel with one segment, the additional route to RAD2 has a
distance of 13; when additional paths are found in parallel with each
segment, the distances will be 13, 14, 15.
DSP SL PM
Purpose
Display the contents of the E1 sublink performance monitoring registers of
the local HCD-E1. This option is available only when the CRC-4 function is
enabled (see DEF SL command).
For an explanation of the user's port performance monitoring registers, refer
to Section 5-3.
Syntax
DSP SL PM [Option]
Use
1. To display the local performance monitoring registers, act as follows:
•
To display the performance monitoring registers of the local unit sublink,
type:
DSP SL PM<CR>
•
To display current values of the performance monitoring registers of the
local unit sublink, and then clear only the event register, type:
DSP SL PM /C<CR>
•
To display current values of the performance monitoring registers of the
local unit sublink, and then clear all these registers and restart the count
intervals, type:
DSP SL PM /CA<CR>
A typical display is shown below:
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-39
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
PM OF PORT
-
A
CRC ERROR EVENTS = 0
CRC AVG ERR EVENTS = 0
CURRENT ES
= 0
CURRENT UAS
= 0
CURRENT SES
= 0
CURRENT BES
= 0
CURRENT LOFC
= 0
CURRENT CSS
= 0
CURRENT TIMER
= 176
For the description and allowed range of the parameters, see E1
Performance Monitoring in Section 5.3.
2.
Note
Press any key to see the next screen:
HCD-E1 displays this screen only if it has been working over 15 minutes after
power-up.
INTERVAL 01 ES = 000 UAS = 000 BES = 000 SES = 000 LOFC = 000 CSS = 000
INTERVAL 02 ES = 000 UAS = 000 BES = 000 SES = 000 LOFC = 000 CSS = 000
INTERVAL 03 ES = 001 UAS = 034 BES = 000 SES = 044 LOFC = 001 CSS = 001
24 HOUR ES
= 1
24 HOUR UAS
= 34
24 HOUR SES
= 44
24 HOUR BES
= 0
24 HOUR LOFC
= 1
24 HOUR CSS
= 1
24 DEGRADE MIN = 0
LAST 24 DEGRADE MIN = 0
24 INTERVAL
Note
DSP ST CH
= 03
If the CRC-4 function is disabled, HCD-E1 displays an error message: ILLEGAL
COMMAND FOR CURRENT PORT MODE.
Purpose
Display status information for a specified channel.
Syntax
DSP ST CH X
4-40
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Use
•
To display the status information for a selected channel, type:
or DSP ST CH 2<CR>
DSP ST CH 1<CR>
A typical channel status display is shown below:
STATUS OF CH
-1
INTERFACE
RS530
LOOPS
TYPE =
=
REMOTE
REM
REM
LOCAL
BERT
T_
INBAND
R_
INBAND
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
PORT STATE = CONNECTED
RTS STATE
= OFF
Display Format
The fields included in the status information display are listed below:
LOCAL
Indicates the state of the local loopback:
•
•
REMOTE
YES - remote loopback is activated.
NO - remote remote loopback is deactivated.
YES - remote remote loopback is activated.
Indicates the state of the BER test:
•
•
NO - BER test is deactivated.
YES - BER test is activated.
T_INBAND
Displays YES to indicate that the user requested the
sending of the in-band remote loopback activation
sequence.
R_INBAND
Displays YES when a loopback has been connected as a
result of the reception of the in-band remote loopback
activation sequence.
PORT STATE
Displays whether the selected channel is connected to
another port:
•
•
RTS
CONNECTED - the channel is connected.
NOT CONNECTED - the channel is not connected.
Displays the state of the RTS line in the channel
connector:
•
•
11/01/00 19:23
NO - remote loopback is deactivated.
Indicates the state of the remote remote loopback:
•
•
BERT
YES - local loopback is activated.
Indicates the state of the remote loopback:
•
•
REM REM
NO - local loopback is deactivated.
OFF - the RTS line is not active.
ON - the RTS line is active.
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-41
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
DSP ST LINE
Purpose
Display status information on the HDSL lines.
Syntax
DSP ST LINE [Option]
Use
•
To display the current status information for HDSL line 1, type:
or
DSP ST LINE 1<CR>
DSP ST LINE<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
•
To monitor continuously line 1 status information, type:
DSP ST LINE 1/R<CR>
or
DSP ST LINE /R<CR>
The display will be automatically updated. To stop the monitoring,
press CTRL+C.
•
To display the current status information for HDSL line 2, type:
DSP ST LINE 2<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
•
To monitor continuously line 2 status information, type:
DSP ST LINE 2/R<CR>
The display will be automatically updated. To stop the monitoring,
press CTRL+C.
Display Format
A typical HDSL line status display is shown below.
STATUS OF LINE
LINE LOOP
=
1
LOCAL
=====
NO
LINE ALARMS
HRPT LOOP
4-42
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
=
=
SYNC LOSS
=========
SIGNAL LOSS
===========
OFF
OFF
NO
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
The fields included in the status information display are listed below:
LINE LOOP
Displays the state of the local line loop on the
corresponding HDSL line.
NO Local line loop is not activated
YES Local line loop is activated
LINE ALARMS
Displays the state of the line alarms on the corresponding
HDSL line:
SYNC LOSS
ON indicates loss of synchronization on the
corresponding HDSL line.
OFF indicates normal operation.
SIGNAL LOSS
ON indicates loss of input signal on the
corresponding HDSL line.
OFF indicates normal operation.
HRPT LOOP
Displays the state of the H-RPT loop towards the unit
configured as central (appears only if H-RPT is present on
the HDSL line).
NO H-RPT loop is not activated
YES H-RPT loop is activated
DSP ST SL
Purpose
Display status information on the local E1 sublink, and optionally clear the
BPV counters (applicable only when the CRC-4 function is disabled).
Syntax
DSP ST SL [Option]
Use
•
To display the current status information for the E1 sublink, type:
DSP ST SL
•
To display the status information, and then clear the BPV counters, type:
DSP ST SL /C<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and time followed by
the HCD-E1 prompt.
•
To monitor continuously the status information, type:
DSP ST SL /R<CR>
The display will be automatically updated. To stop the monitoring,
press CTRL+C.
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-43
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Display Format
A typical sublink status display is shown below.
STATUS OF PORT
TYPE
=
E1
FUNCTION
=
DSU
ALARMS
=
L. SYNC LOSS
============
R. SYNC LOSS
============
OFF
OFF
REM PORT
========
REM REM PORT
============
LOCAL PORT
==========
NO
NO
NO
LOOPS
=
BPV LAST MINUTE
=
0
BPV WORST MINUTE
=
1
The fields included in the status information display are listed below:
TYPE
Displays the type of the sublink interface: E1
FUNCTION
Displays the type of interface hardware installed on the
user's port: LTU or DSU
ALARMS
Indicates the status of the sublink alarms. The
displayed alarms depend on the framing mode:
•
For G732N, this field shows the local and remote
‘loss of frame alignment’ alarms.
•
For the unframed mode, L. SYNC LOSS shows the
‘loss of signal’ alarm. R. SYNC LOSS is meaningless.
LOOPS
Displays the state of each type of loopback that can be
activated on the user's port.
BPV LAST MINUTE
Displays the number of BPV events detected in the last
minute. This counter is displayed only when the CRC-4
function is disabled.
BPV WORST MINUTE Displays the number of BPV events detected in the
worst minute. This counter is displayed only with
CRC-4 disabled.
DSP ST SYS
Purpose
Display system status information.
Syntax
DSP ST SYS
4-44
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Use
•
To view the current system status, type:
DSP ST SYS<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and the time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Display Format
A typical status information display is shown below.
NODE
=
0
NAME
=
'HCD-E1 name'
NODAL CLOCK
=
INT
HTU TYPE
=
CENTRAL
REMOTE HTU TYPE
=
HCD-E1
SOFTWARE VER
=
2.0
HARDWARE VER
=
0.0
DTE INT. TYPE CH 1
=
V35
DTE INT. TYPE CH 2
=
RS530
HRPT:
=
NTU_SIDE
HRPT SOFTWARE VER
=
1.0
HRPT HARDWARE VER
=
1.0
The system status fields are described below (from top to bottom):
11/01/00 19:23
NODE
The node number of the HCD-E1
NAME
The node name of the HCD-E1 (if you have defined it
with the DEF NAME command)
NODAL CLOCK
For a unit configured as central, indicates the current
source for the HCD-E1 system clock: INT, SL, CH1 or
CH2.
For a unit configured as remote, always shows LBT.
HCD TYPE
Indicates the function of the HCD-E1: CENTRAL or
REMOTE
REMOTE HCD TYPE
Indicates type of the unit at the remote end of the HDSL
link
SOFTWARE VER
HCD-E1 software version
HARDWARE VER
HCD-E1 hardware version
DTE INT. TYPE CH 1
Type of interface of data channel 1
DTE INT. TYPE CH 2
Type of interface of data channel 2
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-45
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HRPT
Indicates whether there is an H-RPT repeater on the
HDSL link, and the side of H-RPT to which your
HCD-E1 is connected.
HRPT SOFTWARE VER
DOESN’T
EXIST
There is no H-RPT on the HDSL link.
NTU_SIDE
Your HCD-E1 is configured as central
LTU_SIDE
Your HCD-E1 is configured as remote
H-RPT software version (this field is displayed only
if there is H-RPT on the HDSL link)
HRPT HARDWARE VER H-RPT hardware version (this field is displayed
only if there is H-RPT on the HDSL link)
Purpose
DSP TS
Display the allocation of the time slots of the HDSL signal.
Syntax
DSP TS
Use
To display the time slot information, type:
DSP TS<CR>
A typical display is shown below:
TIME SLOT MAPPING OF MAIN LINES
==============================
TS:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TYPE:
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
CH2
NC
NC
TS:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
TYPE:
NC
NC
CH1
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
TS:
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
TYPE:
NC
NC
SL
NC
NC
NC
DEDIC
NC
NC
NC
TS:
30
31
TYPE:
NC
NC
4-46
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Following is a list of fields appearing in the time slot display:
TS
Indicates the main link time slot number 0 through 31
TYPE
Indicates the type of time slot assignment:
NC
time slot not assigned
CH1
time slot is assigned to data channel 1
CH2
time slot is assigned to data channel 2
SL
time slot is assigned to E1 sublink
DEDIC
time slot is assigned for in-band management
After performing the command, HCD-E1 displays the date and the time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Purpose
EXIT
End the current session and return control to the HCD-E1 front panel.
Syntax
EXIT
Use
•
Type:
EXIT<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and the time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Purpose
F
Define the codes used to be sent to the supervision terminal to perform the
following terminal control functions:
•
Clear the screen
•
Move the cursor to the screen home position.
•
Move the cursor to the right by one position.
The codes used by typical terminals are listed in the following table:
Function
Terminal Type
TV920
VT52
VT100
Freedom100
Freedom220
Clear Screen
1B2A0000
N/A
1B5B324A
1B2A0000
1B5B324A
Cursor Home
1E000000
1B480000
1B5B4800
1E000000
1B5B4800
Cursor Right
0C000000
1B430000
1B5B3143
0C000000
1B5B0143
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-47
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Syntax
F
Use
1.
To display the current codes, type:
F<CR>
The terminal function entry screen is displayed. The screen includes
three separate lines, displayed one after the other. A typical screen,
showing all the three lines, is shown below:
CLEAR SCREEN
=
hhhhhhhh
CURSOR HOME
=
hhhhhhhh
CURSOR RIGHT
=
hhhhhhhh
where h indicates hexadecimal digits.
2.
To change a code, bring the cursor under the first digit of the code to
be changed, by pressing <CR>, then enter the appropriate
hexadecimal digits of the code.
3.
Repeat the procedure until all the necessary codes are changed.
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and the time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
Purpose
H or HELP
Display an index of the control port commands and the options available for
each command.
Syntax
H or HELP
Use
Type:
H or HELP<CR>
HCD-E1 displays the first HELP page. Press any key to see the next page.
Note
If H-RPT is connected on the HDSL link, you will also get commands for its
support.
When finished, HCD-E1 displays the date and the time followed by the
HCD-E1 prompt.
4-48
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Purpose
INIT DB
Erase the user-defined configuration from the database and load the
database with a specified set of default parameters values (see Table 4-2).
Syntax
INIT DB
Use
Type:
INIT DB<CR>
This command loads the default parameters and resets the HCD-E1.
Note
Traffic through HCD-E1 may be interrupted until you configure it anew.
Table 4-2 HCD-E1 Default Configuration
11/01/00 19:23
Parameter Type
Parameter Designation
Default Value
General
PASSWORD
NODE (node number)
CLEAR SCREEN
CURSOR HOME
CURSOR RIGHT
HCD
0
1B5B324A
1B5B4800
1B5B3143
SYSTEM
CLK_MASTER
CLK_FBACK
CONFIG REM
INT
NONE
YES
SL (sublink)
FRAME
CRC-4
SYNC
IDLE_TS_CODE
MAP_TYPE
NUM_OF_TS
Time Slots
G732N
NO
CCITT
FF
USER
NC
NC
SP (control port)
SPEED
DATA
PARITY
INTERFACE
CTS
DCD_DEL
DSR
POP_ALM
PWD
LOG_OFF
AUXILIARY DEVICE
AUTO
8
NONE
DCE
=RTS
0_MS
ON
NO
NO
NO
TERMINAL
CH1/CH2
FRAME
MULTIPLIER
MAP_TYPE
SPEED
CTS
FIFO_SIZE
CLOCK_MODE
Time Slots
FRAMED
64
USER
NC
ON
AUTO
DCE
NC
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-49
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Table 4-2 HCD-E1 Default Configuration (Cont.)
INIT F
Parameter Type
Parameter Designation
Default Value
BERT
PATTERN
ERROR_INJECTION_RATE
RX_INBAND
2E3-1
NO ERR
DISABLE
DOWNLOAD
ML_DL_MODE
SL_DL_MODE
NONE
NONE
Purpose
Resets the terminal control codes used to clear the terminal screen, to move
the cursor to the right, and to return the cursor to the home position to 0.
Syntax
INIT F
Use
Type:
INIT F<CR>
HCD-E1 performs the command and displays the date and the time
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
LOOP
Purpose
Activate a user-controlled loopback on HCD-E1 (see Section 5-4 for the
loopback descriptions).
Syntax
LOOP [loop type]
Use
To activate a loopback, type the appropriate command. The commands
depend on the loopback type, on the channel or link for the loop to be
performed on, and on the type of unit working opposite HCD-E1. The
following table lists all the commands available:
4-50
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
To activate
Type
BERT test on data channel X of HCD-E1
LOOP BERT CH X, or LP BERT CH X*
In-band loopback on data channel X of the remote unit
LOOP INBAND CH X, or LP INBAND CH X*
Local (L) loopback on the HDSL lines (only from the unit
configured as central)
LOOP L LINE, or LP L LINE
Local (L) loopback on data channel X of local HCD-E1
LOOP L CH X, or LP L CH X*
Remote (R) loopback on data channel X of local HCD-E1
LOOP R CH X, or LP R CH X*
Remote (R) loopback on data channel X of remote unit
LOOP R R CH X, or LP R R CH X*
Local (L) loopback on the E1 sublink of the local HCD-E1
LOOP L SL, or LP L SL
Remote (R) loopback on the E1 sublink of the local
HCD-E1
LOOP R SL, or LP R SL
Remote (R) loopback on the E1 sublink of the remote unit
LOOP R R SL, or LP R R SL
Local loopback on H-RPT (only from the unit configured as
central)
LOOP L HRPT, or LP L HRPT
HCD-E1 performs the requested command and displays the date and time,
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
RESET
Purpose
Reset HCD-E1. This command causes HCD-E1 to initialize, therefore the
traffic through HCD-E1 will be disrupted until HCD-E1 returns to normal
operation.
Syntax
RESET
Use
•
To reset HCD-E1, type:
RESET<CR>
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Command Set Description
4-51
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Purpose
TIME
Set the time for the HCD-E1 internal real-time clock.
Syntax
TIME
Use
1.
Type:
TIME<CR>
HCD-E1 sends the entry line for the first parameter:
HOUR
Tip
= 12
2.
If you do not want to change the current value of the parameter, press
<CR> to confirm it and continue to the next line, otherwise press F to
increase or B to decrease the displayed values, and then press <CR>
to confirm the selected value. HCD-E1 displays the entry line for the
next parameter.
3.
Repeat the procedure until all the parameters are defined, and then
press <CR> to end.
Set the time about one minute beyond the current time and then press
<CR> at the correct instant.
A typical display, as seen after all the parameters are selected, is shown
below:
HOUR
=
12
MINUTE
=
25
SECOND
=
16
Below HCD-E1 displays the date and time (note that the time has changed),
followed by the HCD-E1 prompt.
4.6 Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions
Before using the supervision terminal make sure the preparations listed in
Section 4-3 have been completed and all the relevant equipment have been
turned on.
Starting a Session When the terminal is used to control a single HCD-E1, always assign node
number 0 to the HCD-E1. Use the following startup sequence to connect to
- Single HCD-E1
a HCD-E1 that has been assigned node number 0. We assume that you are
using the AUTO (Autobaud) mode, which is the default one when you
switch on the equipment.
4-52
Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
1.
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
Press the <CR> key three times. When HCD-E1 has successfully
identified the data rate of the supervision terminal, it notifies you of the
results of its power-up self-test:
HCD Self Test in Progress...OK, or
HCD Self Test in Progress...Failed
•
If the HCD-E1 self test failed, you must repair HCD-E1 before you
can continue using it.
•
If HCD-E1 successfully passed the power-up self-test, it sends the
following message:
HCD Supervisory Port On Line. Type ‘H’ For Help
Note
Pressing <CR> activates the HCD-E1 self-test only if it is the first session after
HCD-E1 has been turned on.
If the optional password protection has been activated, HCD-E1
displays the following prompt:
PASSWORD>
2.
Type the password (four to eight characters) and then press <CR>.
For each password character typed by you the terminal displays an
asterisk *. The default password is HCD.
3.
If the password is accepted, HCD-E1 enters the session, and the
terminal displays:
HCD>
The HCD-E1 front panel display shows:
TERMINAL ON LINE
The front panel controls are disabled as long as HCD-E1 is under remote
control.
Note
To regain the front-panel control at the local site, use the options described
in the section “Ending a Control Session” below.
Starting a Session When one terminal is used to control several HCD-E1 connected via
- Multiple HCD-E1 modems, non-zero node numbers are assigned to each HCD-E1. The node
numbers, in the range of 1 to 255, are assigned during the first session (see
the previous section), by means of the command DEF NODE.
Important
11/01/00 19:23
If you are using a multidrop configuration, do not assign address 0 to any of
the HCD-E1 connected to a given terminal. Make sure the interface type is
set as DTE, and select the appropriate DCD_DEL parameter.
Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions
4-53
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
To establish a session with a specific HCD-E1, use the following procedure:
1.
Press the <CR> key three times.
2.
Type NODE, space, the desired HCD-E1 node number, another space,
and then type the desired command and press <CR>. For example,
with node number 234, type:
NODE<SP>234<SP> 'command' <CR>
•
If the addressed HCD-E1 does not use password protection, it
immediately executes the command.
•
If the addressed HCD-E1 is password-protected, it displays a row of
asterisks instead of the command you have typed. After you press
<CR>, it displays the following prompt:
PASSWORD>
3.
Type again the node number part and then the password. For example,
for node number 234, type:
NODE<SP>234<SP>'password'<CR>
4.
If the password is correct, HCD-E1 displays the working prompt:
HCD>. Otherwise, it displays the password prompt once more:
PASSWORD>
5.
Control Session
Enter your command following the HCD working prompt.
During the control session, you type the desired commands at the terminal
keyboard. You must see the HCD-E1 echo character by character.
For a multidrop configuration, always prefix your command with a node
number part, as described above.
If a wrong character appears, backspace to clear the error, and then type
again the correct character.
When you see the correct and complete command in the echo line, press
<CR> to execute the command. HCD-E1 processes the command and
displays the appropriate response.
At the end of the command execution, HCD-E1 displays the current date
and time, and then provides a new prompt for the next command line.
If you changed your mind, and want to abort the command, press CTRL+C.
You will again receive the prompt, so you can enter another command.
Note
4-54
Use CTRL+C to stop automatic repetition of commands sent with the /R
option.
Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions
11/01/00 19:23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
If your command is not correct, HCD-E1 does not execute it and displays
the following:
- ‘Bad command or parameter. Type 'H' for help’
if the command syntax is wrong
An appropriate error message (see Section 5.5 in Chapter 5) if the
command is not valid in the current system configuration or values
you are trying to set are wrong.
-
The correct command must then be sent again.
If the terminal screen fills up during the exchange with HCD-E1, HCD-E1
displays the message:
HIT ANY KEY TO CONTINUE...
After pressing any key, the terminal scrolls to the next page.
Ending a Control
Session
11/01/00 19:23
You can end the control session in one of the following three ways:
•
Disconnect the cable from the HCD-E1 front-panel CONTROL DCE
connector.
•
Send the EXIT command from the supervision terminal.
•
HCD-E1 automatically returns to front panel control if no commands
are received for a certain period of time (controlled by the LOG_OFF
parameter). You can, however, disable this time-out and thus also this
way of ending the session.
Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions
4-55
Chapter 4 - Control from the Supervisory Port
4-56
Supervision Terminal Operating Instructions
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
11/01/00 19:23
Chapter 5
Troubleshooting and
Diagnostics
5.1 General
This chapter describes the HCD-E1 diagnostics functions, which include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Status indications and alarms - Section 5.2
Performance diagnostics - Section 5.3
Diagnostic loopbacks - Section 5.4
Configuration error messages - Section 5.5
Power-up self-test - Section 5.6
Troubleshooting instructions - Section 5.7.
5.2 Status Indications and Alarms
Front-Panel LEDs
The status of HCD-E1 is indicated by the ALM, TST, E1 LOS and HDSL LOS
LED indicators located on the front panel. For description of LED indicators
and their functions, refer to Table 3-1 and Section 3.5, Operating
Instructions, in Chapter 3.
Alarms
HCD-E1 maintains an alarm buffer, which can store a maximum of
100 alarms. Alarms can be of two types, designated as ON/OFF and ON:
•
A message indicating an ON/OFF-type alarm is displayed on the LCD
only when the alarm condition is present, and is automatically stopped
from being displayed when the alarm condition is cleared (if the alarm is
being displayed, it will disappear only when the display is refreshed by
scrolling).
•
A message indicating an ON-type alarm still can be displayed on the LCD
even after the event that caused the alarm condition is cleared.
In this manual, we often use the term ON-state alarm. An ON-state alarm is
either an ON-type alarm or an ON/OFF-type alarm when its alarm condition
is still present.
01/01/01 08:15
Status Indications and Alarms
5-1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
When an ON/OFF-type alarm changes its state from ON to OFF, it is not
removed from the alarm buffer. Moreover, a new entry of this alarm is
added to the alarm buffer. This feature enables you to see the alarm history
on the terminal using the DSP ALM command. A typical display looks like
this:
ALARM 01
SIGNAL LOSS: SL
OFF
1998-01-01
00:04.46
ALARM 01
SIGNAL LOSS: SL
ON
1998-01-01
00:00.01
Messages displayed on the LCD and on the control terminal have a similar
syntax. Table 5-1 presents in alphabetical order the alarm messages
displayed on the HCD-E1 LCD and control terminal, and lists the actions
required to correct the alarm condition.
H-RPT Alarms
If you have an H-RPT repeater on the HDSL link, HCD-E1 allows you to
monitor and work with the H-RPT alarms via its supervision terminal. The
H-PRT buffer stores a maximum of 100 alarms. The types and states of the
H-RPT alarms and the rules of working with the H-RPT alarm buffer are
exactly the same as for the HCD-E1 alarm buffer. Table 5-2 presents the
H-RPT alarm messages displayed on the HCD-E1 control terminal in order of
their numbers, and lists the actions required to correct the alarm condition.
The H-RPT alarms are not available from the LCD.
Alarm Relay
HCD-E1 has an alarm relay, which enables you to automatically turn on
alarm indication by properly connecting the relay alarm contacts to your
alarm equipment (see “Connecting the HCD-E1 Alarm Relay Port” in
Chapter 2).
The Alarm Relay has a pair of change-over dry contacts: the Normally-Open
(NO) contacts close in case of an alarm, and the Normally-Close ( NC)
contacts open in case of an alarm. The alarm contacts are floating with
respect to the signal and chassis grounds of HCD-E1.
The following events will activate the alarm relay:
•
Loss of power (indicated by the NO contacts)
•
Detection of a hardware failure, or any other failure, during the powerup self-test
•
Detection of real-time clock battery failure during the power-up self-test
•
Detection of a disruption in the database during the power-up self-test
•
Loss of HDSL lines (1 or 2) synchronization
•
Signal loss, excessive bit error rate, excessive rate of bipolar violations,
loss of local or remote frame synchronization or reception of AIS on the
E1 sublink.
The corresponding alarms in Table 5-1 are marked with an asterisk (*). The
relay returns automatically to the no-alarm state when none of the alarm
conditions listed above is present.
5-2
Status Indications and Alarms
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-1 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages
LCD Message
Terminal Message
Alarm
Probable Cause
Number
Corrective Actions
AIS OCCURR: SL*
AIS OCCURRED: SL*
12
AIS is being detected on the E1
sublink.
Check the equipment connected to the E1 sublink. ON/OFF
AIS SYN LOS: SL*
AIS SYNC LOSS: SL*
13
AIS and loss of frame alignment
on the E1 sublink.
Check the equipment connected to the E1 sublink. ON/OFF
ALARM BUFFER
OVERFLOW
16
More than 100 alarms entries
have been written in the alarm
buffer since the last clear
command. New alarms are
overwriting the older alarms.
Read the messages and then clear the buffer by
sending the CLR ALM/A command from the
control terminal.
BPV ERROR: SL
BPV ERROR: SL
02
A bipolar violation error has
Check the connection between the E1 sublink and ON
been detected on the local unit’s its DTE.
E1 sublink.
CRC-4 ERROR: SL
CRC-4 ERROR: SL
10
Bit errors have been detected by Check the connection between the E1 sublink and ON
CRC-4 checking on the data
its DTE.
received by the local unit’s
sublink.
DB CHKSUM ERR*
DB CHECKSUM ERROR*
15
The database currently stored in
the non-volatile memory of
HCD-E1 is corrupted.
_
Alarm
Type
ON/OFF
1. Enter the INIT DB command from the control
ON/OFF
terminal or set the DB INIT section of switch S2
to ON, to load the default configuration in the
place of the current database, then reconfigure
HCD-E1 with the desired parameters.
2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace
HCD-E1 if it fails the test.
01/01/01 08:15
Status Indications and Alarms 5-3
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-1 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages (Cont.)
LCD Message
Terminal Message
Alarm
Probable Cause
Number
DB-INIT DW IS ON
DB-INIT SWITCH IS ON
21
Section DB INIT is set to ON.
If it is no longer necessary to enforce the default
ON
This message appears only upon database parameter values, change setting to OFF.
power-up.
DIAL CYCLE FAIL*
DP DIAL CYCLE FAILED*
44
The current cycle of call
attempts (both to the primary
and alternate numbers) failed.
Check the modem connected to the CONTROL
DCE connector. If the called numbers are often
busy, you may also increase the number of call
retries
ON
DIFF DEDIC TS
DIFFERENT DTS
CENTRAL & REMOTE
39
The time slot assigned for
management in the central unit
and in the remote unit are not
the same time slot
Select the time slots assigned for management
correctly.
ON/OFF
DP ALT CALL FAIL*
DP ALTERNATE CALL
FAILED*
46
The call attempts to the alternate If the number is not busy, check the modem
dial-out number failed
connected to the CONTROL DCE connector. If
the called numbers (primary as well as alternate)
are often busy, you may also increase the number
of call retries
ON
DP PRM CALL FAIL*
DP PRIMARY CALL
FAILED*
45
The call attempts to the primary
dial-out number failed
ON
Note
5-4
Corrective Actions
If the number is not busy, check the modem
connected to the CONTROL DCE connector. If
the called number is often busy, you may also
increase the number of call retries
Alarm
Type
Alarms 44, 45 and 46 appear only when you perform a DSP ALM REM command and you have HTU-E1 or HTU-2 at the
remote site.
Status Indications and Alarms
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-1 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages (Cont.)
LCD Message
Terminal Message
Alarm
Probable Cause
Number
Corrective Actions
Alarm
Type
DTE NOT CON CH:1
DTE NOT CONNECTED
TO CH:1
38
The Ethernet interface is not
connected to an operating LAN
Check the cable connecting the LAN, the LAN
media, and check that at least one station is active
on the LAN
ON/OFF
DTE NOT CON CH:2
DTE NOT CONNECTED
TO CH:2
41
The Ethernet interface is not
connected to an operating LAN
Check the cable connecting the LAN, the LAN
media, and check that at least one station is active
on the LAN
ON/OFF
ELASTIC BUF OVF
ELASTIC BUFFER
OVERFLOW
34
The HDSL elastic buffer is
overflown.
1. Check the timing of clocks selected in the
system, and make sure that they are derived
from the same source.
ON
2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace
HCD-E1 if it fails the test.
ELS BUF ERR: LP1
ELS BUF ERR: LP2
ELASTIC BUFFER ERROR: 33
LP1
ELASTIC BUFFER ERROR:
LP2
The corresponding HDSL line is
not supplying data.
EXC ERR RAT: SL*
EXCESSIVE ERROR
RATIO: SL*
11
Excessive bit error rate (higher
Check the connection between the E1 sublink and ON/OFF
-3
than 10 ) is detected in the data its DTE.
received by the local unit’s
sublink.
EXCESS BPV: SL*
EXCESSIVE BPV: SL*
07
Excessive BPV are detected on
the E1 sublink.
1. Check HDSL line connections.
ON
2. Check the operation of the local and remote
units and replace if necessary.
1. Check if there is a problem in the network
facilities used by the E1 sublink.
ON/OFF
2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace
HCD-E1 if it fails the test.
Note
01/01/01 08:15
Alarm 38 appears only when you perform DSP ALM REM command and you have an HTU-2 at the remote site.
Status Indications and Alarms 5-5
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-1 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages (Cont.)
LCD Message
Terminal Message
Alarm
Number
Cause
Corrective Actions
Alarm
Type
FALLBACK CLK USE*
CLOCK WAS
CHANGED TO
FALLBACK*
47
HCD-E1 switched to the fallback
clock source, because the master
clock source failed.
Check the master clock source. A clock source
ON
(recovered from CH1, or CH2, or SL) is replaced as a
result of failure under the following conditions:
• CH1, CH2 - fails when data channel equipment is
disconnected or inoperative (DTR line not asserted)
• SL - fails when the E1 sublink loses frame
synchronization
FRAME SLIP: SL
FRAME SLIP: SL
04
A frame slip occurred on the E1
sublink.
1. Check the clock source selection.
ON
2. Check the clock source stability at far end of the
E1 link.
3. Perform the power-up self-test and replace
HCD-E1 if it fails the test.
HARDWARE
FAILURE*
HARDWARE
FAILURE*
18
HCD-E1 technical failure (failure
of one of the internal
programmable components). This
message can appear only upon
power-up.
Replace HCD-E1.
ON
INTERNAL CLK USE
CLOCK WAS
CHANGED TO
INTERNAL
24
HCD-E1 configured as central
switched to the internal clock
source, because both the master
and the fallback clock sources
failed.
1. Check the two clock sources.
2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace
HCD-E1 if it fails the test.
ON/OFF
5-6
Status Indications and Alarms
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-1 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages (Cont.)
LCD Message
Terminal Message
Alarm
Cause
Number
Corrective Actions
Alarm
Type
L. SYNC LOSS: SL*
LOCAL SYNC LOSS: SL*
14
1. Check cable connections between the E1
sublink and its DTE.
ON/OFF
Local loss of frame
synchronization alarm on the
sublink
2. Check the line and/or other communication
equipment connected to the E1 sublink.
3. Perform the power-up self-test and replace the
HCD-E1 if it fails the test.
LOC CRC ALM: LP1
LOC CRC ALM: LP2
LOCAL CRC ALM: LP1
LOCAL CRC ALM: LP2
30
A CRC-6 error has been
detected in the input signal of
the specified HDSL line.
If the number of CRC-6 errors is significant (more ON
than a few errors per hour), perform the following:
1. Check the HDSL lines to the remote unit.
2. Perform self-test on the two units and replace
the unit that fails the self-test.
LOOP INBAND ON:
CHX
LOOP INBAND ON: CHX 42
In-band loopback is connected
on the appropriate channel.
Set the inband loop to OFF, if you don’t need it
any more.
ON/OFF
LOOPS INVERTED
LOOPS ARE INVERTED
32
The unit (configured as remote)
detected incorrect HDSL line
connections (interchange
between the two HDSL lines).
Internally, the remote unit automatically corrects
the connections to enable regular operation.
ON/OFF
MASTER CLK USE*
CLOCK WAS CHANGED
TO MASTER*
48
HCD-E1, configured as central,
switched back to the clock
source selected as the master
source.
Normal state - no action required
ON
PHASOR OVF:CH1
PHASOR
OVERFLOW:CH1
37
A problem of receive or transmit Check the remote equipment.
clock between the data channels
ON
PHASOR OVF:CH2
PHASOR
OVERFLOW:CH2
40
A problem of receive or transmit Check the remote equipment.
clock between the data channels
ON
01/01/01 08:15
Status Indications and Alarms 5-7
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-1 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages (Cont.)
LCD Message
Terminal Message
Alarm
Cause
Number
PSWRD DW IS ON
PSWRD SWITCH IS ON
19
Section PASSWD is set to ON.
If it is no longer necessary to enforce the default
This message appears only upon password and node number, change setting to
power-up.
OFF.
ON
REM BPV ERROR
REMOTE BPV ERROR
28
A report of bipolar violation
error at the sublink of the
remote appliance has been
received via the eoc.
Have the link between the E1 sublink of the
remote unit and its DTE checked.
ON
REM CRC ALM: LP1
REM CRC ALM: LP2
REMOTE CRC ALM: LP1
REMOTE CRC ALM: LP2
31
The remote unit reports that a
CRC-6 error has been detected
in the input signal of the
specified HDSL line.
If the number of CRC-6 errors is significant (more ON
than a few errors per hour), perform the following:
The remote unit reports a
remote sync loss alarm occurred
at its E1 sublink.
1. Check cable connections between the E1
sublink of the remote unit and its DTE.
REM IND ALARM*
REMOTE INDICATION
ALARM*
29
Corrective Actions
Alarm
Type
1. Check the HDSL lines to the remote unit.
2. Perform self-test on the two units and replace
the one that fails the self-test.
ON/OFF
2. Check the line and/or other communication
equipment connected to the E1 sublink.
3. Replace the remote equipment.
REM SIGNAL LOSS*
REMOTE SIGNAL LOSS*
27
A report of loss of input signal at
the E1 sublink of the remote
equipment has been received.
1. Check cable connections between the E1
sublink of the remote unit and its DTE.
2. Check the line and/or other communication
equipment connected to the E1 sublink of the
remote unit.
3. Replace the remote equipment.
5-8
Status Indications and Alarms
01/01/01 08:15
ON/OFF
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-1 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages (Cont.)
LCD Message
Terminal Message
Alarm
Cause
Number
Corrective Actions
Alarm
Type
R. SYNC LOSS: SL
REMOTE SYNC LOSS: SL
23
The equipment connected to
the E1 sublink reports loss of
frame alignment.
Check the equipment connected to the E1 sublink ON/OFF
of your HCD-E1
RTC BATTERY FAIL*
REAL TIME CLOCK
BATTERY FAILURE*
22
The battery that powers the
Have the HCD-E1 repaired.
HCD-E1 internal real-time clock
when HCD-E1 is not powered,
has failed. This message appears
only upon power-up.
ON
SELF TEST ERROR*
SELF TEST ERROR*
17
A problem has been detected
during HCD-E1 self-test.
Repeat the self-test, and replace the
HCD-E1 if it fails the self-test.
ON
SIGNAL LOSS:LP1*
SIGNAL LOSS:LP2*
SIGNAL LOSS:LP1*
SIGNAL LOSS:LP2*
25
Loss of HDSL line input signal.
1. Check the corresponding HDSL line.
ON/OFF
SIGNAL LOSS: SL*
SIGNAL LOSS: SL*
01
2. Perform self-test on the two units and replace
the one that fails the self-test.
Loss of input signal on the E1
sublink.
1. Check cable connections to the E1 sublink
connector.
ON/OFF
2. Check the line and/or other communication
equipment connected to the E1 sublink.
SP-PAR DW IS ON
SP-PAR SWITCH IS ON
20
Section DEF SP is set to ON.
If it is no longer necessary to enforce the default
This message appears only upon control port parameters, change setting to OFF
power-up.
ON
STUFF OVERFLOW
STUFFING OVERFLOW
35
The stuffing mechanism cannot
compensate for the frequency
difference between the DTE
clock and the HDSL clock.
ON
01/01/01 08:15
1. Check the clock source selection.
2. Check the equipment providing the DTE signal
(unstable clock source).
3. Perform the power-up self-test and replace the
HCD-E1 if it fails the test.
Status Indications and Alarms 5-9
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-1 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages (Cont.)
LCD Message
Terminal Message
Alarm
Cause
Number
Corrective Actions
Alarm
Type
SYNC LOSS:LP1*
SYNC LOSS:LP2*
SYNC LOSS:LP1*
SYNC LOSS:LP2*
26
Loss of synchronization on the
specified HDSL line.
1. Check the corresponding HDSL line.
ON/OFF
TIMING OVERFLOW
TIMING OVERFLOW
36
The data line recovery circuits
cannot recover the data line
clock, because its frequency is
not within the supported range.
1. Check the equipment providing the data signal,
and make sure its clock source is stable.
2. Perform self-test on the two units and replace
the one that fails the self-test.
ON
2. Perform the power-up self-test and replace
HCD-E1 if it fails the test.
Table 5-2 H-RPT Alarm Buffer Messages
Alarm Message
Alarm
Number
Cause
Corrective Actions
Alarm
Type
HRPT_LTU SIGNAL LOSS:LP1
HRPT_LTU SIGNAL LOSS:LP2
01
Loss of input signal on the
specified HDSL line at the LTU
side of H-RPT.
1. Check the corresponding HDSL line.
ON/OFF
2. Perform a self-test on the unit configured as remote and
replace the unit if it fails the self-test.
3. Replace H-RPT.
HRPT_NTU SIGNAL LOSS:LP1
HRPT_NTU SIGNAL LOSS:LP2
02
Loss of input signal on the
specified HDSL line at the NTU
side of H-RPT.
1. Check the corresponding HDSL line.
ON/OFF
2. Perform a self-test on the unit configured as central and
replace the unit if it fails the self-test.
3. Replace H-RPT.
HRPT_LTU SYNC LOSS:LP1
HRPT_LTU SYNC LOSS:LP2
03
Loss of synchronization on the
specified HDSL line at the LTU
side of H-RPT.
1. Check the corresponding HDSL line.
2. Perform a self-test on the unit configured as remote and
replace the unit if it fails the self-test.
3. Replace H-RPT.
5-10
Status Indications and Alarms
01/01/01 08:15
ON/OFF
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-2 HCD-E1 Alarm Buffer Messages (Cont.)
Alarm Message
Alarm
Number
Cause
Corrective Actions
Alarm
Type
HRPT_NTU SYNC LOSS:LP1
HRPT_NTU SYNC LOSS:LP2
04
Loss of synchronization on the
specified HDSL line at the NTU
side of H-RPT.
1. Check the corresponding HDSL line.
ON/OFF
2. Perform a self-test on the unit configured as central and
replace the unit if it fails the self-test.
3. Replace H-RPT.
HRPT_SELF TEST ERROR
05
A problem has been detected
during the cyclic H-RPT self-test.
Replace H-RPT.
ON
HRPT_LTU CRC ALM: LP1
HRPT_LTU CRC ALM: LP2
06
A CRC-6 error has been detected
in the input signal of the specified
HDSL line.
If the number of CRC-6 errors is significant (more than a few
errors per hour), perform the following:
ON
1. Check the appropriate HDSL line from the H-RPT to the
unit configured as remote.
2. Perform a self-test on the unit configured as remote and
replace the unit if it fails the self-test.
3. Replace H-RPT.
HRPT_NTU CRC ALM: LP1
HRPT_NTU CRC ALM: LP2
07
A CRC-6 error has been detected
in the input signal of the specified
HDSL line.
If the number of CRC-6 errors is significant (more than a few
errors per hour), perform the following:
ON
1. Check the HDSL lines to the remote unit.
2. Perform a self-test on the unit configured as central and
replace the unit if it fails the self-test.
3. Replace H-RPT.
HRPT ALARM BUFFER OVERFLOW
.
01/01/01 08:15
08
More than 100 alarms entries
have been written in the H-RPT
alarm buffer since the last clear
command. New alarms are
overwriting the older alarms.
Read the messages and then clear the buffer by sending the
CLR ALM HRPT/A command from the control terminal.
ON/OFF
Status Indications and Alarms 5-11
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Working with
Alarm Buffer
You can manage the alarm buffer either from the control terminal, or from
the LCD.
From the Control Terminal
To display the active alarms from the control terminal, type DSP ALM. The
terminal displays up to 100 alarms stored in the buffer, for each alarm listing
its number, its state (ON or OFF), the date and the time when the last
change in its state occurred. To clear the alarms, use the commands CLR
ALM and CLR ALM REM. For more details, see description of the
corresponding command in Section 4.5, HCD-E1 Command Set Description.
From the LCD
You can view the ON-state alarms stored in the alarm buffer, on the front
panel LCD display, and delete the alarm messages from the buffer when no
longer needed. This procedure is explained below.
When the top row shows ALARM BUFFER, the second row displays the
following information:
•
During normal operation, the second row shows EMPTY (no alarm
messages).
•
If the alarm buffer contains ON-state alarms, the LCD shows SCROLL in
the left-hand field of the second row, and CLEAR in the right-hand field.
To display the alarms, bring the cursor to SCROLL, and then press ENTER:
you can now scroll between the ON-state alarms stored in the alarm buffer.
To interpret the alarm messages displayed in the second row, refer to
Table 5-1.
To correct the reported problem, perform the corrective actions in the given
order, until the problem is resolved.
To clear alarm messages from the HCD-E1 alarm buffer, act as follows:
Step
Action
Key
Display
1
Display ALARM BUFFER in the first row.
CURSOR
ALARM BUFFER
2
Bring the cursor in the second row, to
CLEAR.
CURSOR
3
Press ENTER to clear the ON-type alarms
and the alarm history in the alarm buffer.
ENTER
If no ON-state alarms are present, the
second row should show EMPTY.
This action is equivalent to the CLR ALM/A command (see Section 4.5,
HCD-E1 Command Set Description, in Chapter 4).
5-12
Status Indications and Alarms
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
5.3 Performance Diagnostics Data
General
HCD-E1 has two capabilities for collection of performance statistics: E1 and
HDSL performance monitoring capability.
This section first describes the principles and parameters of the E1 and
HDSL performance monitoring and then explains how to display
performance data from the HCD-E1 front panel. For information on
displaying the performance data from the control terminal, see Chapter 4.
E1 Sublink
Performance
Monitoring
This section describes the performance evaluation and monitoring functions
provided by HCD-E1 with respect to the user's traffic (on the E1 link
between the DTE and the user’s port). The functions actually available
depend on the use of the CRC-4 function: whether it is enabled or disabled.
Below are listed performance monitoring parameters with the CRC-4
function enabled and disabled, followed by a summary table (Table 5-2)
listing the displays of all these parameters on the HCD-E1 front panel in the
order of their appearance, accompanied by a short description and ranges
available.
E1 Performance Monitoring with CRC-4 Function Enabled
When the CRC-4 function is enabled, you are able to monitor the
end-to-end data transmission performance. HCD-E1 derives information
about errors from the E1 data payload by performing a cyclic redundancy
check (CRC), and transmits the resulting CRC checksum in addition to the
raw data bits.
The receiving end recalculates the checksum and compares the results with
the received checksum: any difference between the two checksums
indicates that the current data block being evaluated contains bit errors.
When the CRC-4 function is enabled, HCD-E1 stores E1 line statistics for the
E1 port. This permits real-time monitoring of E1 data transmission
performance.
The performance monitoring parameters are listed below:
•
Current CRC-4 error events (ERROR CRC)
A CRC-4 error event is any multiframe containing a CRC error and/or
OOF event. The number of CRC events in the current second is collected
in a current CRC error events register.
•
Current average CRC-4 errors (AV ERR CRC)
The average number of CRC events per second. The average is updated
every second.
Note
01/01/01 08:15
You can display the register contents at any time. When the CRC error events
are displayed on the front-panel LCD, you can reset the register by pressing
ENTER.
Performance Diagnostics Data
5-13
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
•
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Current errored seconds (CURR ES)
An errored second is any second containing one or more CRC error
events, or one or more OOF events, or one or more controlled slip
events. The data is collected for the current 15-minute interval.
•
Current unavailable seconds (CURR UAS)
An unavailable second is any second in which a failed signal state exists.
A failed signal state is declared when 10 consecutive severely errored
seconds (SES) occur, and is cleared after 10 consecutive seconds of data
are processed without a SES.
•
Current severely errored seconds (CURR SES)
A SES is a second with 832 or more CRC error events, or one or more
OOF events. The data is collected for the current 15-minute interval.
•
Current bursty errored seconds (CURR BES)
A BES is a second with 2 to 831 CRC error events. The data is collected
for the current 15-minute interval.
•
Current loss of frame counter (CURR LOFC)
The loss of frame (LOF) counter counts the loss of frame alignment
events. The data is collected for the current 15-minute interval.
•
Current slip second counter (CURR CSS)
A CSS is a second with one or more controlled slip events. The data is
collected for the current 15-minute interval.
•
Current seconds (CURR SECS)
The number of seconds in the current measurement interval. A
measurement interval has 900 seconds (15 minutes).
Note
This register is called “CURRENT TIMER” on the control terminal.
HCD-E1 also provides support for long-term statistics gathered over the
long-term interval (96 15-minute intervals, i.e., a total of 24 hours) for the E1
port. The additional parameters included in this class are:
•
Long-term errored seconds (L.TERM ES)
The total number of ES in the current 24-hour interval.
•
Long-term fail seconds (L.TERM UAS)
The total number of UAS in the current 24-hour interval.
•
Long-term severely errored seconds (L.TERM SES)
The total number of SES in the current 24-hour interval.
5-14
Performance Diagnostics Data
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
•
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Long-term bursty errored seconds (L.TERM BES)
The total number of BES in the current 24-hour interval.
•
Long-term loss of frame counter (L.TERM LOFC)
The total number of LOF events in the current 24-hour interval.
•
Long-term slip second counter (L.TERM CSS)
The total number of CSS in the current 24-hour interval.
•
Long-term interval (L.TERM INT)
The number of valid 15-minute intervals in the previous 24 hour period.
•
Current degraded minutes (CUR DEG MIN)
The total number of degraded minutes in the current 24-hour interval. A
degraded minute is a minute in which the bit error rate (BER) exceeded
1×10-6. This number is updated every minute.
•
Last degraded minutes (LST DEG MIN)
The total number of degraded minutes in the last 24-hour interval. This
number is updated every 24 hours.
E1 Performance Monitoring with CRC-4 Disabled
In this case HCD-E1 does not support the capabilities listed above, but is
capable of gathering the number of bipolar violations measured during the
last minute.
The performance evaluation and monitoring parameters collected by the
HCD-E1 when the CRC-4 function is disabled are listed below:
•
Bipolar violations last minute count (BPV COUNT)
The total number of bipolar violations counted in the last minute. This
number is updated every minute.
•
Bipolar violations worst count (BPV WORST)
The number of bipolar violations counted in the worst minute since the
last resetting of the BPV count. This number is updated every minute.
01/01/01 08:15
Performance Diagnostics Data
5-15
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Summary of E1
Performance
Monitoring
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Table 5-3 gives a summary of the performance diagnostics data displayed
under the header PORT DIAGNOSTICS on the HCD-E1 front panel.
Table 5-3 Summary of E1 Performance Monitoring
Display
Description
Range
ERROR CRC
The number of CRC error events recorded since the last time the register
was cleared. The display is updated every second.
0 - 1000
AV ERR CRC
The average number of CRC error events recorded since the last time the
register was cleared. The display is updated every second.
0 - 1000
CURR ES
Number of ES measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 900
CURR UAS
Number of UAS measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 900
CURR SES
Number of SES measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 900
CURR BES
Number of BES measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 900
CURR LOFC
Number of loss of frame synchronization events measured during the
current 15-minute interval. The display is updated every second.
0 - 255
CURR CSS
Number of CSS measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 255
CURR SECS
(CURRENT TIMER
on the terminal)
The time in seconds that expired from the start of the current 15-minute
interval. The display is updated every second.
0 - 900
L.TERM ES
Number of ES measured during the current 24-hour interval. The display
is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 65535
L.TERM UAS
Number of UAS measured during the current 24-hour interval. The
display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 65535
L.TERM SES
Number of SES measured during the current 24-hour interval. The
display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 65535
L.TERM BES
Number of BES measured during the current 24-hour interval. The
display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 65535
L.TRM LOFC
Number of loss of frame synchronization events measured during the
current 24-hour interval. The display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 255
L.TERM CSS
Number of CSS measured during the current 24-hour interval. The
display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 255
L.TERM INT
The number of 15-minute intervals that expired from the start of the
current 24-hour interval. The display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 96
CUR DEG MIN
Number of degraded minutes measured during the last 24 hours. The
display is updated every minute.
0 - 1440
5-16
Performance Diagnostics Data
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-3 Summary of E1 Performance Monitoring (Cont.)
Display
Description
Range
LST DEG MIN
Last 24-hour count of degraded minutes. The display is updated every 24
hours.
0 - 1440
BPV COUNT
The total number of BPV errors during the last minute The display is
updated every minute.
0 - 9999
BPV WORST
The number of BPV errors measured during the worst minute. The
display is updated every minute.
0 - 9999
HDSL Performance This section describes the performance evaluation and monitoring functions
provided by HCD-E1 with respect to the HDSL transmission performance on
Monitoring
each line.
The HDSL performance monitoring parameters are listed below:
•
Current errored seconds (ES)
An errored second is any second containing one or more errored blocks,
or the occurrence of a severely disturbed period (SDP). The data is
collected for the current 15-minute interval.
•
Current unavailable seconds (UAS)
An unavailable second is any second in which a failed signal state exists.
A failed signal state is declared when 10 consecutive severely errored
seconds (SES) occur, and is cleared after 10 consecutive seconds of data
are processed without a SES. The data is collected for the current 15
minute interval.
•
Current severely errored seconds (SES)
A SES is a second with more than 30% errored blocks or one or more
SDP's. The data is collected for the current 15-minute interval.
•
Current background block error (BBE)
A BBE is an errored block not occurring during an SES. The data is
collected for the current 15-minute interval.
•
Errored Seconds Ratio (ESR)
The ratio of ES to the total seconds in the current 15-minute interval (not
displayed on the LCD).
•
Severely errored seconds ratio (SESR)
The ratio of SES to the total seconds in the current 15-minute interval
(not displayed on the LCD).
01/01/01 08:15
Performance Diagnostics Data
5-17
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
•
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Background block error ratio (BBER)
The ratio of BBE to the total seconds in the current 15-minute interval
(not displayed on the LCD).
•
Current seconds (SECS)
The number of seconds in the current measurement interval. A
measurement interval has 900 seconds (15 minutes).
Note
This register is called “CURRENT TIMER” on the control terminal.
The same parameters are also available over 24-hour intervals (long-term
statistics).
Summary of HDSL Table 5-4 gives a summary of the performance diagnostics data displayed
under HDSL DIAG: LINE1 or HDSL DIAG: LINE2 on the HCD-E1 front
Performance
panel.
Monitoring
Table 5-4 Summary of HDSL Performance Monitoring from the Front Panel
Display
Description
Range
CURR ES
Number of ES measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 900
CURR UAS
Number of UAS measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 900
CURR SES
Number of SES measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 900
CURR BBE
Number of BBE measured during the current 15-minute interval. The
display is updated every second.
0 - 900
CURR SECS
(CURRENT TIMER on
the terminal)
The time in seconds that expired from the start of the current 15-minute
interval. The display is updated every second.
0 - 900
L.TERM ES
Number of ES measured during the current 24-hour interval. The
display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 65535
L.TERM UAS
Number of UAS measured during the current 24-hour interval. The
display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 65535
L.TERM SES
Number of SES measured during the current 24-hour interval. The
display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 65535
L.TERM BBE
Number of BBE measured during the current 24-hour interval. The
display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 65535
L.TERM INT
The number of 15-minute intervals that expired from the start of the
current 24-hour interval. The display is updated every 15 minutes.
0 - 96
5-18
Performance Diagnostics Data
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Displaying the
Performance
Data on the
Front-Panel LCD
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
To display the E1 and HDSL performance diagnostics data on the HCD-E1
front-panel LCD, use the following procedure:
Step
Action
Key
1
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field of
the top row (if it is not already there).
CURSOR
2
Scroll to display PORT DIAG: SL in the top
row.
SCROLL
3
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in
the second row
CURSOR
The second row shows the first E1
performance item and its current value.
4
Scroll to see the other E1 performance
statistics
SCROLL
After each pressing of SCROLL, the second
row shows the current value of the next
item. Continue until the first item appears
again.
5
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field of
the top row (if not already there).
CURSOR
6
Scroll to display HDSL DIAG in the top
row.
SCROLL
7
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in
the second row.
CURSOR
8
Scroll to see the other statistics.
SCROLL
9
Bring the cursor to the right-hand field of
the top row (if it is not already there).
CURSOR
10
Scroll to display LINE2.
SCROLL
Second row shows the first performance
item for line 2 and its current value.
11
Repeat steps 7 and 8 above to see the
other statistics of line 2.
SCROLL
After each pressing of SCROLL, the second
row shows the current value of the next
item. Continue until the first item appears
again.
01/01/01 08:15
Result
The right-hand field of the top row
indicates LINE1, meaning that the
displayed diagnostics data pertains to
line 1. Second row shows the first
performance item for line 1 and its current
value.
After each SCROLL pressing, the second
row shows the current value of the next
item. Continue until the first item appears
again.
Performance Diagnostics Data
5-19
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Resetting the Performance Data Registers
The registers storing diagnostics data can be reset. To reset a register, bring
the register to display and press ENTER. To ensure that the collected data
remains meaningful and correlated after a specific register is reset, HCD-E1
will automatically perform the following actions.
For E1 Registers:
•
When the CRC-4 function is enabled:
− Since the data collected for the current interval and for the current
24-hour interval is correlated, pressing ENTER while any of the
following CURR or L.TERM data items (ES, UAS, SES, BES, LOFC,
CSS, CURR SECS, CUR DEG MIN, LST DEG MIN, and L.TERM INT)
is displayed, clears all the performance diagnostics registers, not only
the one appearing on the display.
− Resetting the ERROR CRC register automatically resets the AV ERR
CRC register, and vice versa: resetting the AV ERR CRC register
automatically resets the ERROR CRC register.
•
When the CRC-4 function is disabled, resetting the BPV COUNT register
automatically resets the BPV WORST register, and vice versa: resetting
the BPV WORST register automatically resets the BPV COUNT register.
For HDSL Registers:
When you press ENTER, all the HDSL performance registers that pertain to
the line whose number is displayed in the right-hand field of the top row are
simultaneously reset.
Displaying the
Performance Data
on a Control
Terminal
5-20
You can display the performance data on the control terminal by means of
the DSP SL PM, DSP R SL PM, DSP HDSL PM, and DSP R HDSL PM
commands, as explained in Chapter 4. By adding the /C switch to the
DSP SL PM and DSP R SL PM commands, you can reset the CRC ERROR
EVENTS and CRC AVG ERR EVENTS registers for the E1 sublink of the
appropriate (local or remote) unit. By adding the /CA switch to the
command, you can reset all the performance diagnostics registers.
Performance Diagnostics Data
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
5.4 Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic
Loopbacks
The user-controlled test functions of HCD-E1 consist of the following
diagnostic loopback tests:
Terminal
Command
Loopback Description
Designation on the LCD
Second Row
Top Row
(Right)
Loopback (local) on the two HDSL lines towards the
DTEs connected to your HCD-E1
LOOP L LINE
LOCAL LINE
ML
Local loopback on the H-RPT repeater towards the
HCD-E1 unit configured as central
LOOP L HRPT
LOCAL HRPT
HRPT
Loopback (local) on the E1 sublink of the local towards
the DTE connected to it
LOOP L SL
LOCAL PORT
SL
Loopback (remote) on the E1 sublink of the local
HCD-E1 towards the DTE connected to the E1 sublink
of the remote HCD-E1
LOOP R SL
REM PORT
SL
Loopback (remote remote) on the E1 sublink of the
remote unit, towards the DTE connected to the E1
sublink of the local HCD-E1
LOOP R R SL
REM REM PORT
SL
Loopback (local) on the data channel X of the local
HCD-E1 towards the DTE connected to it
LOOP L CH X
LOCAL CH
CHX
Loopback (remote) on the data channel X of the local
HCD-E1 towards the DTE connected to this channel of
the remote HCD-E1
LOOP R CH X
REM CH
CHX
Loopback (remote remote) on the data channel X of the
remote HCD-E1 towards the DTE connected to this
channel of the local HCD-E1
LOOP R R CH X
REM REM CH
CHX
In-band activated loopback on data channel X of the
remote unit towards the DTE connected to this channel
of the local HCD-E1
LOOP INBAND
CH X
INBAND LOOP
CHX
BER testing on the data channel
LOOP BERT
CH X
BERT
CHX
You can access these loopbacks from the TEST OPTION menu.
The following paragraphs describe the loopbacks identified by the
supervision terminal command.
01/01/01 08:15
Diagnostic Tests
5-21
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
LP L LINE
These local loopbacks on the HDSL lines are performed in the HDSL framer,
as shown in Figure 5-1. Test signal is provided either by the equipment
connected to one of the inputs, which must receive its own transmissions
without errors, or by applying the BERT test.
This test fully checks the connections to the equipment connected to the
local E1 sublink and/or data channels, as well as the circuits of the local unit.
Figure 5-1 LP LINE Loopback
Notes
1. This loopback can be activated only from the unit configured as central.
2. While this loop is active, HCD-E1 loses HDSL synchronization.
LP L HRPT
This local loopback on the HDSL repeater is performed as shown in
Figure 5-2. The loopback can be performed only from the HCD-E1 unit
configured as central.
This test fully checks the connections to the equipment connected to the
local E1 sublink and/or data channels of the HCD-E1 unit configured as
central, all the circuits of both HCD-E1 and H-RPT, and the transmission
path connecting the two units.
During the loopback, the remote unit continues to receive data sent from
the central unit.
Figure 5-2 H-RPT Local Loopback
5-22
Diagnostic Tests
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
LP L SL
This local loopback towards the E1 sublink of the local HCD-E1 is performed
by connecting the E1 sublink input signal (input to HCD-E1) to the output of
the sublink from HCD-E1, as shown in Figure 5-3. The test signal is provided
by the equipment connected to the E1 sublink of the local HCD-E1, which
must receive its own transmission without errors while the loopback is
activated.
This test fully checks the connections to the equipment connected to the E1
sublink of the local HCD-E1. During the loopback, the local HCD-E1
continues sending data from the DTE connected to its E1 sublink, over the
HDSL link.
Figure 5-3 LP L SL Loopback
LP R SL
This remote loopback towards the DTE connected to the E1 sublink of the
remote HCD-E1 is performed by connecting the sublink transmit signal
(output from HCD-E1) to the sublink receive path (input from HCD-E1)
within the sublink line interface circuits, as shown in Figure 5-4. The test
signal is provided by the equipment connected to the E1 sublink of the
remote HCD-E1, which must receive its own transmission without errors
while the loopback is activated.
This test checks the connections to the equipment connected to the E1
sublink of the remote HCD-E1, all the circuits of the local and remote
HCD-E1, and the transmission path connecting the two units.
E1
HDSL Line A
Interface
E1 Interface
Rx
Remote Unit
HDSL Line A
Local HCD-E1
Tx
HDSL Line A
Interface
Rx
Processing
Processing
Tx
HDSL Line B
Ch1
Rx
Ch2
Tx
Data
Interface
HDSL Line B
Interface
User
Interface
Tx
HDSL Line B
Interface
Rx
Figure 5-4 LP R SL Loopback
01/01/01 08:15
Diagnostic Tests
5-23
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
During the loopback, the DTE connected to the E1 sublink of the local
HCD-E1, continues to receive data.
LP R R SL
This remote remote loopback towards the DTE connected to the E1 sublink
of the local HCD-E1 is performed by connecting the transmit signal of the E1
sublink of the remote unit (output from the remote HCD-E1) to the input of
its receive path (input from the remote HCD-E1) within the sublink line
interface circuits, as shown in Figure 5-5. The test signal is provided by the
equipment connected to the E1 sublink of the local HCD-E1, that must
receive its own transmission without errors while the loopback is activated.
Figure 5-5 LOOP R R SL Loopback
This test checks the connections to the equipment connected to the E1
sublink of the local HCD-E1, all the circuits of the remote unit, the functions
of the remote and local units, and the transmission path between them.
During this loopback, the DTE connected to the E1 sublink of the remote
HCD-E1 continues to receive data.
Note
The following loopbacks (LP L CH, LP R CH, LP R R CH and LP INBAND CH)
are not recommended for HCD-E1 channel with Ethernet interface. Although
a channel loopback is not forbidden in principle, it may cause a state of
permanent collision on the LAN (this would prevent other users from using
the LAN as long as the loopback is connected).
LP L CH X
This local loopback on the data channel X of the local HCD-E1 (X can be 1
or 2) is performed by connecting the data channel transmit signal to the
input of the receive path, as shown in Figure 5-6. The test signal is provided
by the DTE connected to this channel of the local HCD-E1, which must
receive its own transmission without errors while the loopback is activated.
During the loopback, this channel of the local HCD-E1 continues sending
the user's data to the link.
This test mainly checks the connections to the local data channel interface.
5-24
Diagnostic Tests
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Figure 5-6 LP L CH 1 Loopback
LP R CH X
This remote loopback towards the DTE connected to data channel X of the
remote HCD-E1 (X can be one or two) is performed by connecting the local
data channel receive signal to its transmit input, as shown in Figure 5-7 for
the loop on channel 1. The test signal is provided by the DTE connected to
the data channel of the remote HCD-E1, which must receive its own
transmission without errors while the loopback is activated.
Figure 5-7 LP R CH 1 Loopback
This test fully checks the user data link, including the cables connecting the
DTE to the remote unit, the transmission path connecting the two units and
the circuits of the local HCD-E1. During the loopback, the DTE connected
to the tested data channel of the local HCD-E1 continues to receive data.
LP R R CH
This remote remote loopback towards the DTE connected to the data
channel of the local HCD-E1, is performed by connecting the transmit signal
of this data channel of the remote HCD-E1 to the input of its receive path
within the data channel interface circuits, as shown in Figure 5-8 for the loop
on channel 1. The test signal is provided by the DTE connected to the data
channel of the local HCD-E1, which must receive its own transmission
without errors while the loopback is activated.
01/01/01 08:15
Diagnostic Tests
5-25
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
This test checks the connections to the DTE connected to the data channel
of the local HCD-E1, all the circuits of the remote unit, the functions of the
remote unit and local HCD-E1, and the transmission path connecting the
two units. During the loopback, the DTE connected to the tested channel of
the remote unit continues to receive data.
Figure 5-8 LP R R CH 1 Loopback
LP INBAND CH X
The in-band activated channel loopback (see Figure 5-9) is similar to the
channel data remote remote loopback, except for the way it is connected.
This loopback is activated and deactivated by transmitting special sequences
for approximately two seconds, in contrast to the LP R R CH loopback,
where the command arrives with e.o.c.
Figure 5-9 LP INBAND CH 1 Loopback
LP BERT CH X
BER testing (see Figure 5-10) does not represent a loopback in itself; to be
performed, it requires one of the channel or line loopbacks to be already
activated, towards your BERT.
BER testing can be performed on one channel at a time. To perform the test
over the whole link, end-to-end, you may use the LP R R CH loopback on
the same channel; for a local test, use the LP L LINE loopback.
5-26
Diagnostic Tests
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
E1
CH1
BERT
HDSL Line A
Interface
E1 Interface
REMOTE UNIT
HDSL Line A
LOCAL HCD-E1
Tx
HDSL Line A
Interface
Rx
Rx
Processing
Processing
Tx
Rx
Tx
HDSL Line B
Data
Interface
HDSL Line B
Interface
Data
Interface
Tx
HDSL Line B
Interface
Rx
CH2
BERT
Figure 5-10 LP R R CH 1 Loopback + LP BERT CH 1
During the test, the local data channel is disconnected, the DSR line is off;
an internal pattern generator connects a user-selected test sequence to the
transmit input of the local data channel interface. To calibrate the system,
you can inject errors at a selectable rate.
The receive output is connected to a pattern evaluator. The evaluator
compares the received and transmitted patterns and detects errors. The test
results are presented as follows:
Operating
Loopbacks from
the Front Panel
01/01/01 08:15
•
On the supervision terminal, detailed full data is displayed, including
information on factors such as the number of seconds during which
HCD-E1 lost frame synchronization (see the DSP BERT command in
Chapter 4).
•
On the LCD, the result appears as GOOD (no errors) or BAD (at least
one error has been detected during the BER measurement interval). For
more details, see “Operating BERT from the Front Panel” below.
Before starting the execution of a test, pay attention to the following points:
•
At any time, you can connect only one loopback on the E1 sublink, and
one on each channel.
•
If a loopback is already connected, the TST indicator lights. If you try to
connect a loopback while another loopback of the same type is already
connected, HCD-E1 displays an error message.
Diagnostic Tests
5-27
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
To activate or deactivate a specific test, use the following procedure:
Step
Action
Key
Result
1
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in
the top row (if it is not already there).
CURSOR
2
Scroll to display TEST OPTION in the
top row.
SCROLL
The right-hand field of the top row may
show OFF (in this case the second row
is empty), SL, ML, CH1, CH2, or HRPT.
OFF indicates that either no test is
currently active or a test is active but
can be deactivated. CH1, CH2, SL, ML,
or HRPT indicates that a test is currently
active (in this case the TST LED lights),
or enabled.
3
To enable the activation of the E1
sublink test, bring the cursor to the
right-hand field in the top row, and
scroll to display SL.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
The second row displays the first test
option: LOCAL PORT.
4
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in
the second row, and scroll to display the
desired type of loopback:
CURSOR,
SCROLL
The second row shows the current state
of the selected test, OFF or ON.
LOCAL PORT (E1 sublink local
loopback)
REM PORT (E1 sublink remote
loopback)
REM REM PORT (E1 sublink remote
remote loopback)
5
To enable the activation of the main link
test, bring the cursor to the right-hand
field in the top row, and scroll to display
ML.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
The second row displays LOCAL LINE.
6
To enable the activation of CH X
loopbacks, bring the cursor to the
right-hand field in the top row and scroll
to display the desired number of
channel CH1 or CH2.
CURSOR
SCROLL
The second row displays the first test
option: LOCAL CH
5-28
Diagnostic Tests
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Step
Action
Key
Result
7
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in
the second row, and scroll to display the
desired type of loopback:
CURSOR,
SCROLL
The second row shows the current state
of the selected test, OFF or ON.
LOCAL CH (data channel local
loopback)
REM CH (data channel remote
loopback)
REM REM CH (data channel remote
remote loopback)
BERT (BERT test)
INBAND LOOP (in-band loopback)
8
To enable the activation of the H-RPT
loop (available only for HCD-E1
configured as central), bring the cursor
to the right-hand field in the top row,
and scroll to display HRPT.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
The second row displays LOCAL HRPT.
9
To change the test state, bring the
cursor to the right-hand field in the
second row, and scroll to display the
desired state (ON or OFF).
CURSOR,
SCROLL
The second row shows the new state of
the selected test (for instance, ON).
10
Press ENTER to activate or deactivate
the displayed test.
The TST indicator lights if the test is
activated, or goes off if no more tests
are active.
To deactivate all the tests activated from this unit, simultaneously, perform
steps 1, 2, 3 above: in step 3 select OFF, and then press ENTER. The
TST LED should turn off.
Operating BERT
from the Front
Panel
01/01/01 08:15
To activate the BERT test, you must first select the BERT parameters for the
appropriate channel (see Table 3-6 in Chapter 3 for the LCD menu
description and the DEF BERT command in Chapter 4 for additional
information). You must also remember that you can perform this test only on
a connected channel (at least one HDSL time slot must be assigned to this
channel).
Diagnostic Tests
5-29
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
To display the current parameter values, and change them as necessary, use
the following procedure:
Step
Action
Key
Result
1
Check/configure your channel according to
Chapter 3 (see Checking the Current
Operating Configuration in Section 3.5 or
General Configuration Procedure in
Section 3.6).
2
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in the
top row (if it is not already there).
CURSOR
3
Scroll to display BERT PRM in the top row.
SCROLL
4
Move the cursor to the right-hand field and
scroll to display the desired channel.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
The right-hand field of the top row
shows CH1 or CH2
5
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in the
second row, and scroll to display PATTERN.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
The right-hand field in the second
row displays the current value.
6
Move the cursor to the right-hand field and
scroll to display the desired pattern.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
7
Bring the cursor to the left-hand field in the
second row, and scroll to display ERR RATE.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
8
Move the cursor to the right-hand field and
scroll to display the desired error rate. For
selection, consult Table 3-6 in Chapter 3
and DEF BERT command in Chapter 4.
When done, press ENTER.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
ENTER
9
Prior to activating the BERT test on the data
channel, activate one of the following
loopbacks: LP R R CH on the selected
channel, LP LOCAL LINE, or LP L HRPT (if
your HCD-E1 is configured as central), as
described in the above section (Operating
Loopbacks from the Front Panel).
10
Bring the cursor to the left field of the top
row and scroll to display TEST OPTION.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
11
Bring the cursor to the right field in the top
row, and scroll to display your channel
number (CH1 or CH2).
CURSOR,
SCROLL
12
Bring the cursor to the left field of the
second row and scroll to display BERT.
CURSOR,
SCROLL
13
Bring the cursor to the rightmost field of in
the second row , select ON and press
ENTER to perform the BERT test.
CURSOR,
SCROLL,
ENTER
In the middle field of the second
row, HCD-E1 displays the test result:
BAD or GOOD.
14
To inject errors, press ENTER (to make sure
that error injection is enabled, see step 8).
ENTER
GOOD turns to BAD and the letter I
appears next to it.
15
If you want to repeat error injections,
perform step 14.
ENTER
BAD turns to GOOD, and the letter I
next to it disappears.
5-30
Diagnostic Tests
The right-hand field in the second
row displays the current value.
The TST indicator lights up.
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Step
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Action
Key
16
To deactivate the BERT test, scroll to OFF
and press ENTER.
ENTER
17
Deactivate the loopback on the appropriate
channel as described in the previous section.
Result
The diagnostic loopbacks can be operated by means of a control terminal,
Operating
Loopbacks from a using the LOOP and CLR LOOP commands. For more detail, see
Control Terminal description of the corresponding command in Section 4.5, HCD-E1
Command Set Description.
5.5 Configuration Error Messages
If HCD-E1 detects a configuration mismatch, it displays an appropriate
configuration error message. These messages appear both on the LCD and
on the supervision terminal. Some of the messages are not available on the
LCD. There is also one unavailable on the supervision terminal.
On the control terminal, configuration error messages have the format
ERROR, followed by a two-digit code and a short description of the error
message after the error code. The LCD displays CONFIG ERROR followed
by the error two-digit code, without description. Table 5-5 lists the
configuration error messages in order of their codes and explains each of
them. Messages not available on the LCD are marked with an asterisk (*).
Table 5-5 Configuration Error Messages
Error Code
Terminal Message and Description
ERROR 01
ILLEGAL LOOP COMBINATION
You are trying to activate illegal combination of loopbacks.
ERROR 02*
LOOP IS NOT ACTIVE
You are trying to disconnect a loopback that is not active.
ERROR 03
ILLEGAL COMMAND FOR CURRENT PORT MODE
You are trying to perform a command, which is illegal for the current configuration. For
example, you are trying to display the E1 sublink performance diagnostics while the
CRC-4 function is disabled, or you are attempting to configure remote HCD-E1, when
it is under control of central unit (CONFIG_REM parameter of the central unit is set to
YES) and the HDSL line is synchronized.
ERROR 04
On LCD only:
You are trying to change a parameter from the front panel when the password
protection is enabled
01/01/01 08:15
Configuration Error Messages
5-31
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Table 5-5 Configuration Error Messages (Cont.)
Error Code
Terminal Message and Description
ERROR 05
MASTER AND FALLBACK CLOCK ARE THE SAME
You are trying to select the same source as both master and fallback clock source.
Check and change as required.
ERROR 06
ILLEGAL NUMBER OF TIME SLOTS SELECTED
The total number of high priority time slots selected exceeds the maximum (16 time
slots) allowed
ERROR 07*
ILLEGAL NODE NUMBER
You are trying to select a node with number greater than 255.
ERROR 08
ILLEGAL SPEED FOR CURRENT AUXILIARY DEVICE
The AUTO (Autobaud) mode cannot be selected when the supervisory port is to
support the SLIP protocol (AUX DEV parameter is set to NMS-SLIP).
ERROR 09
DIFFERENT DEDICATED TS ALLOCATION
You are trying to select different time slots of main link and sublink for dedicated time
slot, and dedicated timeslot of sublink is not TS-0.
ERROR 10
CONFLICT IN SPEED PARAMETER
The number of time slots currently allocated to a data channel or sublink is not equal
to the number of time slots required to support the nominal data rate configured for
this channel/sublink under SPEED or NUM OF TS parameter. Check and change as
required.
ERROR 11
ILLEGAL TIME SLOT ALLOCATION
At least one main link time slot is being assigned to more than one user (for example to
the sublink and one of the channels). Check the dedicated time slot assignment, as
well as time slot assignment for each channel and for the E1 sublink, with particular
attention to automatic assignments (SEQ and ALT modes).
ERROR 12
TIME SLOT OUT OF RANGE
When using the SEQ or ALT mapping mode, the sum of the number of time slots
requested for a data channel (or sublink) and the starting time slot for that channel (or
sublink) exceeds 31. Check and change as required.
ERROR 13
CONFLICT BETWEEN CLOCK MODE AND FIFO SIZE
FIFO size can be other than AUTO only if the clock mode of the data channel is DTE2.
ERROR 14
ILLEGAL UNFRAMED CONFIGURATION
For working in unframed mode, all the 32 time slots must be assigned.
ERROR 15
INVALID MASTER CLOCK SOURCE
The channel you are trying to select as the fallback clock source is either not
connected, or its clock mode is not DTE2. Check and change as required.
ERROR 16
INVALID FALLBACK CLOCK SOURCE
The channel you are trying to select as the master clock source is either not connected,
or its clock mode is not DTE2. Check and change as required.
5-32
Configuration Error Messages
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-5 Configuration Error Messages (Cont.)
Error Code
Terminal Message and Description
ERROR 17
TS 0 IS MAPPED TO G732N FRAME TYPE
You are trying to assign TS 0 for the G732N frame type
ERROR 18
Reserved for future use.
ERROR 19
ILLEGAL PARAMETER FOR CURRENT CONFIGURATION
You are using a parameter which is not supported by this HCD-E1 version or
configuration.
ERROR 20
LOOP IS ACTIVE, CAN’T UPDATE HARDWARE
When a test or loopback is active, it is not possible to change the HCD-E1 operating
mode in accordance with the updated configuration parameters. You may see this
message either after pressing ENTER, or after an update data base command has been
received through the supervisory port (or in-band management). You must first
deactivate the test or loopback.
ERROR 21
CAN’T PERFORM LOOP - CHANNEL NOT CONNECTED
The channel on which you are trying to perform a loop has no time slots assigned to it.
ERROR 22
CAN’T PERFORM LOOP - PORT NOT CONNECTED
You are trying to activate a loopback on an E1 sublink which is not connected (no E1
time slots are mapped to HDSL frame).
ERROR 23
CAN’T DISCONNECT - LOOP IS ACTIVE
You are trying to disconnect a channel while a loop on this channel is currently active.
ERROR 24
CURRENT LOOP IS ALREADY BEING PERFORMED
You are trying to perform a loop which is currently active.
ERROR 25
ILLEGAL COMMAND, LINK IN UNFRAMED MODE
You are trying to set time slot priority bumping while the link is in unframed mode.
ERROR 26*
CHANNEL BERT LOOP IS NOT ACTIVE
You are trying to activate the DSP BERT CH command, while the channel BERT test is
not active.
ERROR 27*
YEAR SHOULD BE IN THE RANGE 1996-2095
You are trying to select an invalid number for the year.
ERROR 28*
ILLEGAL DCD_DEL AND INTERFACE COMBINATION
You are trying to select a non-zero DCD DELAY, while the HCD-E1 supervisory port
interface has been set as DCE.
ERROR 29*
CONFLICT IN INTERFACE AND DSR PARAMETERS
You selected DSR=ON, while the supervisory port interface has been set to DTE. The
DSR=ON selection is valid only for DCE interface.
01/01/01 08:15
Configuration Error Messages
5-33
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
5.6 Power-Up Self-Test
HCD-E1 performs a power-up self-test upon turn-on. The self-test sequence,
described in Section 3-5, tests the critical circuit functions and the display.
In case of failure, HCD-E1 displays an appropriate message in the second
row.
5.7 Troubleshooting
In case a problem occurs, check the displayed alarm messages and refer to
Table 5-1 and the entire Section 5-2 for their interpretation. If the trouble
cannot be corrected by performing the actions listed in Table 5-1, use
Table 5-6 to identify the trouble symptoms. Perform the actions listed under
“Corrective Measures” in the order given in the table, until the problem is
corrected.
Table 5-6 Troubleshooting Chart
No.
Trouble Symptoms
Probable Cause
Corrective Measures
1
HCD-E1 is “dead”.
No power
Check that both ends of the power cable are
properly connected, and that the POWER switch is
ON.
If HCD-E1 is powered from DC, check the polarity of
the power connections.
2
One or both HDSL
LOS LINE indicators
light
Blown fuse
(AC version only)
Disconnect power cable from both ends and replace
the fuse with another fuse of proper rating.
Defective HCD-E1
Replace HCD-E1.
External problem
Check that the remote unit and H-RPT (if there is
one) are operating.
Check for proper connection of the pairs connecting
between the local and the remote units.
Check the loop resistance of the pairs and make sure
the resistance does not exceed the design values.
You may also use a transmission measurement set to
check that loop attenuation is within the allowed
limits.
Defective HCD-E1
5-34
Troubleshooting
Perform a power-up self-test and replace HCD-E1 if
it fails the test.
01/01/01 08:15
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
Table 5-6 Troubleshooting Chart (Cont.)
No.
Trouble Symptoms
Probable Cause
Corrective Measures
3
E1 LOS LOC indicator
lights (sublink loses
frame
synchronization).
External problem
Check the cable connected to the E1 equipment.
4
5
E1 LOS REM indicator
lights (the equipment
connected to the E1
sublink reports loss of
synchronization).
The DTE connected
to the local unit’s
sublink or data
channel does not
receive data
01/01/01 08:15
Perform the physical loop on the sublink while the
E1 equipment connected to the sublink of the
remote HDSL unit continues to send data towards
the local unit. If the E1 LOS LOC indicator turns off,
check the equipment connected to the sublink of the
local unit.
Defective HCD-E1
Perform a power-up self-test and replace HCD-E1 if
it fails the test.
Problem at remote end
of the E1 sublink
Perform the LOOP L SL test. If the E1 LOS REM
indicator turns off, check the cable connected to the
E1 equipment and the equipment itself.
Defective HCD-E1
Perform power-up self-test and replace HCD-E1 if it
fails the test.
Cable problem
Activate the local sublink or local channel loopback.
If the DTE does not receive its own transmission,
check the cable connecting it to the HCD-E1 sublink
or data channel connector.
Defective DTE
Check the DTE.
Defective HCD-E1
Perform a power-up self-test and replace HCD-E1 if
it fails the test.
Troubleshooting
5-35
Chapter 5 - Troubleshooting and Diagnostics
5-36
Troubleshooting
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
01/01/01 08:15
$SSHQGL[$
61030DQDJHPHQW
$6FRSH
7KLVDSSHQGL[SURYLGHVWKHVSHFLILFLQIRUPDWLRQUHTXLUHGIRUWKH
PDQDJHPHQWRI+&'(E\PHDQVRIWKH6LPSOH1HWZRUN0DQDJHPHQW
3URWRFRO6103
$Q+&'(FRQILJXUHGDVDFHQWUDOXQLWVHUYHVDVDSUR[\DJHQWIRUWKH
UHPRWHXQLWWRZKLFKLWLVFRQQHFWHG7KHUHIRUHDQ6103EDVHGQHWZRUN
PDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQFRQQHFWHGWRDFHQWUDO+&'(XQLWFDQSHUIRUPDOOWKH
PDQDJHPHQWIXQFWLRQVDYDLODEOHRQWKHUHPRWHXQLW
$6103(QYLURQPHQW
7KH6103PDQDJHPHQWIXQFWLRQVRI+&'(DUHSURYLGHGE\DQLQWHUQDO
6103DJHQWZKLFKFRPPXQLFDWHVWKURXJKWKH+&'(FRQWUROSRUWXVLQJ
WKH6HULDO/LQN,QWHUQHW3URWRFRO6/,3
*HQHUDO
7KH6103PDQDJHPHQWFRPPXQLFDWLRQXVHVWKH8VHU'DWDJUDP3URWRFRO
8'38'3LVDFRQQHFWLRQOHVVPRGHWUDQVSRUWSURWRFROSDUWRIWKHVXLWHRI
SURWRFROVRIWKH,QWHUQHW3URWRFRO,3
1RWH
7HOQHWPDQDJHPHQWXVHVWKH7&3SURWRFRORYHU,3IRUPDQDJHPHQW
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ$IWHUD7HOQHWVHVVLRQLVVWDUWHGWKHPDQDJHPHQWLQWHUIDFHLV
VLPLODUWRWKDWXVHGIRUWKHVXSHUYLVLRQWHUPLQDOVHH&KDSWHU
7KLVVHFWLRQFRYHUVWKHLQIRUPDWLRQUHODWHGWRWKH6103HQYLURQPHQW)RUD
GHVFULSWLRQRIWKH,3HQYLURQPHQWUHIHUWR6HFWLRQ$
61033ULQFLSOHV
7KH6103PDQDJHPHQWSURWRFROLVDQDV\QFKURQRXVFRPPDQGUHVSRQVH
SROOLQJSURWRFRODOOWKHPDQDJHPHQWWUDIILFH[FHSWIRUWUDSPHVVDJHVLV
LQLWLDWHGE\WKH6103EDVHGQHWZRUNPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQZKLFKDGGUHVVHV
WKHPDQDJHGHQWLWLHVLQLWVPDQDJHPHQWGRPDLQ2QO\WKHDGGUHVVHG
PDQDJHGHQWLW\DQVZHUVWKHSROOLQJRIWKHPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQ
7KHPDQDJHGHQWLWLHVLQFOXGHDIXQFWLRQFDOOHGDQ´6103DJHQWµZKLFKLV
UHVSRQVLEOHIRULQWHUSUHWDWLRQDQGKDQGOLQJRIWKHPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQ
UHTXHVWVWRWKHPDQDJHGHQWLW\DQGWKHJHQHUDWLRQRISURSHUO\IRUPDWWHG
UHVSRQVHVWRWKHPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQ
30
6103(QYLURQPHQW
$
$SSHQGL[$61030DQDJHPHQW
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
61032SHUDWLRQV
7KH6103SURWRFROLQFOXGHVIRXUW\SHVRIRSHUDWLRQV
JHW5HTXHVW
&RPPDQGIRUUHWULHYLQJVSHFLILFPDQDJHPHQW
LQIRUPDWLRQIURPWKHPDQDJHGHQWLW\7KHPDQDJHG
HQWLW\UHVSRQGVZLWKDJHW5HVSRQVHPHVVDJH
JHW1H[W5HTXHVW
&RPPDQGIRUUHWULHYLQJVHTXHQWLDOO\VSHFLILF
PDQDJHPHQWLQIRUPDWLRQIURPWKHPDQDJHGHQWLW\7KH
PDQDJHGHQWLW\UHVSRQGVZLWKDJHW5HVSRQVHPHVVDJH
VHW5HTXHVW
&RPPDQGIRUPDQLSXODWLQJVSHFLILFPDQDJHPHQW
LQIRUPDWLRQZLWKLQWKHPDQDJHGHQWLW\7KHPDQDJHG
HQWLW\UHVSRQGVZLWKDVHW5HVSRQVHPHVVDJH
WUDS
0DQDJHPHQWPHVVDJHFDUU\LQJXQVROLFLWHGLQIRUPDWLRQ
RQH[WUDRUGLQDU\HYHQWVWKDWLVHYHQWVZKLFKRFFXUUHG
QRWLQUHVSRQVHWRDPDQDJHPHQWRSHUDWLRQUHSRUWHGE\
WKHPDQDJHGHQWLW\
7KH0DQDJHPHQW,QIRUPDWLRQ%DVH
7KHPDQDJHPHQWLQIRUPDWLRQEDVH0,%LQFOXGHVDFROOHFWLRQRIPDQDJHG
REMHFWV$PDQDJHGREMHFWLVGHILQHGDVDSDUDPHWHUWKDWFDQEHPDQDJHG
VXFKDVDSHUIRUPDQFHVWDWLVWLFVYDOXH
7KH0,%LQFOXGHVWKHGHILQLWLRQVRIUHOHYDQWPDQDJHGREMHFWV9DULRXV0,%
V
FDQEHGHILQHGIRUYDULRXVPDQDJHPHQWSXUSRVHVW\SHVRIHTXLSPHQWHWF
$QREMHFW
VGHILQLWLRQLQFOXGHVWKHUDQJHRIYDOXHVDOVRFDOOHG´LQVWDQFHVµ
DQGWKH´DFFHVVµULJKWV
5HDGRQO\
2EMHFWYDOXHFDQEHUHDGEXWFDQQRWEHVHW
5HDGZULWH
2EMHFWYDOXHFDQEHUHDGRUVHW
1RWDFFHVVLEOH
2EMHFWYDOXHFDQQHLWKHUEHUHDGQRUVHW
0,%6WUXFWXUH
7KH0,%KDVDQLQYHUWHGWUHHOLNHVWUXFWXUHZLWKHDFKGHILQLWLRQRID
PDQDJHGREMHFWIRUPLQJRQHOHDIORFDWHGDWWKHHQGRIDEUDQFKRIWKDWWUHH
(DFK´OHDIµLQWKH0,%LVUHDFKHGE\DXQLTXHSDWKWKHUHIRUHE\QXPEHULQJ
WKHEUDQFKLQJSRLQWVVWDUWLQJZLWKWKHWRSHDFKOHDIFDQEHXQLTXHO\
GHILQHGE\DVHTXHQFHRIQXPEHUV7KHIRUPDOGHVFULSWLRQRIWKHPDQDJHG
REMHFWVDQGWKH0,%VWUXFWXUHLVSURYLGHGLQDVSHFLDOVWDQGDUGL]HGIRUPDW
FDOOHG$EVWUDFW6\QWD[1RWDWLRQ$61
6LQFHWKHJHQHUDOFROOHFWLRQRI0,%
VFDQDOVREHRUJDQL]HGLQDVLPLODU
VWUXFWXUHXQGHUWKHVXSHUYLVLRQRIWKH,QWHUQHW$FWLYLWLHV%RDUG,$%DQ\
SDUDPHWHULQFOXGHGLQD0,%WKDWLVUHFRJQL]HGE\WKH,$%LVXQLTXHO\
GHILQHG
7RSURYLGHWKHIOH[LELOLW\QHFHVVDU\LQDJOREDOVWUXFWXUH0,%
VDUHFODVVLILHG
LQYDULRXVFODVVHVEUDQFKHVRQHRIWKHPEHLQJWKHH[SHULPHQWDOEUDQFK
DQGDQRWKHUWKHJURXSRISULYDWHHQWHUSULVHVSHFLILFEUDQFKHV8QGHUWKH
$
6103(QYLURQPHQW
30
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
$SSHQGL[$61030DQDJHPHQW
SULYDWHHQWHUSULVHVSHFLILFEUDQFKRI0,%
VHDFKHQWHUSULVHPDQXIDFWXUHU
FDQEHDVVLJQHGDQXPEHUZKLFKLVLWVHQWHUSULVHQXPEHU7KHDVVLJQHG
QXPEHUGHVLJQDWHVWKHWRSRIDQHQWHUSULVHVSHFLILFVXEWUHHRIQRQVWDQGDUG
0,%
V:LWKLQWKLVFRQWH[W5$'KDVEHHQDVVLJQHGWKHHQWHUSULVHQXPEHU
7KHUHIRUHHQWHUSULVH0,%
VSXEOLVKHGE\5$'FDQEHIRXQGXQGHU
0,%
VRIJHQHUDOLQWHUHVWDUHSXEOLVKHGE\WKH,$%LQWKHIRUPRID5HTXHVW
IRU&RPPHQW5)&GRFXPHQW,QDGGLWLRQ0,%
VDUHDOVRRIWHQDVVLJQHG
LQIRUPDOQDPHVWKDWUHIOHFWWKHLUSULPDU\SXUSRVH(QWHUSULVHVSHFLILF0,%
V
DUHSXEOLVKHGDQGGLVWULEXWHGE\WKHLURULJLQDWRUZKLFKLVUHVSRQVLEOHIRU
WKHLUFRQWHQWV
0,%
V6XSSRUWHGE\WKH+&'(6103$JHQW
7KHLQWHUSUHWDWLRQRIWKHUHOHYDQW0,%
VLVDIXQFWLRQRIWKH6103DJHQWRI
HDFKPDQDJHGHQWLW\7KHJHQHUDO0,%
VVXSSRUWHGE\WKH+&'(6103
DJHQWDUHDVIROORZV
•
5)&VWDQGDUG0,%,,
•
5)&VWDQGDUG(70,%
,QDGGLWLRQWKH+&'(6103DJHQWVXSSRUWVWKH5$'SULYDWHHQWHUSULVH
VSHFLILF0,%LGHQWLILHGDVUHDGWKHIROORZLQJDVDFRQWLQXRXVVWULQJ
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4).enterprises(1).
rad(164).radGen(6).systems(1).radSysWAN(3).radHcdE1Sa(51).
(QWHUSULVHVSHFLILF0,%
VVXSSRUWHGE\5$'HTXLSPHQWLQFOXGLQJWKRVHIRU
WKH+&'(DUHDYDLODEOHLQ$61IRUPDWIURPWKH5$'7HFKQLFDO6XSSRUW
'HSDUWPHQW
0DQDJHPHQW
'RPDLQV8QGHU
6103
6103HQDEOHVLQSULQFLSOHHDFKPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQWKDWNQRZVWKH0,%
V
VXSSRUWHGE\DGHYLFHWRSHUIRUPDOOWKHPDQDJHPHQWRSHUDWLRQVDYDLODEOH
RQWKDWGHYLFH+RZHYHUWKLVLVQRWGHVLUDEOHLQSUDFWLFDOVLWXDWLRQVVRLWLV
QHFHVVDU\WRSURYLGHDPHDQVWRGHOLPLWPDQDJHPHQWGRPDLQV
6103&RPPXQLWLHV
7RHQDEOHWKHGHOLPLWDWLRQRIPDQDJHPHQWGRPDLQV6103XVHV
´FRPPXQLWLHVµ(DFKFRPPXQLW\LVLGHQWLILHGE\DQDPHZKLFKLVDQ
DOSKDQXPHULFVWULQJRIXSWRFKDUDFWHUVGHILQHGE\WKHXVHU
$Q\6103HQWLW\WKLVWHUPLQFOXGHVERWKPDQDJHGHQWLWLHVDQG
PDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQVLVDVVLJQHGE\LWVXVHUDFRPPXQLW\QDPH
30
6103(QYLURQPHQW
$
$SSHQGL[$61030DQDJHPHQW
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
$FFHVV5HVWULFWLRQ8VLQJ6103&RPPXQLWLHV
,QJHQHUDO6103DJHQWVVXSSRUWWZRW\SHVRIDFFHVVULJKWV
•
5HDGRQO\WKH6103DJHQWDFFHSWVDQGSURFHVVHV6103JHW5HTXHVW
DQGJHW1H[W5HTXHVWFRPPDQGVRQO\IURPPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQVZKLFK
KDYHWKHVDPHUHDGRQO\FRPPXQLW\QDPH
•
5HDGZULWHWKH6103DJHQWDFFHSWVDQGSURFHVVHVDOOWKH6103
FRPPDQGVUHFHLYHGIURPDPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQZLWKWKHVDPHUHDGZULWH
FRPPXQLW\QDPH
)RUHDFK6103HQWLW\LWLVSRVVLEOHWRGHILQHDOLVWRIWKHFRPPXQLWLHVZKLFK
DUHDXWKRUL]HGWRFRPPXQLFDWHZLWKLWDQGWKHDFFHVVULJKWVDVVRFLDWHGZLWK
HDFKFRPPXQLW\WKLVLVWKH6103FRPPXQLW\QDPHVWDEOHRIWKHHQWLW\)RU
H[DPSOHWKH6103FRPPXQLW\QDPHVWDEOHRIWKH+&'(FDQLQFOXGH
WKUHHFRPPXQLW\QDPHV
,QDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH6103SURWRFROWKH6103FRPPXQLW\RIWKH
RULJLQDWLQJHQWLW\LVVHQWLQHDFKPHVVDJH
:KHQDQ6103PHVVDJHLVUHFHLYHGE\WKHDGGUHVVHGHQWLW\ILUVWLWFKHFNV
WKHRULJLQDWRU
VFRPPXQLW\LIWKHFRPPXQLW\QDPHRIWKHPHVVDJH
RULJLQDWRUGLIIHUVIURPWKHFRPPXQLW\QDPHVSHFLILHGIRUWKDWW\SHRI
PHVVDJHLQWKHDJHQWWKHPHVVDJHLWGLVFDUGHG6103DJHQWVRIPDQDJHG
HQWLWLHVUHSRUWWKLVHYHQWE\PHDQVRIDQDXWKHQWLFDWLRQIDLOXUHWUDS
+&'(&RPPXQLWLHV
7KH6103DJHQWRIWKH+&'(FDQXVHWKHIROORZLQJFRPPXQLW\W\SHV
5HDG
6103FRPPXQLW\WKDWKDVUHDGRQO\DXWKRUL]DWLRQLHWKH
6103DJHQWZLOODFFHSWJHW5HTXHVWDQGJHW1H[W5HTXHVW
FRPPDQGVRQO\IURPPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQVXVLQJWKDW
FRPPXQLW\
7KHGHIDXOWUHDGRQO\FRPPXQLW\IRU5$'QHWZRUN
PDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQVLVSXEOLF
:ULWH
6103FRPPXQLW\WKDWKDVUHDGZULWHDXWKRUL]DWLRQLHWKH
6103DJHQWZLOODOVRDFFHSWVHW5HTXHVWFRPPDQGVIURP
PDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQVXVLQJWKDWFRPPXQLW\
7KHGHIDXOWUHDGZULWHFRPPXQLW\IRU5$'QHWZRUN
PDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQVLVSULYDWH
7UDS
6103FRPPXQLW\ZKLFKWKH6103DJHQWZLOOVHQGZLWKLQ
WUDSPHVVDJHV
7KHGHIDXOWWUDSFRPPXQLW\IRU5$'QHWZRUNPDQDJHPHQW
VWDWLRQVLVSXEOLF
$
,3(QYLURQPHQW
30
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
$SSHQGL[$61030DQDJHPHQW
$,3(QYLURQPHQW
7KH6103DJHQWRI+&'(FDQFRPPXQLFDWHHLWKHURXWRIEDQGRULQEDQG
*HQHUDO
1RWHV
•
2XWRIEDQGFRPPXQLFDWLRQLVSHUIRUPHGYLDWKH&21752/'&(SRUW
7KHFRPPXQLFDWLRQXVHVWKH6HULDO/LQN,QWHUQHW3URWRFRO6/,3
•
,QEDQGFRPPXQLFDWLRQLVSHUIRUPHGYLDDGHGLFDWHGWLPHVORW'76RQ
RQHRIWKHOLQNVPDLQRUVXERUERWKRIWKHPDQGXVHVDSURSULHWDU\
SURWRFRO7KHXVHUFDQVHOHFWWKHZD\RIKRZLQEDQGPDQDJHPHQWWUDIILF
LVFDUULHGRQWKHVXEOLQNE\WKH6DELWRI76VXSSRUWVDGDWDUDWHRI
NESVRUE\DGHGLFDWHGWLPHVORWVXSSRUWVDGDWDUDWHRINESV7KH
GDWDUDWHVXSSRUWHGE\DGHGLFDWHGWLPHVORWRQWKHPDLQOLQNLVNESV
7KHQXPEHURIWLPHVORWVGHILQHGDVGHGLFDWHGPXVWEHWKHVDPHRQWKH
PDLQOLQNDQGWKHVXEOLQN
7KHGDWDUDWHRILQEDQGFRPPXQLFDWLRQYLDERWKOLQNVGHSHQGVRQWKHGDWD
UDWHWKURXJKWKHVXEOLQNRUNESV
$WLPHVORWRIWKHPDLQOLQNXVHGIRULQEDQGPDQDJHPHQWFDQQRWEHXVHG
WRFDUU\XVHU·VGDWD
7KHXVHUFDQVHSDUDWHO\HQDEOHWKHXVHRIRXWRIEDQGFRPPXQLFDWLRQDQG
RILQEDQGFRPPXQLFDWLRQRQHDFKOLQNPDLQDQGRUVXE
*HQHUDO
7KH6103DJHQWRIWKH+&'(FDQFRPPXQLFDWHRXWRIEDQGXVLQJWKH
6HULDO/LQN,QWHUQHW3URWRFRO6/,3
,3(QYLURQPHQW
7KH6103DJHQWRIWKH+&'(XVHVHLWKHUWKH8'3RUWKH7&3WUDQVSRUW
SURWRFROSDUWRIWKHVXLWHRI,3SURWRFROV
,3$GGUHVV6WUXFWXUH
8QGHUWKH,3SURWRFROHDFK,3QHWZRUNHOHPHQW6103DJHQWVQHWZRUN
PDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQVHWFLVFDOOHGDQ,3KRVWDQGPXVWEHDVVLJQHGDQ,3
DGGUHVV$Q,3DGGUHVVLVDELWQXPEHUXVXDOO\UHSUHVHQWHGDVIRXUELW
E\WHV(DFKE\WHUHSUHVHQWVDGHFLPDOQXPEHULQWKHUDQJHRIWKURXJK
7KHDGGUHVVLVJLYHQLQGHFLPDOIRUPDWZLWKWKHE\WHVVHSDUDWHGE\GHFLPDO
SRLQWVHJ7KLVIRUPDWLVFDOOHGGRWWHGTXDGQRWDWLRQ
$Q,3DGGUHVVLVORJLFDOO\GLYLGHGLQWRWZRPDLQSRUWLRQV
1HWZRUN3RUWLRQ7KHQHWZRUNSRUWLRQLVDVVLJQHGE\WKH,QWHUQHW$VVLJQHG
1XPEHUV$XWKRULW\,$1$7KHUHDUHILYH,3DGGUHVVFODVVHV$%&'DQG
(+RZHYHURQO\WKHFODVVHV$%DQG&DUHXVHGIRU,3DGGUHVVLQJ&RQVXOW
\RXUQHWZRUNPDQDJHUZLWKUHVSHFWWRWKHFODVVRI,3DGGUHVVHVXVHGRQ\RXU
QHWZRUN
7KHQHWZRUNSRUWLRQRIDQ,3DGGUHVVFDQEHRQHWZRRUWKUHHE\WHVORQJLQ
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH,3DGGUHVVFODVV7KLVDUUDQJHPHQWLVLOOXVWUDWHGEHORZ
30
,3(QYLURQPHQW
$
$SSHQGL[$61030DQDJHPHQW
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
,3$''5(66
%\WH
&ODVV$
%\WH
1HWZRUN3RUWLRQ
&ODVV%
&ODVV&
%\WH
%\WH
+RVW3RUWLRQ
1HWZRUN3RUWLRQ
+RVW3RUWLRQ
1HWZRUN3RUWLRQ
+RVW3RUWLRQ
7KHFODVVRIHDFK,3DGGUHVVFDQEHGHWHUPLQHGIURPLWVOHIWPRVWE\WHLQ
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHIROORZLQJFKDUW
$GGUHVV&ODVV
)LUVW%\WH
$GGUHVV5DQJH
&ODVV$
WR
+++WR+++
&ODVV%
WR
1++WR1++
&ODVV&
WR
11+WR11+
1LQGLFDWHVE\WHVWKDWDUHSDUWRIWKHQHWZRUNSRUWLRQ
+LQGLFDWHVE\WHVWKDWDUHSDUWRIWKHKRVWSRUWLRQ
+RVW3RUWLRQ7KHKRVWSRUWLRQLVXVHGWRLGHQWLI\DQLQGLYLGXDOKRVW
FRQQHFWHGWRWKHQHWZRUN7KHKRVWLGHQWLILHULVDVVLJQHGE\WKHXVLQJ
RUJDQL]DWLRQLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKLWVVSHFLILFQHHGV
1RWH
7KHDOO]HURKRVWLGHQWLILHULVDOZD\VLQWHUSUHWHGDVDQHWZRUNLGHQWLILHUDQG
PXVWQRWEHDVVLJQHGWRDQDFWXDOKRVW
2IWHQWKHKRVWSRUWLRQLVIXUWKHUVXEGLYLGHGLQWRWZRSRUWLRQV
− 6XEQHWQXPEHU)RUH[DPSOHVXEQHWQXPEHUVFDQEHXVHGWR
LGHQWLI\GHSDUWPHQWDOVXEQHWZRUNV7KHVXEQHWQXPEHUIROORZVWKH
QHWZRUNLGHQWLILHU
− +RVWQXPEHUWKHODVWELWVRIWKH,3DGGUHVV
$
,3(QYLURQPHQW
30
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
$SSHQGL[$61030DQDJHPHQW
$XWRPDWLF5RXWLQJRI,37UDIILF
7KH6103DJHQWRIWKH+&'(XQLWVLQFOXGHVDSURSULHWDU\,3URXWHU
IXQFWLRQWKDWLVXVHGWRURXWHPDQDJHPHQWPHVVDJHVDXWRPDWLFDOO\
7KHSURSULHWDU\,3URXWHURSHUDWHVERWKRQWKHLQEDQGDVZHOODVRQWKH
RXWRIEDQGWUDIILFGHSHQGLQJRQWKHFRPPXQLFDWLRQPHWKRGVWKDWKDYH
EHHQHQDEOHG
7KHURXWHURIHDFK6103DJHQWFROOHFWVLQIRUPDWLRQRQWKHRWKHU6103
DJHQWVZKRVHPHVVDJHVSDVVWKURXJKE\PRQLWRULQJWKH,3VRXUFHDQG
GHVWLQDWLRQDGGUHVVHVRIWKH,3PHVVDJHVDQGFRPELQLQJWKLVLQIRUPDWLRQ
ZLWKWKHLQIRUPDWLRQRQWKHGLUHFWLRQWRWKHPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQ7KLV
DXWRPDWLFOHDUQLQJFDSDELOLW\HQDEOHVXVLQJDQ\QHWZRUNWRSRORJ\LQFOXGLQJ
WRSRORJLHVZLWKFORVHGORRSV
$61037UDSV
7KH6103DJHQWRI+&'(VXSSRUWVWKHVWDQGDUG0,%,,WUDSV,QDGGLWLRQ
+&'(UHSRUWVDODUPFRQGLWLRQVWRWKHPDQDJHPHQWVWDWLRQE\PHDQRI
VSHFLILFWUDSV
:KHQDQDODUPFRQGLWLRQRFFXUV+&'(VHQGVDPRGP6D$ODUP7UDS
ZKLFKFDUULHVDOOWKHDODUPVDFWLYHDWWKHWLPHWKHWUDSLVVHQW
:KHQHYHU/('VRQLWVIURQWSDQHOFKDQJHVWDWH+&'(VHQGVD
PRGP6D/HG7UDSZKLFKUHSRUWVWKHVWDWHRIWKH/('VRQERWKWKHORFDO
FHQWUDODQGUHPRWH+&'(XQLWV
30
61037UDSV
$
$SSHQGL[$61030DQDJHPHQW
$
61037UDSV
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
30
$SSHQGL[%
&RQQHFWRU:LULQJ
%(6XEOLQN&RQQHFWRUV
7KH(VXEOLQNXQEDODQFHGLQWHUIDFHLVWHUPLQDWHGLQWZR%1&FRQQHFWRUV
GHVLJQDWHG7;,1DQG5;287
7KH(VXEOLQNEDODQFHGLQWHUIDFHLVWHUPLQDWHGLQDQHLJKWSLQ5-
FRQQHFWRUGHVLJQDWHG'7(DQGZLUHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK7DEOH%
7DEOH%'7(&RQQHFWRU3LQ$OORFDWLRQ
3LQ
)XQFWLRQ
7UDQVPLW'DWD2XWSXWWLS
7UDQVPLW'DWD2XWSXWULQJ
)UDPH*URXQG
5HFHLYH'DWD,QSXWWLS
5HFHLYH'DWD,QSXWULQJ
)UDPH*URXQG
1RW&RQQHFWHG
%+'6//LQHV&RQQHFWRU
7KH+'6/OLQHVDUHWHUPLQDWHGLQDQHLJKWSLQ5-FRQQHFWRUGHVLJQDWHG
1(7:25.+'6/DQGZLUHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK7DEOH%
30
+'6//LQHV&RQQHFWRU
%
$SSHQGL[%&RQQHFWRU:LULQJ
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
7DEOH%1(7:25.+'6/&RQQHFWRU3LQ$OORFDWLRQ
3LQ
)XQFWLRQ
/LQH$
/LQH$
1RW&RQQHFWHG
/LQH%
/LQH%
1RW&RQQHFWHG
%'&(,QWHUIDFH&RQQHFWRUVDQG$GDSWHU&DEOHV
+&'(KDVWZRGDWDSRUWVHDFKWHUPLQDWHGLQDSLQ'W\SHIHPDOH
FRQQHFWRU7KHXQLWVZLWKDQ(WKHUQHWLQWHUIDFHDUULYHZLWKWKH(WKHUQHW
LQWHUIDFHPRGXOHEXLOWLQWKHXSSHUSRUW)RUWKHGHVFULSWLRQRIWKH(WKHUQHW
LQWHUIDFH VHH$SSHQGL[&
7KLVVHFWLRQGHVFULEHVWKHZLULQJRI+&'(FRQQHFWRUVDQGDGDSWRUFDEOHV
IRUGLIIHUHQWYHUVLRQVDQGRSHUDWLQJPRGHVRIWKHXQLW1DPHVRIUHDG\PDGH
FDEOHVDYDLODEOHIURP5$'DUHOLVWHGLQ7DEOHLQ&KDSWHU
%
'&(,QWHUIDFH&RQQHFWRUVDQG$GDSWHU&DEOHV
30
$SSHQGL[%&RQQHFWRU:LULQJ
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
56,QWHUIDFH
:KHQ+&'(LVRUGHUHGZLWKDQ56LQWHUIDFHWKHSK\VLFDOLQWHUIDFHLV
DSLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUZLUHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK7DEOH%7KLVLQWHUIDFH
LVUHDG\IRUZRUNLQJLQWKH'&(WLPLQJPRGH7RKDYH+&'(ZRUNLQJLQD
'7(RU'7(PRGH\RXPXVWSUHSDUHDFURVVFDEOHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH
WZRODVWFROXPQVRIWKHWDEOH
7DEOH% 56'&(&RQQHFWRU
3LQ
'HVLJ
QDWLRQ
'LUHFWLRQ
)XQFWLRQ
'7(
'7(
)*
↔
)UDPH*URXQG
6'$
7R+&'(
6HQG'DWDZLUH$
5'$
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH'DWDZLUH$
576$
7R+&'(
5HTXHVWWR6HQG576ZLUH$
&76$
)URP+&'(
&OHDUWR6HQG&76ZLUH$
'65$
)URP+&'(
'DWD6HW5HDG\'65ZLUH$
6*
↔
6LJQDO*URXQG
'&'$
)URP+&'(
&DUULHU'HWHFW'&'ZLUH$
5&%
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH%
'&'%
)URP+&'(
&DUULHU'HWHFW'&'ZLUH%
6&(%
7R+&'(
6HQG([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH%
6&%
)URP+&'(
6HQG&ORFNZLUH%
&76%
)URP+&'(
&OHDUWR6HQG&76ZLUH%
6'%
7R+&'(
6HQG'DWDZLUH%
6&$
)URP+&'(
6HQG&ORFNZLUH$
5'%
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH'DWDZLUH%
5&$
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH$
//
7R+&'(
/RFDO/RRSEDFN9/RRS
576%
7R+&'(
5HTXHVWWR6HQG576ZLUH%
'75$5&(
$
7R+&'(
'DWD7HUPLQDO5HDG\'75ZLUH
$5HFHLYH([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH$
5/
7R+&'(
5HPRWH/RRSEDFN9/RRS
'65%
)URP+&'(
'DWD6HW5HDG\'65ZLUH%
'75%5&(
%
7R+&'(
'DWD7HUPLQDO5HDG\'75ZLUH
%5HFHLYH([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH%
6&($
7R+&'(
6HQG([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH$
70
)URP+&'(
7HVW,QGLFDWRU
30
'&(,QWHUIDFH&RQQHFWRUVDQG$GDSWHU&DEOHV
%
$SSHQGL[%&RQQHFWRU:LULQJ
956
,QWHUIDFH
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
:KHQ\RXRUGHUDQ+&'(ZLWKWKH956LQWHUIDFHLWDUULYHV
ZLWKD5$'DGDSWRUFDEOH&%/+65HQDEOLQJLWWRZRUNLQWKH'&(PRGH
&DEOHV&%/+65DQG&%/+65HQDEOLQJ+&'(WRZRUNLQWKH'7(
DQG'7(PRGHVUHVSHFWLYHO\PXVWEHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\7DEOH%OLVWV
WKHSLQRXWRIWKH956DGDSWRUFDEOHVIRUDOOWKHWKUHHWLPLQJ
PRGHV'&('7(DQG'7(
7DEOH% 956$GDSWRU&DEOHV
3LQ
'HVLJ
QDWLRQ
'LUHFWLRQ
)XQFWLRQ
'&(
'7(
'7(
)*
↔
)UDPH*URXQG
6'$
7R+&'(
6HQG'DWDZLUH$
5'$
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH'DWDZLUH$
576$
7R+&'(
5HTXHVWWR6HQG576ZLUH$
&76$
)URP+&'(
&OHDUWR6HQG&76ZLUH$
'65$
)URP+&'(
'DWD6HW5HDG\'65ZLUH$
6*
↔
6LJQDO*URXQG
'&'$
)URP+&'(
&DUULHU'HWHFW'&'ZLUH$
5&%
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH%
²
'&'%
)URP+&'(
&DUULHU'HWHFW'&'ZLUH%
6&(%
7R+&'(
6HQG([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH%
6&%
)URP+&'(
6HQG&ORFNZLUH%
&76%
)URP+&'(
&OHDUWR6HQG&76ZLUH%
6'%
7R+&'(
6HQG'DWDZLUH%
6&$
)URP+&'(
6HQG&ORFNZLUH$
5'%
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH'DWDZLUH%
5&$
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH$
²
²
1$
1RW&RQQHFWHG
²
²
²
576%
7R+&'(
5HTXHVWWR6HQG576ZLUH%
5&($
7R+&'(
5HFHLYH([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH$
²
²
²
1$
1RW&RQQHFWHG
²
²
²
'65%
)URP+&'(
'DWD6HW5HDG\'65ZLUH%
5&(%
7R+&'(
5HFHLYH([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH%
²
²
6&($
7R+&'(
6HQG([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH$
²
1$
1RW&RQQHFWHG
²
²
²
%
'&(,QWHUIDFH&RQQHFWRUVDQG$GDSWHU&DEOHV
30
$SSHQGL[%&RQQHFWRU:LULQJ
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
:KHQ\RXRUGHUDQ+&'(ZLWKWKH9LQWHUIDFHLWDUULYHVZLWKD5$'
DGDSWRUFDEOH&%/+69HQDEOLQJLWWRZRUNLQWKH'&(PRGH&DEOHV
&%/+69DQG&%/+69HQDEOLQJ+&'(WRZRUNLQWKH'7(DQG
'7(PRGHVUHVSHFWLYHO\PXVWEHRUGHUHGVHSDUDWHO\7DEOH%OLVWVWKH
SLQRXWRIWKH9DGDSWRUFDEOHVIRUDOOWKHWKUHHWLPLQJPRGHV'&('7(
DQG'7(
9,QWHUIDFH
7DEOH% 9$GDSWHU&DEOHV
3LQ
'HVLJ
QDWLRQ
'LUHFWLRQ
)XQFWLRQ
'&(
'7(
'7(
)*
↔
)UDPH*URXQG
$
$
$
6'$
7R+&'(
6HQG'DWDZLUH$
3
5
5
5'$
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH'DWDZLUH$
5
3
3
576$
7R+&'(
5HTXHVWWR6HQG576ZLUH$
&
)
)
&76$
)URP+&'(
&OHDUWR6HQG&76ZLUH$
'
²
²
'65$
)URP+&'(
'DWD6HW5HDG\'65ZLUH$
(
+
+
6*
↔
6LJQDO*URXQG
%
%
%
'&'$
)URP+&'(
&DUULHU'HWHFW'&'ZLUH$
)
&
&
5&%
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH%
;
:
²
'&'%
)URP+&'(
&DUULHU'HWHFW'&'ZLUH%
²
²
²
6&(%
7R+&'(
6HQG([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH%
:
;
;
6&%
)URP+&'(
6HQG&ORFNZLUH%
$$
²
²
&76%
)URP+&'(
&OHDUWR6HQG&76ZLUH%
²
²
²
6'%
7R+&'(
6HQG'DWDZLUH%
6
7
7
6&$
)URP+&'(
6HQG&ORFNZLUH$
<
²
²
5'%
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH'DWDZLUH%
7
6
6
5&$
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH$
9
8
²
²
1$
1RW&RQQHFWHG
²
²
²
576%
7R+&'(
5HTXHVWWR6HQG576ZLUH%
²
²
²
5&($
7R+&'(
5HFHLYH([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH$
²
²
<
²
1$
1RW&RQQHFWHG
²
²
²
'65%
)URP+&'(
'DWD6HW5HDG\'65ZLUH%
²
²
²
5&(%
7R+&'(
5HFHLYH([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH%
²
²
$$
6&($
7R+&'(
6HQG([WHUQDO&ORFNZLUH$
8
9
9
²
1$
1RW&RQQHFWHG
²
²
²
30
'&(,QWHUIDFH&RQQHFWRUVDQG$GDSWHU&DEOHV
%
$SSHQGL[%&RQQHFWRU:LULQJ
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
:KHQ\RXRUGHUDQ;LQWHUIDFHLWDUULYHVZLWKWKH'&(WLPLQJPRGHFDEOH
&%/+6;7DEOH%OLVWVLWVSLQRXW
;,QWHUIDFH
7DEOH% ;$GDSWRU&DEOH
3LQ
%
'LUHFWLRQ 'HVLJQDWLRQ )XQFWLRQ
'&(
↔
)*
)UDPH*URXQG
,QSXW
6'$
6HQG'DWDZLUH$
2XWSXW
5'$
5HFHLYH'DWDZLUH$
,QSXW
576$
576ZLUH$
2XWSXW
&76$
&76ZLUH$
²
2XWSXW
'65$
'65ZLUH$
²
↔
6*
6LJQDO*URXQG
2XWSXW
'&'$
'&'ZLUH$
2XWSXW
5&%
5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH%
²
2XWSXW
'&'%
'&'ZLUH%
,QSXW
6&(%
([WHUQDO6HQG&ORFNZLUH%
2XWSXW
6&%
6HQG&ORFNZLUH%
2XWSXW
&76%
&76ZLUH%
²
,QSXW
6'%
6HQG'DWDZLUH%
2XWSXW
6&$
6HQG&ORFNZLUH$
2XWSXW
5'%
5HFHLYH'DWDZLUH%
2XWSXW
5&$
5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH$
²
1$
²
1RWFRQQHFWHG
²
,QSXW
576%
576ZLUH%
,QSXW
5&($
([WHUQDO5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH$
²
1$
²
1RWFRQQHFWHG
²
2XWSXW
'65%
'65ZLUH%
²
,QSXW
5&(%
([WHUQDO5HFHLYH&ORFNZLUH%
²
,QSXW
6&($
([WHUQDO6HQG&ORFNZLUH$
²
1$
²
1RWFRQQHFWHG
²
&RQWURO3RUW&RQQHFWRU
²
30
$SSHQGL[%&RQQHFWRU:LULQJ
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
%&RQWURO3RUW&RQQHFWRU
7KH+&'(FRQWUROSRUWKDVDVWDQGDUG569LQWHUIDFH7KH
SK\VLFDOLQWHUIDFHLVDSLQIHPDOHFRQQHFWRUGHVLJQDWHG&21752/'&(
DQGZLUHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK7DEOH%
7DEOH%DOVRGHVFULEHVWKHFRQQHFWLRQWRWKH56LQWHUIDFHRIDFRQWURO
WHUPLQDODQGWKHFRQQHFWLRQWRDGLDORXWPRGHP7KHWHUPLQDODQGWKH
PRGHPDUHDVVXPHGWRKDYH'W\SHSLQFRQQHFWRUV
7DEOH%&RQWURO3RUW,QWHUIDFH6LJQDOV
3LQRIWKH
+&'(
&RQQHFWRU
/LQH
1RWH
3LQRI&RQWURO
7HUPLQDO
&RQQHFWRU
3LQRI'LDO2XW
0RGHP
&RQQHFWRU
'DWD&DUULHU'HWHFW'&'
)URP+&'(
5HFHLYH'DWD5'
)URP+&'(
7UDQVPLW'DWD7'
7R+&'(
'DWD7HUPLQDO5HDG\'75
7R+&'(
6LJQDO*URXQG6,*
&RPPRQ
UHIHUHQFHDQG'&
SRZHUVXSSO\
JURXQG
'DWD6HW5HDG\'65
)URP+&'(
5HTXHVWWR6HQG576
7R+&'(
&OHDUWR6HQG&76
)URP+&'(
30
&RQWURO3RUW&RQQHFWRU
%
$SSHQGL[%&RQQHFWRU:LULQJ
%
&RQWURO3RUW&RQQHFWRU
+&'(,QVWDOODWLRQ2SHUDWLRQ0DQXDO
30
Appendix C
IR-ETH Interface Module
C.1 General Description
IR-ETH is an interface module for RAD modems, used for converting the
Ethernet (10BaseT or 10Base2) electrical levels to the modem TTL levels. It
also converts the Ethernet protocol to HDLC to enable long-distance
transmission and avoid the Ethernet collision limitation.
IR-ETH includes an internal, self-learning Ethernet bridge, which enables a
high performance link between two Ethernet segments at a low transmission
rate. The low-speed HDLC transmission is sent over the link using the
modem modulation technique, and then converted back to an Ethernet
signal at the remote modem.
Figure C-1 shows a typical application using an Ethernet interface bridge.
Each modem is connected to an Ethernet network via the Ethernet Interface
bridge.
HCD-E1
HCD-E1
Figure C-1 Typical Application of HCD-E1 with IR-ETH Module
General Description
C-1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix C - IR-ETH Interface Module
C.2 IR-ETH Connector Options
Figure C-2 and Figure C-3 show the rear panel of HCD-E1 with the IR-ETH
connector options.
~100-240 VAC
0.5A T 250V
P
O
W
E
R
TX IN
SUB E1
RX OUT
10BASE-T
CH.2
TX
COLL
RX
LINK
CHANNEL
CH.1
CH.1
ALM RLY
HDSL
NETWORK
LINE A
1 2
LINE B
4 5
Figure C-2 HCD-E1 Rear Panel for the 10BaseT Option
~100-240 VAC
0.5A T 250V
P
O
W
E
R
TX IN
SUB E1
RX OUT
10BASE-T
CH.2
TX
RX
COLL
CHANNEL
ALM RLY
CH.1
CH.1
NETWORK
LINE A
1 2
HDSL
LINE B
4 5
Figure C-3 HCD-E1 Rear Panel for the 10Base2 Option
To connect the external equipment to the Ethernet interface, use standard
Ethernet cables with RJ-45 or BNC connector, respectively.
C.3 Technical Specifications
General
LAN
WAN
C-2
LAN Table
10,000 addresses
Filtering and
Forwarding
Buffer
15,000 pps
Delay
1 frame
Standard
Conforms to IEEE 802.3/Ethernet
Data Rate
10 Mbps (20 Mbps 10BaseT FDX)
Connectors
10BaseT (UTP): Shielded RJ-45
10Base2: BNC connector
Protocol (internal)
HDLC
Data Rate
According to the modem transmission rate
Technical Specifications
256 frames
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix C - IR-ETH Interface Module
C.4 Installation and Operation
Figure C-4 and Figure C-5 show the Ethernet bridge rear panel components
for the 10BaseT and the 10Base2 versions, respectively. Figure C-6 shows
the location of the LED and the DIP switch.
View A
Figure C-4 IR-ETH Module Layout (10BaseT Option)
View A
Figure C-5 IR-ETH Module Layout (10Base2 Option)
31/12/2000 17:57
Installation and Operation
C-3
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix C - IR-ETH Interface Module
View A
1
2
3
4
Figure C-6 IR-ETH Module (View A)
LAN Installation
The Ethernet with UTP (10BaseT) connectors is designated as a Station. For
10BaseT installation, either a straight cable or a cross-cable may be required.
Use a cross-cable when connecting to a port that does not implement the
crossover function internally. Otherwise, use a straight cable. (Hubs usually
do implement the crossover function internally while network interface cards
and other devices do not).
Table C-1 lists pinout of the IR-Ethernet RJ-45 connector.
Table C-1 RJ-45 Pinout
Switch Settings
Pin
Name
Function
1
TD (+)
Transmit data positive
2
TD (-)
Transmit data negative
3
RD (+)
Receive data positive
6
RD (-)
Receive data negative
Table C-2 describes functions and default settings of the DIP switch SW-1
sections. Function of section 1 is software-controlled, either from the
supervision terminal (DEF CH command), or from the front panel
(CHANNEL PRM). Its hardware switch is permanently set to OFF and is not
allowed for manual setting. Sections 2 and 3 are set in accordance with
Table C-2.
The DIP switch is on the reverse side of the Ethernet bridge. To change the
switch settings, you must undo three screws on the board and detach it from
the main unit.
C-4
Installation and Operation
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix C - IR-ETH Interface Module
Table C-2 DIP Switch Settings
Section Number
Name
Description
Default
Setting
1
SQ/FD
Controls Ethernet mode: full-duplex or half-duplex.
Permanently
OFF
2
CMP
ON: Strips padding bits inserted in 64-byte frame
OFF: Transmits frames over WAN as is
OFF
ON: Passes only frames destined for another LAN
OFF: Disables LAN filter; passes all frames transparently
OFF
3
FIL
(nc)
4
Note
Set the DIP switch, section 3 to ON if you want to filter the traffic sent to the
remote end (recommended).
If you want to disable the LAN filter, remove resistor R 45 from the Ethernet
bridge and set section 3 to OFF.
To control Ethernet mode (full-duplex or half-duplex), use DEF CH command
on the terminal or CHANNEL PRM menu on the LCD.
LED Indicators
Table C-3 lists the IR-ETH LED indicators and describes their functions.
Table C-3 IR-ETH Bridge LED Indicators
LED
Name
Description
Location
Color
LINK
ON indicates good link integrity (available only
in the 10BaseT version)
Rear panel
Green
COLL
ON indicates collision on the attached Ethernet
segment
Rear panel
Yellow
RX
ON when data is received from the Ethernet
attached segment
Front and rear
panels
Yellow
TX
ON when data is transmitted from the modem
to the Ethernet segment
Front and rear
panels
Yellow
ERR D4
Bridge buffer overrun
On the
IR-ETH board
Red
31/12/2000 17:57
Installation and Operation
C-5
Appendix C - IR-ETH Interface Module
C-6
Installation and Operation
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix D
IR-ETH/Q Interface Module
D.1 General
IR-ETH/Q is an interface module for RAD modems, used for converting the
Ethernet 10BaseT electrical levels to the modem TTL levels. It converts the
Ethernet protocol to HDLC to enable long distance transmission and avoid
the Ethernet collision limitation. The IR-ETH/Q module also supports
IEEE 802.1/Q frames.
IR-ETH/Q includes an internal, self-learning Ethernet bridge, which enables
a high performance link between two Ethernet segments at a low
transmission rate. The module also supports VLAN applications. The
low-speed HDLC transmission is sent over the link using the modem
modulation technique. It is converted back to an Ethernet signal at the
remote modem.
Figure D-1 shows a typical application of HCD-E1 with the IR-ETH/Q
module. Each modem is connected to an Ethernet network via the Ethernet
bridge.
HCD-E1
HCD-E1
Figure D-1 Typical Application of HCD-E1 with IR-ETH/Q Module
General
D-1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix D - IR-ETH/Q Interface Module
D.2 IR-ETH/Q Connector
Figure D-2 shows the rear panel of HCD-E1, equipped with IR-ETH/Q
module. Table D-1 lists the module RJ-45 connector pinout.
~100-240 VAC
0.5A T 250V
P
O
W
E
R
TX IN
10BASE-T
RX OUT
SUB E1
INT
CH.2
ERR
ACT
CHANNEL
ALM RLY
CH.1
CH.1
NETWORK
LINE A
1 2
HDSL
LINE B
4 5
Figure D-2 Rear Panel of HCD-E1 with IR-ETH/Q Module
Table D-1 IR-ETH/Q Connector Pinout
Pin
Signal
3
RCV (+)
6
RCV (-)
1
XMT (+)
2
XMT (-)
–
GND
D.3 Technical Specifications
General
LAN
WAN
D-2
LAN Table
5,000 addresses
Buffer
200 kbytes
Standard
Conforms to IEEE 802.3/Ethernet and
supports IEEE 802.1/Q frames
Data Rate
10 Mbps (20 Mbps 10BaseT FDX)
Connectors
10BaseT (UTP): Shielded RJ-45
Protocol
HDLC
Data Rate
According to the modem transmission rate
Technical Specifications
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix D - IR-ETH/Q Interface Module
D.4 Installation and Operation
Figure D-3 shows the IR-ETH/Q rear panel. Figure D-4 shows the DIP switch,
which is located on the reverse side of the board.
Figure D-3 IR-ETH/Q Module Layout
Figure D-4 DIP Switch Location
Installation and Operation
D-3
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix D - IR-ETH/Q Interface Module
Setting the DIP
Switch
Configure the IR-ETH/Q module by setting the DIP switch in accordance
with Table D-2. The DIP switch is located on the reverse side of the
IR-ETH/Q module. To change the switch settings, you must undo three
screws on the board and detach it from the main unit.
Table D-2 DIP Switch Settings
Switch
Number
Name
Description
5
FD/HD
ON:
OFF:
Default
Setting
Full-duplex mode
Half-duplex mode
OFF
Note: IR-ETH/Q does not support auto detection. Therefore, the equipment connected to IR-ETH/Q
should not be set to auto detection mode and the half/full duplex setting should be set manually.
6
TRANS/FIL
Note
LED Indicators
OFF:
ON:
Passes only frames destined for another LAN
Disables LAN filter; passes all frames transparently
OFF
For proper operation switch 4 must always be set to OFF (factory setting).
Table D-3 lists the IR-ETH/Q rear-panel LED indicators and describes their
functions.
Table D-3 DIP Switch Settings
LED Name
Description
Color
INT
ON indicates good link integrity
Green
ERR
ON indicates LAN/WAN buffer overflow
Red
ACT
ON when data is received from the Ethernet
attached segment or when data is transmitted
from the modem to the Ethernet segment
Yellow
Note: In filtered mode, IR-ETH/Q passes frames destined only for another LAN
Connecting the
LAN
Note
D-4
Use either a straight cable or a cross-cable for the LAN connection.
Use a cross-cable when connecting to a port that does not implement the
crossover function internally. Otherwise, use a straight cable.
Hubs usually implement the crossover function internally while NICs and
other devices do not.
Installation and Operation
Appendix E
IR-IP Interface Module
E.1 Introduction
Introduction
IR-IP is a high-performance, miniature IP router based on RAD's unique IP
router chip, the ChipRouter.
IR-IP works by taking each Ethernet frame from the LAN and determining
whether the IP packet is destined for the IP net on the Ethernet LAN. If not,
IR-IP forwards the packet to the WAN link. IP packets received from the
WAN link are automatically forwarded to the LAN if the IP net matches.
IR-IP includes hardware filters which handle all filtering operations at wire
speed from both LAN-to-WAN and WAN-to-LAN, without dropping a single
packet. Filtering and forwarding are performed at the maximum rate of
35,000 and 30,000 frames per second (wire speed), respectively. The buffer
can hold 256 frames of maximum size of 1534 bytes and a throughput
latency of one frame.
IR-IP is available with 10BaseT (UTP) interface and is fully
IEEE 802.3/Ethernet v2 compliant. The IR-IP interface can also operate in full
duplex Ethernet applications.
HCD-E1 equipped with IR-IP interface module can be used as a Frame
Relay Access Device (FRAD) with an integral IP router. RFC 1490 is
supported for a single DLCI on the WAN link. Detection of the DLCI and
the maintenance protocol is performed automatically. This allows the IR-IP
to be used as the termination unit of IP services over Frame Relay at the
customer premises, opposite a Frame Relay switch in the backbone.
Alternatively, Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) can be run on the WAN link with
automatic negotiation on power-up, as well as support for PAP and CHAP
authentication. With this feature, IR-IP can operate opposite any PPP
compliant access server or backbone router.
IR-IP supports HDLC, which is especially important for broadcast and
multicast applications where bandwidth overhead is critical.
IR-IP supports IP multicast at wire speed, making it suitable for any multicast
environment including high speed downstream environments, such as
satellite and xDSL. Users on the LAN who register with IR-IP for an IP
multicast group using the IGMP protocol filter IP multicast packets at wire
speed.
Management and advanced configuration are performed via Telnet.
Introduction
E-1
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
Application
Figure E-1 shows a typical application of HCD-E1 with the IR-IP module.
HCD-E1
with IR-IP
HCD-E1
with V.35 Interface
Router
Figure E-1 Typical Application of HCD-E1 with IR-IP Module
E.2 Technical Specifications
Router
LAN IP Net
Up to 256 hosts on LAN IP net
Filtering and Forwarding 30 kbps / 35 kbps
LAN
WAN
Buffer
256 frames (maximum size – 1534 bytes)
Delay
1 frame
Standard
Conforms to IEEE 802.3/Ethernet v2
Data Rate
10 Mbps (20 Mbps 10BaseT in full duplex
topology)
Connector
10BaseT (UTP): Shielded RJ-45
Protocols
•
PPP (PAP/CHAP)
•
Frame Relay (RFC 1490)
•
HDLC
E.3 Physical Descriptionr
Figure E-2 shows the rear panel of HCD-E1, equipped with IR-IP module.
~100-240 VAC
0.5A T 250V
P
O
W
E
R
TX IN
10BASE-T
SUB E1
CH.2
ERR
ACT
CHANNEL
ALM RLY
CH.1
CH.1
NETWORK
LINE A
1 2
Figure E-2 Rear Panel of HCD-E1 with IR-IP Module
E-2
Physical Descriptionr
RX OUT
INT
HDSL
LINE B
4 5
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
IR-IP LEDs
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
IR-IP contains three LEDs, which indicate the module activity. Table E-1
lists the LEDs functions.
Table E-1 IR-IP LEDs Functions
Name
Type
Function
INT
Green LED
ON when IR-IP is powered up.
ACT
Yellow LED
Blinks when there is transmit/receive activity on the
Ethernet link.
ERR
Red LED
During regular operation, turns on when a buffer
overflow occurs.
During power-up, provides additional indications,
described below.
IR-IP DIP Switch
IR-IP interface module contains a four-section DIP switch, as seen in
Figure E-3. Table E-2 lists the DIP switch functions.
Figure E-3 IR-IP DIP Switch
Table E-2 IR-IP DIP Switch Functions
No
Function
Values
1
Enables IR-IP to learn its IP
ON – IP address learning is enabled
OFF – IP address learning is disabled
Default – OFF
2
Selects the WAN protocol
ON – PPP protocol
OFF – Frame Relay protocol
Default – OFF
3
Selects the LAN mode
ON – Full duplex operation
OFF – Half duplex operation
Default – OFF
4
Controls the remote WAN test
loopback, which returns packets
received from the WAN back
toward the WAN
ON – The test loop is activated
OFF – The test loop is disabled
Default – OFF
Physical Descriptionr
E-3
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
Table E-3 lists the module RJ-45 connector pinout.
Table E-3 IR-IP Connector Pinout
Pin
Name
Function
1
TD (+)
Transmit data positive
2
TD (-)
Transmit data negative
3
RD (+)
Receive data positive
6
RD (-)
Receive data negative
E.4 IR-IP Management Subsystem, General
Introduction
The IR-IP interface module management subsystem supports the following
functions:
•
Preliminary configuration
•
Configuration of management access parameters
•
Advanced configuration of IR-IP parameters
•
Collection and display of statistical performance data
•
Maintenance functions, which include:
Software downloading
Resetting of various subsystems
Display of error log
Ping utility, for checking IP connectivity.
The management subsystem of the IR-IP interface module is a separate,
independent entity, and therefore it cannot be managed through the
HCD-E1 management subsystem.
The communication with the IR-IP management subsystem is made through
the local LAN interface connector of the IR-IP module, designated
10BASE-T, using the Telnet protocol. Passwords can be used to prevent
unauthorized access.
Accessing the
IR-IP
Management
Subsystem
The IR-IP interface module must be configured in accordance with the
specific requirements of the user’s application before it can be used in the
user’s network. As a result, it is not possible to supply default parameters to
enable IR-IP to start service without any preliminary configuration.
Therefore, to enable the user to establish Telnet communication and
configure IR-IP, IR-IP is delivered with a factory-default set of parameters.
The factory-default parameters are automatically used:
E-4
•
Before the IP router is configured by the user, e.g., when a new HCD-E1
with IR-IP interface module is put into operation
•
After the user’s configuration parameters have been erased.
IR-IP Management Subsystem, General
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
When the factory-default parameters are used, the ERR indicator located on
the HCD-E1 rear panel, near the IR-IP Ethernet interface connector flashes
rapidly (about three times per second). The flashing of the ERR indicator also
serves as a warning to the user that the IR-IP WAN interface does not send,
nor does it receive packets, and therefore IR-IP can be accessed only from
the LAN.
After configuring IR-IP, it starts normal operation and routes the traffic in
accordance with the user-selected configuration parameters.
To change the parameters of an already-configured IR-IP, establish
communication from a Telnet host using the assigned IP address.
Default IP
Communication
Parameters
The factory-default IP communication parameters of the interface module
are:
•
The default IP address of the IR-IP Ethernet port is 192.168.205.1, and
the default IP subnet mask is 255.255.255.252.
•
The port will accept IP communication only from the IP address
192.168.205.2. Therefore, as long as the factory defaults are in effect,
you must assign this address to the Telnet host used to configure IR-IP.
Using the IP learning mechanism, as explained below can change the
default parameters.
E.5 Performing Preliminary Configuration
General
The software necessary for performing all the management and
configuration functions is stored in the IR-IP interface module, and
therefore you only need a regular Telnet host to perform all the activities
described in this appendix.
A Telnet host is any computer, e.g., an IBM PC or compatible that fulfills the
following minimum requirements:
Outline of
Preliminary
Configuration
•
A standard 10BaseT Ethernet interface
•
A TCP/IP protocol stack, and therefore is capable of supporting IP
communication through the Ethernet interface
•
Telnet client software
•
A ping utility.
To perform the preliminary configuration procedure:
1.
Connect the Telnet host to the IR-IP interface module.
2.
Configure the Telnet host to enable communication with the IR-IP
interface module using the default IP parameters.
Performing Preliminary Configuration
E-5
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
Connecting the
Telnet Host
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
3.
Establish communication with IR-IP and assign the prescribed IP
address to its LAN interface.
4.
Establish again communication with IR-IP and continue the preliminary
configuration in accordance with the Quick Setup Menu section below.
Before starting the management and configuration activities, it is necessary
to establish IP communication between your Telnet host and the IR-IP
interface module. For this purpose, it is necessary to provide a
communication path.
Because of the method used to assign an IP address to IR-IP Ethernet port, it
is recommended to connect the Telnet host directly to the IP router
10BASE-T connector. This is made by connecting an Ethernet cross cable
between the Ethernet connector of the Telnet host and the IP router
connector.
However, you may also connect through a common LAN: in this case,
connect your Telnet host and IR-IP to Ethernet hub ports using straight
cables.
Preliminary Telnet
Host
Configuration
You can use the IP learning mechanism to configure the IP communication
parameters of the IR-IP LAN interface. In this case, skip to the Assigning the
Router LAN Interface Address section below.
If you prefer to use the factory-default parameters to establish IP
communication between your Telnet host and IR-IP, configure the Telnet
host as follows:
Note
1.
Temporarily configure the host IP address as 192.168.205.2.
2.
The initial destination IP address to be used by the host is
192.168.205.1.
The first step in the preliminary configuration process is to assign the desired
IP address to the LAN interface of the IR-IP interface module.
After an IP address is assigned and saved, you must change the destination IP
address of the Telnet host to the new address, otherwise it is not possible to
continue the configuration process. At the same time, you can also change
the temporary IP address assigned to the host (192.168.205.2) back to its
permanent address.
Assigning the
Router LAN
Interface Address
The IP address of the IR-IP LAN interface must be configured as part of the
preliminary configuration process. To simplify this process, IR-IP includes a
simple and convenient IP address learning mechanism.
The IP address can be configured and changed at any time, even after the
complete IR-IP configuration process has been performed, because it does
not affect other configuration parameters. Moreover, the IP subnet mask is
automatically adapted to the new IP address.
E-6
Performing Preliminary Configuration
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
IP Learning Mechanism
To simplify the configuration process, IR-IP has a special mechanism for
configuring the IP address of its LAN interface. Setting section 1, called IP
address learning, of the IR-IP DIP switch (Figure E-3) to ON enables this
mechanism.
The IP learning mechanism enables IR-IP to learn its LAN interface IP
address by receiving frames sent by a ping utility to the prescribed LAN IP
address.
Note
To use the IP learning mechanism, you do not need to know the current
address of IR-IP LAN interface, but only the prescribed IP address.
The IP address is actually retrieved from the ARP frames sent during pinging
to locate the ping destination, not from the ping frames.
To ensure that the process is correctly performed, it is recommended to
check the contents of the ARP table before starting the ping utility, to make
sure that it does not contain the address to be assigned to the IP router LAN
interface.
To view and edit the ARP table contents:
If the Telnet host you are using runs under Microsoft Inc. Windows™ 95, 98
or NT, use the following procedure to view and edit the ARP table contents:
1.
Display the table using the arp -a command.
2.
If the table includes the intended IP address, remove it from the table
using the arp -d command.
If for some reason the IP learning process does not succeed, before
repeating it make sure to remove the IP address from the table.
Assigning a LAN IP Address to a New IR-IP
The following procedure enables you to configure the LAN IP address of a
new IR-IP router, i.e., a router using the default parameters (see the
Accessing the IR-IP Management Subsystem section above).
If HCD-E1 is already operating, skip Step 2 in the following procedure.
To configure the IP router LAN address:
1.
Make sure the preparations described above have been completed,
including the configuration of the ping utility.
2.
Turn HCD-E1 on and monitor the IP router indicators:
The INT indicator turns on
The ERR indicator lights steadily for approx. 15 seconds, and then
starts flashing at a rapid rate (about three times per second).
If the ERR indicator turns off, skip to the What to Do If ... section below.
3.
Set section 1 of IR-IP DIP switch to ON.
The ERR indicator starts flashing faster (approximately four times a
second).
Performing Preliminary Configuration
E-7
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
4.
Send a ping to the new address to be used by IR-IP. A confirmation
should be received after the third ping: after the confirmation, the
flashing will slow down to approximately twice a second.
If your host does not begin to receive ping replies after three
unsuccessful attempts, skip to the What to Do If ... section below.
5.
Return section 1 of the IR-IP DIP switch to the OFF position.
The ERR indicator must turn off.
At this stage, the communication with IR-IP router is lost, because its IP
address has been changed. Therefore, you must reconfigure the destination
IP address of the Telnet host. If you wish, you may also change the
temporary IP address assigned to the host (192.168.205.2) back to its
permanent address.
After changing the destination IP address of the Telnet host, it is
recommended to turn HCD-E1 off for a few seconds and then back on,
before continuing the configuration of the IP router in accordance with the
Quick Setup Menu section below. At this time, in Step 2 the ERR indicator
turns off after the 15-second interval.
Changing the LAN IP Address of a Configured IR-IP
The LAN IP address of an already-configured IR-IP can be changed while it
operates, this means it is not necessary to turn HCD-E1 off before starting
the configuration procedure. Note however that the IP traffic flow through
IR-IP will be disrupted until the other stations in the IP network learn the
new address.
To change the LAN IP address of an already-configured IR-IP, use the
procedure described above for a new IR-IP with the following differences:
1.
Configure the destination address of the ping utility to the new LAN
interface IP address. It is not necessary to change the Telnet host source
address.
2.
When ready, set section 1 of the IR-IP DIP switch to ON.
The ERR indicator starts flashing faster (approximately four times a
second).
3.
Perform Steps 4, 5 of the procedure used for a new IR-IP.
What to Do If ...
After HCD-E1 is turned on, the INT indicator does not light
The IR-IP interface module does not receive power from the HCD-E1 power
supply. Service is required.
After HCD-E1 is turned on, the ERR indicator does not light
IR-IP is faulty and must be replaced.
E-8
Performing Preliminary Configuration
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
After turn-on, the ERR indicator lights for 15 seconds and then turns off.
ACT does not light, and there is no response from IR-IP
No software loaded into IR-IP. Download software using the procedure
described in the New Software Download Menu section below.
After turn-on, the ERR indicator lights for 15 seconds, and then turns off.
ACT lights from time to time, but there is no response from IR-IP
IR-IP has been configured. If you do not know the current IP address of the
LAN interface, erase IR-IP router configuration using the procedure given in
the Erasing User’s Configuration section below.
No ping replies from IR-IP
If your host does not begin to receive ping replies after three unsuccessful
attempts, check the physical connection path between the Telnet host
Ethernet interface and the IR-IP 10BASE-T connector.
The IP learning process is not successful
Check that the prescribed IP address does not appear in the ARP table.
E.6 IR-IP Management Utility
General
Operating
Procedures
The IR-IP interface module is managed via a simple, menu-driven utility
that uses a basic terminal user interface. A typical screen is shown in
Figure E-4.
As seen in Figure E-4, each screen has a header that identifies the device
being configured and its logical name, assigned by the user, followed by the
running software revision and date. The bottom line of the screen displays
prompts that guide you in the execution of the various activities.
Use the following general procedures to perform the desired activity:
Note
•
To change a parameter or to select a menu item, type the corresponding
line number.
•
For a parameter, which has a discrete set of values, the parameter values
are enclosed in brackets [ ]. To select a new value, press the spacebar to
scroll among the available values until the desired value is displayed, and
then press <Enter> to select the displayed value.
•
To enter a value which requires free text entry, type in the desired string
and then press <Enter>. Use backspace to erase the current string.
•
After all the parameters have been selected, a prompt appears,
requesting that you confirm the changes.
For proper display of the screens, you must:
• Select a fixed-pitch system font for the display. Use your operating system
documentation to find how to select a proper font.
• Configure the Telnet utility to use VT-100 terminal emulation.
IR-IP Management Utility
E-9
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
Starting a
Management
Utility
The management utility is started automatically when Telnet
communication is established. If password protection is enabled (see the
Management Access Menu section below), you will be prompted to enter
the Telnet password. The opening screen, which appears after the Telnet
session activation, is the IR-IP Main menu (see Figure E-4).
IR_IP
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver.1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
Device Control
View
Diagnostic Tool (PING terminal)
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-4 IR-IP Main Menu
To end the utility, press <Esc> when the Main menu is displayed. This will
also end the Telnet session.
Menu Structure
of Management
Utility
Figure E-5 shows the menu structure of the IR-IP management utility.
Main Menu
1. Quick Setup
2. Management
Access
3. Advanced Setup
1.Telenet Password
2. Telenet Activity Timeout
3. SNMP Access
4. SNMP Read Community
5. SNMP Write Community
6. SNMP Trap Community
7. SNMP Management Table
1. LAN IP Address
2. LAN IP Mask
3. WAN IP Address
4. WAN IP Mask
5. Default Gateway
6. Read Protocol From DIP Switches
7. Protocol
1. Device Identification
1. Device Name
2. Contact Person
3. System Location
2. Interface Parameters
1. LAN Status
2. WAN Status
3. WAN Throttle
4. Aging Timeout
3. Protocol Parameters (FR)
1. Self Learn
2. Maintenance Protocol
3. DLCI
4. CIR
5. EIR
4. Device Control
1. New Software Download
1. Server IP Address
2. File Name
3. Total Timeout
4. Start Operation
5. View
1. Configuration and Connection
2. ARP Tables
3. Multicast Groups Table
4. Statistics
2. View Error Log
3. Resets
1. Reset Device
2. Reset LAN
3. Reset WAN
3. Protocol Parameters (PPP)
1. Header and Control Field Compression
2. Protocol Field Compression
3. Authentication Protocol
4. Security Host/Guest
5. User Name To Send
6. Password To Send
7. User Name To Accept
8. Password To Accept
4. Multicast
1. Multicast Forwarding
2. Static Groups
Figure E-5 Management Utility, Menu Structure
E-10
IR-IP Management Utility
6. Diagnostic Tool
PING Terminal
1. Ping IP Address
2. Start Pinging
3. Stop Pinging
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
E.7 Quick Setup Menu
The Quick Setup menu is used to select the main parameters’ values that
must be defined before you start using IR-IP.
Use the Advanced Setup menu (see the Advanced Setup Menu section
below) to specify values for other IR-IP configuration parameters not
included in this menu.
To access the Quick Setup menu:
•
From the Main menu, type 1.
The Quick Setup menu appears (Figure E-6).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver.1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
=====================================================================
1. LAN IP Address
:192.168.100.001
2. LAN IP Mask
:255.255.255.000
3. WAN IP Address (empty for unnumbered)
:...............
4. WAN IP Mask (empty for unnumbered)
:...............
5. Default Gateway (empty - WAN interface)
:...............
6. Read Protocol From DIP Switches
:[ Yes ]
7. Protocol
:[ Frame Relay ]
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-6 Quick Setup Menu
LAN IP Address
Used to enter the IP address for the IP router LAN interface. This is the
address to which nodes connected to the local LAN send packets
addressed to the WAN.
LAN IP Mask
Used to enter the IP subnet mask. The IP router supports a maximum of
254 hosts on the LAN, therefore you must use Class C subnet masks. The
basic subnet IP mask for Class C addresses, which supports the maximum
possible number of hosts, 254, is 225.225.225.0. To help you understand
the selection of IP subnet masks, Figure E-7 provides a configuration
example for a LAN with 6 nodes: the IP subnet mask for a 6-node IP
network is 225.225.225.248.
HCD-E1 with IR-IP
LAN IP Address: 192.168.1.2
Mask: 255.255.255.248
IP Address
192.168.1.2
Mask
255.255.255.248
Default Gateway
192.168.1.1
.3
.248
192.168.1.1
.4
.248
192.168.1.1
.5
.248
192.168.1.1
.6
.248
192.168.1.1
Figure E-7 Selecting the IP Subnet Mask
Quick Setup Menu
E-11
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
WAN IP Address
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Used to enter the IP address for the IR-IP WAN interface, i.e., the IP
address to be used by IP hosts on the WAN to reach this IR-IP interface
module.
If the WAN IP Address field remain blank, IR-IP operates in the
Unnumbered Router Mode.
WAN IP Mask
Used to enter the IP subnet mask for the WAN interface.
Default Gateway
Operation without Default Gateway
The IP interface module is intended to enable the extension of LANs
through the HCD-E1 link. Therefore, its default routing operation is different
from the default routing operation of standard IP routers:
•
IR-IP forwards packets with destinations not located on the local LAN
through the WAN interface
•
Packets received from the WAN interface and destined to hosts located
on the local LAN are forwarded to the LAN; other packets are discarded.
The default operation is used when the Default Gateway field is blank.
Operation with Default Gateway
You can instruct IR-IP to send packets with destinations not located on the
local LAN to a specific router, which is called the default gateway. The
default gateway must be connected to the local LAN.
To use this option, enter the IP address of another router attached to the
local LAN in the Default Gateway field.
Note
It is very important to obtain the correct parameters from the system
administrator or ISP. The most common problem when establishing an IP
connection is incorrect configuration of IP parameters and default gateway.
Do not try to guess these parameters.
Read Protocol
from DIP
Switches
Selecting YES for this parameter forces IR-IP router card to use the WAN
protocol selected by section 2 of its DIP switch: PPP or Frame Relay.
Protocol
Used to select the WAN protocol to be used by the IP router card: PPP,
HDLC or Frame Relay.
This parameter is available only if the Read Protocol from DIP Switches
parameter is set to NO.
E-12
Quick Setup Menu
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
E.8 Management Access Menu
The Management Access menu is used to enable the use of passwords to
protect the access to IR-IP management utility, and control the inactivity
time-out interval.
When password protection is enabled, a Telnet management session can
start only after the correct password is entered.
To access the Management Access menu:
•
From the Main menu, type 2.
The Management Access menu appears (Figure E-8).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
=====================================================================
1. Telnet Password
:..........
2. Telnet Inactivity Timeout (min)
:300..
3. SNMP Access
:Disabled
4. SNMP Read Community
:public....
5. SNMP Write Community
:public....
6. SNMP Trap Community
:public....
7. SNMP Management Table
:>>>
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-8 Management Access Menu
Note
Telnet Password
Since the IP router card does not support SNMP management, the SNMP
Read Community, SNMP Write Community, SNMP Trap Community, and
SNMP Management Table parameters are not used.
By default, management access to IR-IP via Telnet is unrestricted. To
restrict access, enter a Telnet password by selecting 1 in the Management
Access menu. The password can include up to 10 characters, and is casesensitive. The next time a Telnet session is opened, a password must be
entered to enable you to access the IR-IP menus.
At any time, only one Telnet connection to IR-IP is permitted. Any attempt
to open an additional connection while the current session is open is
rejected.
Telnet Inactivity
Timeout
This parameter specifies the time a Telnet session is kept open when there
is no keyboard activity. When the specified time-out expires, the Telnet
session is closed and another user can access IR-IP.
Management Access Menu
E-13
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
E.9 Advanced Setup Menu
The Advanced Setup menu is used to select the desired group of IR-IP
configuration parameters.
The parameters accessed through Advanced Setup menu supplement the
parameters available on the Quick Setup screen, by providing control over
all the other IR-IP parameters.
To access the Advanced Setup menu:
•
From the Main menu, press 3.
The Advanced Setup menu appears (Figure E-9).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
=====================================================================
1. Device identification
2. Interface Parameters
3. Protocol Parameters
4. Multicast IP
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-9 Advanced Setup Menu
Device
Identification
Menu
The Device Identification menu is used to define and store in the IR-IP
logistic information: the logical name of IR-IP, information on the contact
person and device location.
To access the Device Identification menu:
•
From the Advanced Setup menu, type 1.
The Device Identification menu appears (Figure E-10).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
.....................................................................
Device identification
=====================================================================
1. Device Name
:IR-IP..
2. Contact Person
:Name of contact Person
3. System Location
:The location of this device
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-10 Device Identification Menu
E-14
Advanced Setup Menu
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
Device Name
Select this parameter to assign an arbitrary name to IR-IP for identification
by the system manager (up to eight characters). The assigned name is
displayed in the screen header.
Contact Person
Select this parameter to enter the name of the person to be contacted with
matters pertaining to this equipment unit.
System Location
Select this parameter to enter the physical location of the device.
Interface
Parameters Menu
The Interface Parameters menu is used to control the operation of IR-IP
interfaces.
To access the Interface Parameters menu:
•
From the Advanced Setup menu, type 2.
The Interface Parameters menu appears (Figure E-11).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
.................................................................
Device identification
Interface Parameters
=================================================================
1. LAN Status
:[ Open ]
2. WAN Status
:[ Open ]
3. WAN Throttle
:[ Full ]
4. Aging Timeout (min)
:5
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-11 Interface Parameters Menu
LAN Status
Used to enable/disable the flow of packets through LAN interface:
•
Open – the flow of packets is enabled.
•
Closed – the flow of packets is disabled. As a result, IR-IP does not
accept, nor sends packets to the LAN, but its WAN interface may still be
active, and can interact with other IP hosts on the WAN.
Advanced Setup Menu
E-15
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
WAN Status
Used to enable/disable the flow of packets through the WAN interface:
•
Open – the flow of packets is enabled.
•
Closed – the flow of packets through the WAN interface is disabled. As a
result, IR-IP does not accept from, nor sends packets to the WAN.
However, the LAN interface of the IP router is still active.
WAN Throttle
This parameter specifies the maximum data rate at which frames are sent to
the WAN (i.e., to the HCD-E1 HDSL link).
The available selections are:
•
64 kbps
•
128 kbps
•
128 kbps
•
512 kbps
•
1024 kbps
•
Full (no restriction on the rate).
Since the IP router buffers have a limited capacity (256 frames), it is
recommended to select the WAN Throttle parameter in accordance with
the line rate.
Aging Timeout
Used to specify the time after which inactive LAN stations are removed from
the IR-IP ARP table.
A station is defined as inactive when no IP traffic is received from it by the
IR-IP LAN interface.
WAN Protocol
Parameters –
Frame Relay
Protocol Menu
The Frame Relay Protocol Parameters menu is used to configure the
parameters Frame Relay WAN for protocol (the WAN protocol is selected
by means of the Quick Setup Menu) in Figure E-6.
To access the Protocol Parameters menu:
•
From the Advanced Setup menu, type 3.
Self Learn
Used to specify whether the Frame Relay DLCI and maintenance protocol is
learned automatically (ENABLED), or is manually entered (DISABLED).
Maintenance Protocol
When the Self Learn parameter is DISABLED, use this parameter to specify
the desired maintenance protocol.
E-16
Advanced Setup Menu
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
DLCI
When the Self Learn parameter is DISABLED, use this parameter to specify
the DLCI used for exchanging maintenance protocol messages.
CIR
Used to specify the maximum amount of data, in bits, which the Frame
Relay network guarantees to transfer during the measurement interval (the
measurement interval is usually one second).
The value of this parameter is obtained from your Frame Relay service provider.
EIR
Used to specify the maximum amount of data, in bits, that the Frame Relay
network will attempt to deliver during the measurement interval. The value
of this parameter is obtained from the Frame Relay service provider.
A typical Frame Relay Protocol Parameters menu is shown in Figure D-12.
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
.....................................................................
Device identification
Interface Parameters
Protocol Parameters
=====================================================================
1. Self Learn
:[ Enabled ]
2. Maintenance Protocol
:[ ANSI T1.617 ANNEX D ]
3. DLCI (0-None)
:0..
4. CIR
:0.......
5. EIR
:64000...
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-12 Frame Relay Protocol Parameters Menu
WAN Protocol
Parameters – PPP
Protocol
The PPP Protocol Parameters menu is used to configure the parameters
PPP WAN for protocol (the WAN protocol is selected by means of the (the
WAN protocol is selected by means of the Quick Setup Menu) in
Figure E-6.
To access the Protocol Parameters menu:
•
From the Advanced Setup menu, type 3.
Header and Control Field Compression
Used to control the use of header and control field compression type
according to RFC 1661. It is strongly recommended that this compression be
used for troubleshooting only.
Advanced Setup Menu
E-17
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
Protocol Field Compression
Used to control the use of protocol field compression type according to
RFC 1661. It is strongly recommended that this compression be used for
troubleshooting only.
Authentication Protocol
Used to select the authentication protocol used by an IP router configured
as host to validate incoming connections.
Security Host/Guest
This option can be used to configure the IP router either as a guest unit, to be
authenticated by another router, or as a host unit, that authenticates other
routers.
User Name To Send
The name by which an IP router card configured as guest identifies itself.
Password To Send
The password by which an IP router card configured as guest identifies itself.
User Name To Accept
The user name to be accepted by an IP router configured as host, when an
incoming connection request is received.
Password To Accept
The user password to be accepted by an IP router configured as host, when
an incoming connection request is received.
A typical PPP Protocol Parameters menu is shown in Figure E-13.
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
.....................................................................
Device identification
Interface Parameters
Protocol Parameters
=====================================================================
1. Header and Control Field Compression
:[ No ]
2. Protocol Field Compression:
:[ No ]
3. Authentication Protocol
:[ NONE/NONE ]
4. Security Host / Guest
:[ Guest ]
5. User Name To Send
:.................
6. Password To Send
:.................
7. User Name To Accept
:.................
8. Password To Accept
:.................
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-13 PPP Protocol Parameters Menu
E-18
Advanced Setup Menu
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Multicast IP
Menu
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
The Multicast IP menu is used to specify the IP multicast frame forwarding
parameters, and to access the static multicast groups’ table.
To access the Multicast IP menu:
•
From the Advanced Setup menu, press 4.
The Multicast IP menu appears (Figure E-14).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
.....................................................................
Device identification
Interface Parameters
Protocol Parameters
Multicast IP
=====================================================================
1. Multicast forwarding
:[ Disable ]
2. Static groups
:>>>
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-14 Multicast IP Menu
Multicast Forwarding
Used to control the forwarding of IP multicast frames. The following
selections are available:
•
DISABLED – Disables multicast forwarding in both directions.
•
LAN to WAN – Enables forwarding of IP multicast frames addressed to
groups appearing in the Static Multicast Groups table, from the LAN to
the WAN.
•
WAN to LAN – Enables forwarding of IP multicast frames addressed to
groups appearing in the Static Multicast Groups table, from the WAN to
the LAN.
•
BIDIRECTIONAL – Enables forwarding of IP multicast frames addressed
to groups appearing in the Static Multicast Groups table, in both
directions.
•
WAN to LAN + IGMP – Enables forwarding of IP multicast frames
addressed to groups appearing in the Static Multicast Groups table, from the
WAN to the LAN. In addition, more groups can be added dynamically (the
additional can be viewed using the View menu – Figure E-19).
•
TRANSPARENT – All the IP multicast frames are forwarded, irrespective
of the Static Multicast Groups table.
Advanced Setup Menu
E-19
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
Static Groups
Select this parameter to access the static multicast groups table. The table is
used to specify the IP addresses for up to 10 IP multicast groups. You can
add, change, or delete each entry in the table (see the prompt line).
To access the Static Groups menu:
•
From the Multicast IP menu, type 2.
The following screen appears:
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Static Multicast Groups Table
----------------------------Group IP Address
1. ................
2. ................
3. ................
4. ................
5. ................
6. ................
7. ................
8. ................
9. ................
10. ...............
Press 'A'-add, 'E'-edit, 'D'-delete, 'C'-clear all, 'ESC'-exit:
Figure E-15 Static Multicast Groups Table
E.10 Device Control Menu
The Device Control menu is used to download software from TFTP servers
and perform interface and device resets.
To access the Device Control menu:
•
From the Main menu, type 4.
The Device Control menu appears (Figure E-16).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
Device Control
---------------------------------------------------------1. New Software Download
2. View error LOG
3. Resets
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-16 Device Control Menu
E-20
Device Control Menu
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
New Software
Download Menu
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
IR-IP operates as a TFTP client, and therefore it is possible to update its
software by downloading new software from another computer that
operates as a TFTP server.
The New Software Download menu is used to specify the software
downloading parameters.
To access the New Software Download menu:
•
From the Device Control submenu, type 1.
New Software Download menu appears (Figure E-17).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
Device Control
.....................................................................
New Software Download
=====================================================================
1. Server IP Address
:...............
2. File Name
:...................
3. Total Timeout (sec)
:..
4. Start operation
:>>>
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-17 New Software Download Menu
Server IP Address
Used to enter the IP address of the TFTP server.
File Name
Used to enter the name and path of the file to be transferred from the TFTP
server.
Total Timeout
Used to enter the time IP router should wait for an acknowledgment from
the TFTP server, for example 60 seconds.
Start Operation
After selecting all the necessary parameters, type 4 on the New Software
Download screen and then press <Enter> to start the downloading.
You can follow the progress of the downloading process (indicated by arrows).
Upon completion of the download process, the unit performs a reset. The
Telnet connection is lost and must be restarted if required.
Device Control Menu
E-21
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
View Error Log
Screen
This item of the Device Control submenu is used to view the error log file.
This file logs errors detected in IR-IP for debug and technical support
purposes.
Resets Menu
The Resets menu allows you to perform reset of IR-IP, or its interfaces.
This operation can be used to restore normal operation after service is
disrupted by an abnormal condition. Any data stored in the IR-IP buffers is
discarded, and the flow of traffic is temporarily interrupted.
To access the Resets menu:
•
From the Device Control menu, type 3.
The following screen appears:
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
Device Control
.....................................................................
New Software Download
View error LOG
Resets
=====================================================================
1. Reset Device
2. Reset LAN
3. Reset WAN
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-18 Resets Menu
Reset Device
To restart IR-IP:
•
From the Resets menu, type 1.
You will be prompted to confirm the reset operation.
Note
Resetting the device will restart the IR-IP interface module, and therefore
traffic flow is temporarily interrupted, and the Telnet connection is lost.
Reset LAN
To reset the LAN interface:
•
From the Resets menu, type 2.
You will be prompted to confirm the reset operation.
Note
E-22
This operation restarts the IR-IP LAN controller.
To continue your Telnet session, press any key within 15 seconds following
the confirmation of the reset operation.
Device Control Menu
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
Reset WAN
To reset the WAN interface:
•
From the Resets menu, type 3.
You will be prompted to confirm the reset operation.
Note
Resetting the WAN interface causes the WAN controller to be restarted. This
results in renegotiation of the WAN protocol parameters.
To continue your Telnet session, press any key within 15 seconds following
the confirmation of the reset operation.
E.11 View Menu
The View menu is used to view the IR-IP configuration data, and display
information on its ARP tables, multicast Groups tables and statistics.
To access the View menu:
•
From the Main menu, type 5.
The View menu appears (Figure E-19).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
Device Control
View
---------------------------------------------------------1. Configuration and Connection
2. ARP Tables
3. Multicast Groups Table
4. Statistics
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-19 View Menu
Configuration
and Connection
This screen is used to view the configuration parameters of IR-IP. In
addition, you can also view the current status of the LAN and WAN
interface.
View Menu
E-23
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
To access the Configuration and Connection screen:
•
From the View menu, type 1.
The View Configuration screen appears (Figure E-20).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
VIEW CONFIGURATION
-----------------BOOT Version
:1.06 18.03.1999
Device Name
:IP router card
System Location :The location of this device
Contact Person :Name of contact person
MAC Address
: 00-20-D2-16-3F-9B
Default Gateway : WAN
Intrf Type Baud(Kbps) Prot IP Address
IP Mask
Status
.....................................................................
LAN
UTP ------Ethr 192.168.205.005 255.255.255.000 Connected
WAN
V.110
FR
Not Conn.
Press any key to continue:
Figure E-20 View Configuratiopn Screen
ARP Tables
This screen is used to display the IR-IP ARP table. This table shows the IP
address assigned to each station on the LAN (the stations are identified by
their MAC addresses).
To access the ARP Tables screen:
•
From the View menu, type 2.
The ARP Tables screen appears (Figure E-21).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
ARP Table
--------IP Address
MAC Address
192.168.205.003
00-40-33-20-C8-3C
IP Address
Press any key for exit
Figure E-21 ARP Table Screen
E-24
View Menu
MAC Address
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Multicast Groups
Table Screen
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
This screen is used to display information about the multicast group IP
addresses and their status.
To access the Multicast Groups Table screen:
•
In the View menu, type 3.
The Multicast Groups Table screen appears (Figure E-22).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
Multicast Groups Table
---------------------Group IP Address Status
S/W Ver.1.00 31/IR (date)
Group IP Address Status
Press any key for exit
Figure E-22 Multicast Groups Table Screen
Statistics Screen
The Statistics screen is used to display statistical information on the traffic
between the networks connected by IR-IP. The data displayed on this
screen enables you to evaluate the IR-IP performance. Two different
Statistics screens are used, one for the LAN side and the other for the WAN
side.
To access the Statistics menu:
•
In the View menu, type 4.
The LAN and WAN Statistics screens appear (Figure E-23 and
Figure E-24).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver.1.00 31/IR (date)
SYSTEM STATISTICS
----------------Counter Name
Val
Counter Name
LAN in Octets
83504
LAN IP Header Errors
LAN Unicast Frames In
1
LAN IP Address Errors
LAN Non-Unicast Frames In
9
LAN Alignment Errors
LAN Out Octets
83504
LAN CRC Errors
LAN Unicast Frames Out
3560
LAN Single Collisions
LAN Non-Unicast Frames Out
0
LAN Multiple Collisions
LAN to WAN Frames Passed
1698
LAN Late Collisions
LAN IP Datagram Received
2638
LAN Excessive Collisions
LAN to CPU Frames Discarded
0
LAN Frames Too Long Errors
LAN to WAN Frames Discarded
0
LAN RX FIFO Overrun Error
LAN Out Errors
0
LAN SQE Transmitted
LAN RX Frames Errors
0
LAN Deferred Frames
LAN MAC Receive Errors
0
LAN Carrier Sense Lost
LAN MAC TX Errors
0
LAN FIFO Underrun
Val
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
N - Next Screen. ESC - Back To Previous Menu.
R - Refresh Page. C - Clear The Counters Of This Page.
Figure E-23 LAN Statistics Screen
View Menu
E-25
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver.1.00 31/IR (date)
SYSTEM STATISTICS
----------------Counter Name
Val
Counter Name
WAN in Octets
83504
WAN Alignment Errors
WAN Out Octets
1950
WAN Aborted Frames
WAN Out Frames
1723
WAN Short Frames
WAN to LAN Frames Transfer
1698
WAN RX FIFO Overrun Error
WAN IP Datagram Received
1723
WAN to CPU Frames Errors
WAN to CPU Discarded
0
WAN Frame Too Long Errors
WAN to LAN Discarded
0
WAN IP Header Errors
WAN Out Errors
0
WAN IP Addres Errors
WAN CRC Errors
0
PPP Address Error
PPP Control Error
DLCI Unrecognized Error
Frame Relay Forward Conge
Frame Relay Backward Conge
Val
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
P - Previous Screen. ESC - Back To Previous Menu.
R - Refresh Page. C - Clear The Counters Of This Page.
Figure E-24 WAN Statistics Screen
E.12 Diagnostic Tool (PING Terminal) Menu
This section provides information on the diagnostic tool provided with IR-IP
(the ping utility).
To access the Diagnostic Tools menu:
•
In the Main menu, type 6.
The Diagnostic Tools menu appears (Figure E-25).
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
Device Control
View
Diagnostic Tools (PING terminal)
=====================================================================
1. Ping IP Address
:192.168.100.011
2. Start Pinging
:>>>
3. Stop Pinging
:>>>
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-25 Diagnostics Tools Menu
E-26
Diagnostic Tool (PING Terminal) Menu
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Using the Ping
Function
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
The Ping option is used to confirm IP connectivity by pinging other IP
hosts. Connectivity is confirmed by receiving a reply from the remote
(pinged) IP host.
To ping a host:
1.
From the Diagnostic Tools menu, type 1 and enter the desired host IP
address.
2.
Press <Enter> to confirm the destination IP address.
3.
To start pinging, type 2 on the Diagnostic Tools screen.
After pinging starts, you can monitor the ping status. A typical screen
is shown in Figure E-26.
Note
After pinging is started, it continues in the background even if you exit the
Diagnostics Tools screen. In this case, a Ping Running message appears in the
top upper left-hand corner of the screen.
4.
To stop pinging, type 3 from the Diagnostic Tools menu.
A Ping Stopped message is displayed.
To clear the message and return to the Diagnostic Tools screen,
press any key.
IR_IP
<IR-IP>
S/W Ver. 1.00 31/IR (date)
Quick Setup
Management Access
Advanced Setup
Device Control
View
Diagnostic Tools (PING terminal)
=====================================================================
1. Ping IP Address
:192.168.100.011
2. Start Pinging
:>>>
3. Stop Pinging
:>>>
Pinging 192.168.212.001 Sent 27 Recvd 25
Lost 2
Resp.Time 60 ms
Press one of the numbers to select or ESC:
Figure E-26 Diagnostic Tools Menu after Receiving Pinging Response
Diagnostic Tool (PING Terminal) Menu
E-27
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
E.13 Erasing User’s Configuration
The user-defined configuration parameters are stored in the IP router card
flash memory. After the user-defined configuration parameters are erased,
the IP router card automatically loads the factory-default parameters .
You may want to erase the current configuration parameters:
1.
Before IR-IP is prepared for operation in a new application.
2.
When you cannot configure IR-IP because its current LAN-interface IP
address and/or the Telnet password, are not known.
To erase the user’s configuration:
1.
Turn HCD-E1 off.
2.
Set all the four sections of the IR-IP DIP switch to ON.
3.
Turn HCD-E1 on and monitor the ERR indicator: it must turn on and
light steadily.
4.
While the ERR indicator is lit (within 15 seconds), set sections 1 and 2
of the DIP switch to OFF.
The IP router configuration is erased.
Note
If you do not set sections 1 and 2 to OFF within 15 seconds of power-up, the
IP router card ignores the setting of all the four sections to ON and starts
normal operation. In this case, it is recommended to turn HCD-E1 off and
then back on.
To abort the whole operation, turn HCD-E1 off, return all the four-switch
section to the desired positions, and then turn HCD-E1 on again.
5.
Turn HCD-E1 off, and the return all the four sections of the DIP switch
to the desired positions.
E.14 Erasing IR-IP Software
You may erase the IR-IP application software, without erasing the
user-defined parameters.
After the application software is erased, IR-IP starts its TFTP server
application, and waits for the downloading of software by a TFTP client
connected to its LAN interface. The procedure to be used to download the
application software in this case is also described below.
You may want to erase the application software if the downloading of new
software using the Device Control menu (see Figure E-16) fails, and the IP
router card does not function properly.
E-28
Erasing IR-IP Software
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual
Erasing
Application
Software
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
To erase the application software:
1. Turn HCD-E1 off.
2. Set all the four sections of IR-IP DIP switch to ON.
3.
Turn HCD-E1 on and monitor the IR-IP ERR indicator: it must turn on
and light steadily.
4.
While the ERR indicator is lit (within 15 seconds), set sections 3 and 4
of the IR-IP DIP switch to OFF.
The IP router application software is erased.
Note
If you do not set sections 3 and 4 to OFF within 15 sec of power-up, IR-IP
ignores the setting of all the four sections to ON and starts normal operation.
In this case, it is recommended to turn HCD-E1 off and then back on.
Alternately, to abort the whole operation, turn HCD-E1 off, return all the four
switches to the desired positions, and then turn HCD-E1 on again.
5.
Downloading
New Software
Turn HCD-E1 off, and the return all the four sections of the DIP switch
to the desired positions.
After erasing the application software, you can download new software
from any computer that can serve as a TFTP client.
To enable the downloading, IR-IP automatically activates its TFTP server
application with the following factory-default IP parameters:
•
IP address:192.168.205.1
•
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252.
Connect the computer serving as a TFTP client to the IR-IP 10BASE-T
connector in the way as a Telnet host used for preliminary configuration (see
the Performing Preliminary Configuration section). The computer IP
parameters must be configured as follows:
•
IP address 192.168.205.2
•
Subnet mask255.255.255.252
•
Default gateway 192.168.205.1
To download new software:
1.
If necessary, turn HCD-E1 off.
2.
Set all the four sections of the IR-IP DIP switch to OFF.
3.
Turn HCD-E1 on and monitor the ERR indicator: it must start flashing.
4.
Connect the computer to the IP router LAN interface and configure its
IP parameters as explained above.
5.
Run a standard TFTP client application on the Telnet host, and
download the appropriate software file.
If the download is successful, IR-IP starts using the new software.
If the downloading fails, repeat the download process.
Erasing IR-IP Software
E-29
Appendix E - IR-IP Interface Module
E-30
Erasing IR-IP Software
HCD-E1 Installation & Operation Manual